Home

Concurrent Assembly Mock-Up User Guide and Menu Reference

1. For more information see Chapter 2 Configuring Concurrent Assembly Mock Up suspending a Specified Number of Models To suspend a specific number of models to solve regenerate the components to which they are associated set the variable with the maximum number of models you want to be able to suspend plus for the active model The default is 6 See the section Examples of Moving Between Adrawings and Models in Chapter 5 for more information about suspending models setenv CADDS_MAX PART nn Where nn is the number of parts models and or Adrawings you want to be able to suspend Please note For additional information see the template files in usr apl cadds scripts templates caddsrec Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 1 39 Introduction to Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Accessing CAMU Accessing CAMU Access CAMU from the window environment or from the CADDS LDM menu To access CAMU from your system s window environment do the following 1 Log in to your system and start your window environment 2 After the window environment appears open a shell window At the prompt type cadds5 assembly or cadds5 if CV_UI_DEFAULT_ENV is set to assembly Press RETURN The CAMU LDM menu appears If you have been working in CADDS you can access CAMU from the CADDS LDM menu as follows 1 On the top bar of the CADDS LDM menu click LDM Mode with the left mouse button
2. 1 34 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Introduction to Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Accessing Functions To display online command information for a specific task or function 1 Select the Information Access icon from the top bar menu and the Command Help option from the menu 2 Choose the subject area from the displayed list for example Components 3 Choose the verb noun combination that best describes the task function for example ADD COMPONENT The system responds with a window containing information that describes the verb noun selected The information includes e General description e The valid mode Model or Draw in which the task function operates e Syntax e Descriptions of modifiers used with the Verb Noun command Figure 1 12 CADDS Viewfile Window Add Component PAGE FORWARD PAGE BACKWARD LINE FORWARD LINE BACK WARD BOTTOM DONE ADD COMPOHEXT See also Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference CADDS amp Release amp DESCRIFTION The ADD COMFOKERT command adds new or existing components to the structure of the active assembly while optionally associating viewing and positioning the component s model REQUIREMENT The parent component to which the new component is added must be locked SYHTAR ADD COMPOREHT lt rcequired modifier optional modifiers MODIFIERS Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 1 35
3. Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 7 17 Changing the Assembly Structure Mirroring a Component 8 Click the Plane option to get the plane selection menu Here different menus appear for Parametric and Explicit Assembly environments e Parametric plane selection Figure 7 4 Parametric Plane Selection menu Refer to the Parametric Modeling User Guide and Menu Reference for details on specifying planes To perform mirroring about the x y and z planes these are the active Cplanes you need to specify a location through which the plane passes e Explicit plane selection Figure 7 5 Explicit Plane selection menu The first row icons are similar in their behavior to the MX MY and MB orientation options respectively of Explicit modeling environment With the MX and MY options you can perform mirroring about the x and y planes of the source components Cplane With MB option first the MX mirroring is performed and then the MY mirroring is done You do not need to specify the location The location is the origin of the source component or subassembly Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Changing the Assembly Structure Mirroring a Component The second row icons are similar in their behavior as explained in parametric plane selection above 9 Select Done to complete the mirroring of component Please note For part mirroring you can use old CADDS pa
4. Figure 7 2 Mirror Component property sheet Mirror Component Reference Component Component Instance gt ityre_t Parent il 3 l Component Hane Suffix 7 Create Part Database Cancel If you are mirroring a component into a reference assembly specify input in the Reference column If you are mirroring a component in the main assembly specify input in the Component column 2 Enter the name of the component instance you want to mirror in the Component Instance field in one of the following ways e Select the component from the structure or select the model instance from the graphics window e Type in the component instance name 3 Enter the parent component name to which you want the mirrored component to be attached in the Parent field in one of the following ways e Select the parent component from the assembly structure using the middle mouse button e Type the name of the parent component in the parent field If you do not specify any parent component the mirrored component is attached to the parent of the original component Please note The assembly to which the parent component instance belongs has to be active 7 16 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Changing the Assembly Structure Mirroring a Component 4 Specify the suffix to be appended to the original component class name at the Component Name Suffix field If no suffix is spec
5. Choosing a Host System for DBB_LDAEMON_HOST Although you can choose any system in the network as the host system for DB_DAEMON_HOST be sure to evaluate the considerations given on the following pages to achieve optimum performance and efficiency of the system Performance Considerations Although you can designate a CADDS user s system as the DB_DAEMON_HOST the user might experience some reduction in system performance 2 8 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Configuring Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Configuring Multi User CAMU The following factors determine the degree of performance reduction if any relative to CAMU usage e CPU configuration e Memory RAM available e Amount of concurrent users accessing active assemblies e Size of the active assemblies e Amount of separate assemblies e Degree of activation filing activity in active assemblies Network Considerations Performance of multi user CAMU can be affected by the network configuration If the ODB_SERVER process is running on a remote system runtime performance could be degraded due to the network problems If the DB_DAEMON_HOST is set up on a system separate from the system that has the assembly directory or part library directories performance can be affected when activating or filing assemblies This is because the network would have to be traversed when either reading in data from the parent databases to the warehouse proc
6. 2 From the choices select Assemblies The LDM for CAMU appears The CAMU LDM menu displays the active CVPATH the active directory and a list of the assemblies in your current working directory You can also display a list of parts in your active CVPATH From the LDM menu you can activate a new or existing assembly specifying the environment 1 40 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Introduction to Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Accessing the Associative Topology Bus ATB Option Accessing the Associative Topology Bus ATB Option You can use the ATB option to share the part and assembly data across CADDS 5 and Pro ENGINEER You can access Pro ENGINEER parts or assemblies in the Assembly environment You can also share part geometry topology and assembly data in CADDS 5 and Pro ENGINEER in an associative manner You can export a part or assembly from CADDS 5 or Pro ENGINEER as a Translated Image Model TIM part or assembly and also import these TIM parts or assemblies in CADDS 5 or Pro ENGINEER A TIM part is a part that is translated from a source part originally created in a different CAD system For example you can export a CADDS 5 assembly as Pro ENGINEER TIM assembly and activate this Pro ENGINEER TIM assembly in Pro ENGINEER Similarly you can export a Pro ENGINEER assembly as a CADDS 5 TIM assembly and also activate this CADDS 5 TIM assembly in CADDS 5 Please note Use CADDS 5 precisio
7. Specifying Two Locations 8 37 Example 3 Rotating a Component around the y Axis passing through a Location 8 38 Example 4 Rotating a Component around an Axis Specified by Two Locations 8 39 Example 5 Translating a Component by a Displacement Specified by Two Locations 8 40 Clearing a Component s Inherited Orientation 8 4 Positioning Tools 8 42 Utilities for Positioning 8 42 Contents xii Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 8 44 Highlighting the Appearance of Geometry Using Interoart Constraints About Interpart Constraints 9 2 Basic Steps to Use Constraints in an Assembly 9 2 Selecting Variables from a Model to Include in Your Assembly ___ 9 4 Placing Component Variables in the Active Assembly 9 7 Constraint Variable Names of Imported Components 9 10 Preparing to Add Equations Between Variables 9 12 When Are Equations Solved 9 12 Solving Equations Manually 9 12 Changes to the Variables in the Associated Parts 9 13 Establishing Relationships Between Variables 9 14 In Automatic Mode 9 15 In Manual Mode 9 15 Changing Variable Values and Applying the Changes__ 9 17 Changing Variable Values 9 17 Applying the Changes Automatic Mode Only 9 18 In Manual Mode 9 19 Regenerating the Component 9 20 Forcing a Variable to Remain Constant 9 22 Deleting a Variable 9 23 Adrawings and Alternate Views Adrawings 10 2 Significanc
8. You must have Acrobat Reader installed to view and print PDF files The default documentation directories are e usr apl cadds data html pdf doc_number pdaf UNIX e CDROM_Drive usr apl cadds data html1 pd f doc_number pdf Windows XX Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Preface Resources and Services For resources and services to help you with PTC Parametric Technology Corporation software products see the PTC Customer Service Guide It includes instructions for using the World Wide Web or fax transmissions for customer support Documentation Comments PTC welcomes your suggestions and comments You can send feedback electronically to doc webhelp ptc com Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Xxi Chapter 1 Introduction to Concurrent Assembly Mock Up This chapter describes the Concurrent Assembly Mock Up product defines terminology and tells you how to access its functions The topics are What You Can Do With CAMU Local Data Manager Menu Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Windows The Assembly Structure Assembly Tree Window CAMU Top Bar Options Assembly Environment Task Sets Accessing Functions Reversing a Command Preparing to Work Accessing CAMU Accessing the Associative Topology Bus ATB Option Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 1 1 Introduction to Concurrent Assembly Mock Up What You Can Do With CAMU What
9. creating 11 4 listing 11 7 removing 11 18 removing association with component 11 6 Automatic mode solving equation in assembly 9 12 B Base component 6 17 6 33 behavior 6 33 designation 6 34 6 35 Blanking a subassembly 7 29 BOM CVMAC program 11 19 CG CADDS_MAX_PART 2 4 CADDSASSOC_UID 2 4 CADDSENABVP 2 3 CADDShade II 12 17 CALLBACK_SERVER crash recovery 2 24 CAMU 1 2 accessing function 1 28 Adrawing options 1 22 assembly options 1 22 attributes task set 1 26 component options 1 22 crash recovery 2 24 data management 2 21 database server ODB_SERVER 2 3 filling options 1 22 Help 1 33 LDM menu 1 4 multiuser configuration 2 7 preparing to work in 1 37 product description 1 2 query option 1 22 single user environment 2 15 task set 1 23 top bar options 1 22 windows 1 5 Cancel on a property sheet 1 31 Change Adrawing 10 11 Change Variable property sheet 9 17 Changing a component 7 4 Changing a reference assembly 7 25 Index 2 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Index Changing Assembly Structure 7 2 adding assembly by 7 3 adding component by 7 2 changing assembly by 7 3 changing component by 7 2 copying component by 7 2 removing assembly by 7 3 removing component by 7 3 Character in variable name 9 10 Child component 1 8 Close reference 3 26 example 3 27 Command 1 33 cannot undo 1 36 help on 1 33 reversing 1 36 window access to 1 31 Command help
10. Assembly Structure Model associated with bar_1 ar E lI Model associated with barbell_1 Select Outline View and Detail Unview on the View Component property sheet Geometry associated with the specified component appears in the Graphics window In this example only geometry associated with the barbe11_1 component is viewed Select Outline Unview and Detail View on the View Component property sheet The geometry associated with the leaf components of the specified component appears in the Graphics window In the example geometry associated with the bar_1 weight_1 and weight_2 components that is barbe11_1 s leaf components are viewed Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 8 21 Defining Assembly Geometry Viewing a Component s Associated Model Geometry Select Outline View and Detail View on the View Component property sheet The geometry associated with the specified component and its leaf components appear in the Graphics window tt In the example geometry associated with the barbe11_1 component and the geometry associated with the bar_1 weight_1 and weight_2 components is viewed Controlling Layer Display In both the Parametric and Explicit assembly environments you can show model graphics with true layer differentiation For example if you have used separate layers to house parameters model geometry and so forth CAMU maintains layer separation when viewing the model geo
11. Changes You Can Make to the Assembly Structure You can modify the structure of your assembly in a variety of ways With ADD COMPONENT you can e Add anew component to your assembly structure e Create additional instances of an existing component With CHANGE COMPONENT you can e Change the name of a component e Change the instance name of a component e Assign the component to a different parent e Change the model with which the component is associated or remove the association between the model and the component e Associate the component with a different mode based on revision name for example change a model association from abx8020 a to abx8020 b or remove the revision number With COPY COMPONENT you can e Copy an existing component e Make one or more instances of the copy e Give the copy ies a new component name e Assign the copy ies to a parent you specify e Have the copy ies associated with the same or different model e View and position the associated model of the copy ies in the context of the assembly geometry e Create anew component class 7 2 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Changing the Assembly Structure Ways to Change the Assembly Structure With REMOVE COMPONENT you can e Remove a component from the structure This also removes the association between the component and its corresponding model With ADD ASSEMBLY you can e Include an externa
12. Engine Merrie Selection Method Image Details W Associative caser amp y Blank viewed Objects El Remove Tangent Edges Show Topological Edges E Dashed Hidden Lines Cancel 12 12 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Documenting the Assembly Generating HLR Using HIDE OBJECT a Associative The HLR image that is created is associative that is whenever you move a viewed component all the HLR curves and limbs corresponding to the component also move This is the default When you do not select this option CADDS applies the NONASSOCIATIVE modifier to the command HIDE OBJECT and the image created is nonassociative For a nonassociative image the HLR curves and limbs do not move when the underlying component is moved You can create a nonassociative image in the CAMU environment only b Layer This is a suboption to the modifier NONASSOCIATIVE With this option all the nonassociative curves can be put on the selected layer e Blank Viewed Object Use this option to override the default which causes view parts or assemblies to be blanked during the Remove Hidden Lines process If you select this option you must manually blank the viewed parts in order to obtain the correct image d Remove Tangent Edges Choose this option to suppress all the tangent edges for the selected solids On selecting this option CADDS identifies all the tangent edges in all the selected objects a
13. Figure 5 18 Lock Unlock Component menu for an reference assembly Lock Unlock Component Reference Component Component Instance jwheel_i 3 Hl M Subassembly T Model You can differentiate the lock status of the reference instance and the root node of the reference assembly in the assembly structure as e Lock on only the reference instance is represented with a asterisk on the reference instance node e Lock on the root node and the reference instance of the reference assembly is represented with two asterisks on the reference instance node e If the reference assembly is active the character A appears on the reference instance node Please note You can lock the root node of the reference assembly only if you have the lock on the reference instance 5 34 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Working in an Existing Assembly Locking Components Attribute Groups and Models Figure 5 19 Different lock status of root node of a reference assembly Only the reference instance 15 locked ie Wis tarice ryoinoe You can unlock the root node only or both the root node and the reference instance Figure 5 20 Unlock Component Property Sheet Lock Unlock Component Reference Component Component Instance faxi 7 Subassembly 7 Reference Root Node only Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 5 35 Working in an Existing Assembly Refreshing
14. Quality Interference Computation 50 ee Performance Quality Selection Method Image Details gt Cancel Remove Hidden Lines Engine Faceted _ analytical Quality isi Interference Computation E Tolerance mj Limb Tolerance No of Segments By Refine Selection Method Image Details Apply Cancel e Select Interference Computation to obtain better HLR results when the objects interfere with each other Choose this option in the Analytical engine mode to divide all the curves into an independent number of segments In the Faceted mode facets are created instead of segments and their number depends on the quality factor you select Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 12 9 Documenting the Assembly Generating HLR Using HIDE OBJECT Please note This option can decrease the processing speed Associative HLR is valid for all viewed model geometry VIEW COMPONENT Geometry need not exist physically Select Intersection Curves to display the intersection curves while using the HIDE OBJECT command This option and its submodifiers are available only if the Interference Computation option is selected first Selecting this option automatically enables interference This option involves a Boolean operation between the interfering objects and may take a significant amount of time for complex and large assemblies and parts This option and its submodifiers
15. Table 6 4 Align Constraint Non Zero Offset Type Point Plane Line Cylinder Line Distance Parallel Distance Parallel Cylinder Distance Parallel Distance Parallel Multiple Instances of a Subassembly Class The assembly structure shown below consists of the root node four instances of the piston assy subassembly and one crankshaft component Assembly Structure pistoni niston assy_1 conrod endcap_ niston_z niston assy_2 conrod_z endcap_z crank U61 2931 niston_ niston assy_3 conrod_ re a a ee cs ee ee i ee ee endcap_2 crankshaft piston histon ass _4 M conprod_4 ew endcap_4 6 10 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Parametric Positioning Creating Positioning Constraints You cannot establish different positioning constraints between the child components of each piston assy instance The positioning constraints between the components of any piston assy subassembly are the same for all instances of that subassembly The relative orientation relationship to one another of piston conrod and endcap is the same for all the instances of piston assy Creating a New Class to Capture Unique Positioning If you want to change the positioning constraint of any instance in a multi instance subassembly class for example to orient piston_1
16. 4 Solve all components 5 Regenerate all components When Are Equations Solved To choose either Automatic or Manual mode for solving equations click Setup from the top bar Click Solution This displays the Solution Setup Property Sheet The default mode is Automatic e In Automatic mode any equation added to establish a relationship between variables is solved as soon as you click Apply on the Add Equation property sheet e In Manual mode equations are solved in a separate step after you add them using the Calculator icon In the active assembly you add equation s while active in the root component The equation is solved either manually or automatically in the root component No changes are mapped back to the respective models solving Equations Manually To solve equations manually select the Calculator icon A menu appears Choose Solve Equation When you choose Solve All Equations all equations in the root component of the active assembly are solved Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Using Interpart Constraints Preparing to Add Equations Between Variables Changes to the Variables in the Associated Parts Whether you solve equations manually or automatically solve the component to have changes to variable values reflected in the model Solve Component is a separate step To see the changes to the model reflected in the model graphics on your screen regenerate the component
17. Assembly Structure option on the property sheet With this the structures root node model and the default Adrawing are updated Filing with and without Exiting If you file and exit you return to the LDM menu If you file an assembly and all suspended items but do not exit both the active part model or Adrawing and all suspended Adrawings and or models are updated with your changes You remain where you were before you filed the assembly Selections from the FILE Icon When you select FILE from the top bar the following menu appears FILE ASSEMBLY FILE ASSEMBLY W OPTIONS FILE AND EXIT FILE AND EXIT W OPTIONS QUIT SUSPENDED QUIT REFERENCE QUIT AND EXIT CONSTRUCT PART INSERT PART EXIT CADDS 5 Table 4 1 File menu options Menu Option What Happens FILE ASSEMBLY All changes made to any Adrawings models or assembly structures in your active assembly during this work session are added to the database You remain in the active assembly and in the active model or Adrawing you were in when you selected FILE ASSEMBLY FILE ASSEMBLY files the active main assembly and all active reference assemblies 4 4 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Filing an Assembly Filing Your Changes Table 4 1 File menu options Menu Option What Happens FILE ASSEMBLY A property sheet appears listing your active and suspended W O
18. Choose the All Instances option to remove all instances of the relation and click Apply Remove Component Reference Component Component Instance r2308_1 All Instances 7 10 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Changing the Assembly Structure Removing a Component One instance of wheel is removed from each instance of axle as along the r2308 relation Associated model graphics are also removed The names of the remaining components are unchanged embly Structure axle as_i HI wheel_4 1 ee ee ee ee wagon LI framed axl e as_2 n wheel_2 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 7 11 Changing the Assembly Structure Copying a Component Copying a Component You can make one or more copies of a component and specify the parent component to which you want the copy ies attached When you copy a component all its characteristics including the associated attributes if any are copied The copy can have a parent different from the original component instance If you do not specify a parent the system attaches the copy to the original parent of the component you are copying If you are making multiple copies the number of copies you specify before you click Apply are attached to the same parent If the new parent has multiple instances the copy ies that you make are attached to every instance of that new parent You can give the c
19. Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Configuring Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Configuring Multi User CAMU 3 Delete all LOCK and TEMP files within the assembly s directory 4 Activate the assembly Please note Only the superuser can kill the ODB_SERVER process Terminating the ASSEMBLY_DESIGN and ODB_SERVER Process Do not use the kill 9 command to terminate the ASSEMBLY_DESIGN or ODB_SERVER process This is especially important if multiple users are working on the same assembly If one user issues kill 9 on the ASSEMBLY_DESIGN process it does not detach from the ODB_SERVER process and prevents other users from continuing their work on the assembly If you must terminate this process use kill without the 9 option Multi User Environment In a multi user environment a problem can occur when the active main assembly s ODB_SERVER process has not properly terminated a particular user s session but the assembly is still active by other users To resolve this condition all users currently active in the assembly must exit the assembly to terminate the ODB_SERVER process The ODB_SERVER process should then end normally and all users should be able to activate the assembly and resume work Other issues that can occur in the multi user environment are as follows e The CADDS command window displays Cannot Activate Assembly messages These message could be displayed due to any of the followin
20. Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 8 27 Defining Assembly Geometry Moving a Component 12 To properly locate whee1_2 along the axle choose the Move Component option from the COMP ASSY task set Select the Translate Component icon from the property sheet 18 Click Apply A prompt appears for you to specify a location Specify IX 1 5875 The figure shows whee1_2 properly located Alternative Procedure for Orienting and Positioning wheel_2 This procedure replaces Steps 4 through 12 in the Using Translate Rotate and Orient Component on page 8 25 example 8 28 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Defining Assembly Geometry Moving a Component In this example wheel_1 wheel_2 and axle_1 are viewed whee1_2 is at its origin position and must be correctly oriented and located 1 Select the Orient Component option from the Move Component property sheet Enter whee1_2 as the name of the component instance in the Component Instance field Figure 8 19 Move Component property sheet with Orient option Hove Component Reference Component Companent Instance yheel_2 Cancel 2 Select AZ and enter 180 If you select more than one of AX AY or AZ the system rotates about the x axis first then y then z Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 8 29 Defining Assembly Geometry Moving a Component 3 The prompt appe
21. Dimensioning and Annotating Inserting Dimensions 1 Change your task set to Drafting To do this select the task set name COMP ASSY or whatever task set is active Select Drafting from the resultant pulldown menu 2 Insert dimensions as needed 3 Insert annotation as needed Please note See the Design and Drafting User Guide and Menu Reference for instructions on how to insert dimensions and annotation 5 6764 005 oe Please note Ifa particular surface has more than one limb all its dimensions become nonassociative and are marked up If a part corresponding to a component is renamed or deleted dimensions associated with the viewed component are lost You can optionally change associative dimensions to nonassociative using the CHANGE DIMENSION NONASSOCIATIVE command However you cannot associate a nonassociative dimension with a viewed entity using the CHANGE DIMENSION ASSOCIATIVE command 12 24 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Documenting the Assembly Dimensioning and Annotating Regenerating Dimensions e If you blank a component using the BLANK COMPONENT command the dimensions associated with the blanked component remain as they were before blanking e If you unview a component using the UNVIEW COMPONENT command the dimensions associated with the unviewed component appear in red along with an encircled slash symbol This state of the dimension indicates its partial di
22. Introduction to Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Accessing Functions You can browse through the text by e Selecting browsing options from the top bar of the window e Manipulating the scroll bar along the left side of the window Click Done from the top bar to close the window 1 36 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Introduction to Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Reversing a Command Reversing a Command To reverse the last CAMU command or function you have executed click Undo from the ASSEMBLY PAR menu task set located at the upper left corner of the screen The assembly returns to its former status Please note Undo is also available on the context sensitive pulldown menu When you click Undo the latest command you are able to undo is undone If you click Undo again the previous command is undone You can continue this until you reach a command that cannot be undone Commands You Cannot Undo Any command issued before filing the assembly cannot be undone The following commands cannot be undone e ACTIVATE ASSEMBLY e ACTIVATE MODEL e ACTIVATE ADRAWING e LIST ADRAW e VERIFY OBJECT e REFRESH ASSEMBLY e MODIFY APPEARANCE e LOCK COMPONENT e UNLOCK COMPONENT e SELECT ASSEMBLE In addition none of the inter part constraint commands can be undone except Change Component Name on an imported component For more information about inter part constraints see Chapter 9 Using Interpart
23. Select the Remove Attribute Group icon A property sheet appears Figure 11 11 Remove Attribute Group property sheet Remove Attribute Group Attribute Group bom Apply 2 The property sheet lists the attribute group names in the active assembly 3 Select the group s you want to remove 11 18 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Defining Nongraphic Information for the Assembly Generating Output Using Supplied CVMACs Generating Output Using Supplied CVMACs To extract attribute information and produce reports use a CVMAC program CAMU provides CVMAC programs as examples which you can use copy and modify to your specific needs You can also write additional programs supplied CVMAC Programs These are several CVMAC programs supplied with CAMU They are located in the usr apl cadds data am supplements directory Query The query CVMAC searches and identifies all components that contain specified attribute or value Define the assembly structure tree the attribute definition s and optionally value s you want to locate The program prints a component list Files for the query program are in the subdirectory query Bill of Material The BoM CVMAC prints attribute definitions and their assigned values displaying them in column format Yu must provide the following information e Assembly structure tree name e An output file name e A user name to be printed on the heade
24. Specify the revision of the Adrawing part You can use a maximum of 20 characters to specify the revision e No Revision Check the No Revision option to remove the revision associated with the selected Adrawing Please note You can specify the revision only if the Adrawing is not active or suspended Deleting an Adrawing You can delete an Adrawing definition from the assembly database using the Delete Adrawing option Select the Delete Adrawing option form the Adrawing menu of the top bar The Delete Adrawing property sheet appears Delete Adrawing new Apply Select the desired Adrawing name from the runtime list to delete the Adrawing Click Apply to confirm deletion of the adrawing Saving and Restoring Viewstates You can save the viewstates of the components of an assembly either to the active part or the Default Adrawing directory You can also restore the viewstate information from a saved file The viewstate file stores both the component instance name and the CAMU id to enable EPD Connect to also work with viewstates An error message is displayed when the component instance name is not found 10 12 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Adrawings and Alternate Views Basic Steps to Create an Alternate View To save or restore viewstates choose the Save Restore Viewstates option on the Adrawing menu This option opens the Save Restore Viewstates property sheet Figure 10 4 Sav
25. Use Export Variable to specify the variable s from each model you want to constrain You can do this in the Parametric modeling environment or in the Parametric assembly environment Please note Itis best to constrain as many variables as possible in the component model to control design of the model Export only the minimum amount of variables that are necessary to control constraints between components of the assembly This procedure assumes that you have already assigned variable names in your models and have defined relationships between variables in each model In the example that follows the user is working in the assembly wheel assy with all components viewed in the isometric orientation The user brings into the assembly variables from two different part models The variable mrad1 from the model wheel and the variable d1 from the model axle Figure 9 1 wheel assy 9 4 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Using Interpart Constraints Selecting Variables from a Model to Include in Your Assembly From each of the models between which you want to create constraints use Export Variable to specify the variables You can do this in the single part environment or in CAMU Follow these steps 1 Activate the model that contains variable s you want to relate to variable s in another model of your assembly Use the pop up menu in the Assembly Structure window to select Activate Model In the follow
26. example of constraint creation If you have set Select Assemble option ON see Automatic Assembly on page 6 32 all parametric positioning constraints are solved when you constrain a component Please note Each command line defines constraints for a single subassembly identified by the specified CINAME Do not specify another CINAME component instance name in the same command line The following properties are applicable when Select Assemble option is set ON After you have selected the modifier on the property sheet mate align or orient you can select one or more pair of entities Look for prompts in the Command window After specifying the first pair wait to see the result Your options are e If you are satisfied with the result select another pair of entities or another modifier e If nothing happens when you select the first pair you can use the Modify Position Constraints option to delete undesired constraints or select other options without exiting the command e If the result is not satisfactory or if components visually move out of view undo the operation by pressing the backspace key Please note Press the backspace key until the asterisk representing the entity selection is erased from the command line e Pressing the backspace key after the second pick undoes the last created constraint and moves the component to the position it was at before you created that constraint You can press backspace key onc
27. s CVPATH must be the same for multi user CAMU The most straightforward way to ensure this is to reference the mount point of the assembly directory in the CVPATH for example setenv CVPATH SHOME parts C usr2 parts assys Or if you want the assembly directory to also be the Create directory setenv CVPATH usr2 parts assys C SHOME parts Please note Do not use the HOME variable for the common assembly directory Each user may have a different home directory The restrictions that apply to the CVPATH for assembly databases do not apply when accessing the component models of the assemblies As long as the path specified in CVPATH references the directory level in which the component models exist the assembly finds them regardless of how they are referenced through the NFS mount If you have problems accessing the components of an assembly choose Verify Object and find the name of the component part that the assembly database is referencing then provide a directory in the CVPATH that points to this directory Example User 1 and User 2 Active Assembly usr2 parts assys assembly Assembly parts actually reside on the server in the users libparts directory User 1 has a parts directory mounted as server users parts User 2 has it mounted as usr2 libparts If both user 1 and user2 have paths to users parts and usr2 libpart respectively then the assembly finds the parts Software Prerequisites The DB_DAEMON_HOST system an
28. shape location 12 16 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Documenting the Assembly Generating HLR Using CADDShade II Generating HLR Using CADDShade Il The CADDShade application functionality is now displayed in the main graphics window The optional Picture window is no longer available You can view Parametric models in the Explicit environment in part mode or in CAMU You can access CADDShade settings from the Setup menu on the top bar and invoke commands from the Interactive View Control option on the VIEW menu You can also generate nonassociative HLR of the model using the appropriate rendering options in the RENDER VIEW and CHANGE RENDERVIEW commands CADDShade functionality generates hidden line representation very quickly including if required drawing annotation such as dimensions notes drawing border and so on However the resultant raster graphics are limited in quality and at handling component intersections when compared with those generated using HIDE OJECT see Generating HLR Using HIDE OBJECT on page 12 5 For more information refer to the CADDSHADE IT User Guide File Structure and the Shade Hide Picture File To use the CADDShade II functionality each viewed model in the assembly must have the _gr file and the tessellation data stored in the _gr file must be in sync with the model Preparing to Use CADDShade For the CADDShade program to recognize and perform the sha
29. standard assembled or exploded alternate locations for viewed model geometry When you activate an Adrawing in CAMU the part is activated as well as a drawing named DDRAW Assembly database The actual assembly file on disk For example when you activate an assembly named 061393 the actual assembly database is an _db file resident in the directory 061393 Assembly instance The root component of the reference assembly See Reference instance Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Glossary 1 Glossary Assembly structure The hierarchical representation of the assembly or product as seen in the Assembly Structure window It graphically represents the relationships between the piece parts and subassemblies that comprise the overall assembly Base component The component with respect to which all other components are parametrically positioned A base component is identified in order to assemble the selected parent component There can be only one base component for each subassembly for which parametric positioning has been defined CPL Acronym for Construction Plane Also referred to as Cplane The active CPL determines the current modeling coordinate system XOYOZO and orientation of the X Y and Z axes Child component A component that is one level down from a parent component Component A generic term for any one piece of the structure shown as a small box A component is also r
30. v endcap_4 i 6 22 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Parametric Positioning Using Constrain Component 3 Manipulate view display to scale and position the associated model geometry in the Graphics window 4 Issue the Select Assemble On command SELECT ASSEMBLE H Oni Please note Ifyou issue the Select Assemble On command at this stage the constraint are solved immediately on satisfying the specific constraint Constraint solving is delayed until you select the Select Assemble On Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 6 23 Parametric Positioning Using Constrain Component 5 Open the Constrain Component property sheet piston ass 6 Specify the name of the parent component Using the left mouse button select the piston assy_1 component in the assembly structure This fills in the name in the Component name field 7 Select a base component Select the Base Component icon from the property sheet The property sheet updates to display the Base Component name field Please note Specifying a base component is optional but recommended If you do not specify one using the menu the system defaults to the first component that you select in the Constrain Component command A subassembly can only have one base component 6 24 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Parametric Positioning Using Constrain Component 8 U
31. 0n0000 Hate supporti handle Satisfied 2 000000 Orient support handle Satisfied 30 000000 The name of the selected component instance is shown in the Component Instance field List You can view a list of existing position constraints of the specified component The list gives details of type of constraint geometry instance status and offset values of the constraints You can also get the listing to a report file by setting the environment variable AD_LIST_CONSTRAINTS to yes in your caddsrc or caddsrc local file setenv AD_LIST_CONSTRAINTS yes Status Following are the various status of the listed constraints Invalid Constraint The No Geometry message in the Modify Position Constraints menu could mean any of the following e The model geometry referenced by the constraint has been deleted e The component to which one of the geometry belongs has been deleted e One or both of the referenced components no longer have the original common parent e The model associated with one or both of the components has been changed Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Parametric Positioning Using Constrain Component Under Constrained This indicates that the geometry within that subassembly cannot be uniquely positioned due to insufficient constraints Fully Constrained This means that the assembly is well defined and all degrees of freedoms have been exhausted Overconstrained This indicates
32. 1 33 property sheet 1 33 Command palette options 12 7 Component 1 7 adding 3 9 copying 7 12 mirroring 7 15 moving 8 24 obtaining information about 7 36 reordering 7 32 Component class 1 8 changing a component name and 7 6 Component geometry creating relationship between 6 8 Component instance 1 7 changing 7 4 changing position in Assembly Structure 7 32 placing below another component instance 7 34 Component name 7 4 changing 7 4 creating a new class 7 6 Component orienting 8 32 Compressing a subassembly 7 30 example 7 30 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up CAMU features 1 2 Concurrent design 5 27 Configuring CAMU 2 7 choosing a host system 2 7 CVPATH prerequisites 2 10 DB_DAEMON_HOST 2 7 network consideration 2 8 Network File System NFS prerequisites 2 8 other system considerations 2 11 performance consideration 2 7 sample procedure 2 11 software prerequisites 2 10 testing multi user configuration 2 13 troubleshooting 2 14 Constraint component 6 13 align 6 15 base component 6 17 fix 6 16 mate 6 15 orient 6 16 property sheet 6 14 Constraint deleting 6 20 example 6 20 Constraint in assembly 9 2 basic steps 9 2 change in model geometry 9 20 changing variable value 9 17 automatic mode 9 18 manual mode 9 19 component name 9 10 equation 9 12 exporting variable from active model 9 5 extended variable name 9 10 importing variable to assembly model 9 7 variable 9 2 variable name imported component 9 10 variab
33. 19 You can use the Attribute feature only from the Explicit Assembly environment Before you begin creating and defining attributes think about the kinds of reports or lists you want to generate with the attribute information you assign to your assembly For example you might wish to produce a bill of materials Attributes Task Set The Attributes task set is available in the Explicit Assembly environment Figure 11 1 Attributes task set options Create Attribute Group Remove Attribute Group Associate Attribute Group Dissociate Attribute Group Lock Attribute Gr List Attribute Groups ock Attrioute woups Create Attribute Modfy Attribute Remove Attribute Edit Attribute 11 2 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Defining Nongraphic Information for the Assembly About Attributes Overview of Procedure to Use Attributes Define an attribute group which can be the name or category of one of the reports you want to produce with the data assigned to components For example choose a group name BOM to represent the bill of materials you want to produce Create attributes within this attribute group Each attribute name refers to one type of information you want to store with each individual component For the attribute group BOM you might have the attributes part number vendor and description For each attribute you create specify its name the group it belongs to the attribute type integer
34. 5 Options Displayed on the Shortcut Menus State of the Node Option Blanked Unblank Unblanked Blank Highlighted Unhighlight Unhighlighted Highlight Locked Unlock Unlocked Lock Viewed Unview Unviewed View Assembly Tree Window Top Bar Options You can perform some operations on the whole assembly rather than on an individual component The following options are available from the top bar menu on the Assembly Tree Window e File Provides options for filing the assembly printing the assembly structure setting the page size and orientation and for exiting the assembly session Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 1 19 Introduction to Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Assembly Tree Window e Edit Provides options for adding changing copying deleting and for exporting a component e View Provides options for blanking or unblanking highlighting or removing the highlight displaying or unviewing a selected component displaying or hiding the tooltip text and for displaying either the part names or the model names of the components Also provides options for expanding all nodes of the collapsed assembly structure generating a report and for generating a list of Adrawings or assemblies e Options Provides options for specifying font size font style and the look and feel of the Assembly Tree e Assembly This option appears only when you select a component on the Assembly Tree It provides op
35. Access icon i at the upper left of the screen On minimizing the CADDS window the CAMU Status window also closes You can view it again on maximizing the CADDS window However if you close the status window by choosing the Cancel option on the CAMU Status window then it is not displayed again Please note The CAMU status window is displayed along with the Assembly Structure Window only That is when the environmental variable AD_C_SERVER_ENABLED is set to no Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 7 35 Changing the Assembly Structure Obtaining Information about Components Using the Verify Object Function VERIFY OBJECT provides a brief or detailed description of the component instance or assembly instance you select The description appears in the text window or the Report Window In the Parametric environment the description appears automatically in the Report Window but does not appear in the text window In the Explicit environment the description of the component or components is by default displayed only in the text window To view the description of the component or components in the Report Window in Explicit environment set the environment variable in the caddsrc local file as follows setenv USE_EXP_REP_WINDOW yes The default setting for this environment variable is no The description includes the mirror status of the component along with the plane about which the mirroring is performed
36. Add Assembly Referente Component Parent io iwhl Assembly wheel External Assembly handle_1 ican j gt Copy Assembly Layer l mier and Position lye Reference Assembly Layer List The component selected in the assembly structure or the graphics window appears in the Parent field 2 Select the parent component Enter the parent name in the Parent field In this example whl_assy_1 is the parent name 3 Enter the name of the root component in the Assembly field In this case it is wheel 4 Enter the name of the external assembly as it exists in your create directory in the External Assembly field 5 The Copy Assembly option on the property sheet is selected by default 6 Click Reference Assembly You can view and position the reference or inserted assembly within your active assembly 7 Enter a prefix to resolve name conflicts If the assembly you are adding copying has a component with the same name as an existing component in your active assembly supply a prefix and an optional delimiter The same applies for component instance associated attribute group name or attribute name The prefix and delimiter are added to the front of the component name of the external assembly that you are adding to the active assembly The prefix plus a delimiter has a maximum of seven characters Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 3 23 Creating a New Assembly Adding Existing
37. After you have selected Apply you cannot abort the command unless you select Abort from the Utilities command palette right mouse button in Graphics window or enter lt Control e gt Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 12 15 Documenting the Assembly Generating HLR Using HIDE OBJECT Updating the HLR Image To enable associative HLR set the following variable in your caddsrc local file setenv CADDSASSOC_UID yes Associative HLR does not update automatically when the original geometry is modified The UPDATE HLRIMAGE command updates previously generated associative HLR curves It has no effect on nonassociative HLR UPDATE HLRIMAGE rebuilds the HLR It recomputes curves limbs and surrogates to reflect any changes that have occurred since the previous HLR image was generated It also updates any associative dimensions to or between the affected HLR Associative dimensions to or between associative HLR are also updated by the HIDE OBJECT command This functionality can be used 1 In an active model where HLR is only based on geometry that is physically resident in the active model This is valid when parametric changes are made to the entity or when limbs are regenerated 2 In CAMU where HLR is based on viewed model geometry that is not physically resident in the active Adrawing This is valid when one or more viewed model instances VIEW COMPONENT undergo a change size
38. Align Between selected entities such as lines and planes Orient Use the Orient option to orient two planar faces of mating components to be at a specified angle with respect to each other In case no offset value is specified the distance between the faces is an unspecified degree of freedom The input for this option is the two faces of the mating components and a value for the angle between them You can orient planar faces and edges using this option Fix Use the Fix option to assemble a pair of components by superimposing coordinate systems attached to each component By using this option the two components are fully constrained Please note Both models must contain the identical CPLane coordinate system Use the Define CPlane command while active in each model to create them or use one of the seven supplied CPlanes Inputs are the two CPLs as stated above Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Parametric Positioning Using Constrain Component The user interaction sequence is 1 Select the first component Its associated model highlights in the graphics window All CPLanes in the associated model appear in the runtime list 2 Select the desired CPlane name from the runtime list 3 Select the second component Its associated model highlights in the graphics window All CPLanes in the associated model appear in the runtime list 4 Select the same CPLane name for the second model as y
39. Assembly Structure Plotting the Part History Tree Glossary 12 24 12 25 12 25 12 27 12 27 12 29 12 29 12 32 Contents xvi Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Preface Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference provides instructions for section leaders managers and design engineers who design assemblies comprised of explicit and parametric CADDS models Related Documents The following documents may be helpful as you use The following documents may be helpful as you use Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Explicit Modeling User Guide and Menu Reference Parametric Modeling User Guide and Menu Reference Parametric Modeling Best Practices Hidden Line Removal and AEC HLR User Guide and Menu Reference EPD Connect User Guide Installing and Configuring EPD Connect Installing CADDS 5 Managing CADDS 5 Harness Layout Menu and Technical Reference Design and Drafting User Guide and Menu Reference Using Associative Topology Bus Enabled CADDS 5i Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference xvii Preface Book Conventions The following table illustrates and explains conventions used in writing about CADDS applications Convention Example Explanation Menu selections and options List Section option Soecify Layer Indicates a selection you must make from a field menu or property sheet or a text field t
40. Change Renderview command with any of the shade or HLR rendering options and file the part without specifying the NOSHADE or NOTVE option vp_links Directory A vp_links subdirectory is created when you activate a part using either ACTIVATE PART or ACTIVATE MODEL provided you have the following line enabled in your caddsrc or caddsrc local file setenv CADDSENABVP yes The vp_links directory houses files that are created by the VIEW COMPONENT command These files exist only for the duration of the time that the associated model geometry is viewed They are deleted when you unview or exit the assembly This directory is required for model viewing in CAMU For this reason you should archive the vp_links directory of each model in your assembly when you archive the assembly and its models Aborting a Command lt Control e gt aborts a command It will get you out of most context switching problems where the error message Command not valid at this time has appeared 2 24 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Configuring Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Data Management Crash Recovery If you or another user who is also active in the assembly and there is an abnormal shutdown follow this crash recovery sequence 1 Runa slay script to kill your CADDS processes Please note You are provided with usr apl cadds scripts slay 2 If there are others still working concurrently in the ass
41. Class Removing a Component 7 6 7 7 Component Instance Numbers 7 8 Removing a Component by Removing the Relation Copying a Component 7 9 7 12 Contents x Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Positioning the Copied Component 7 14 Mirroring a Component 7 15 Example Mirroring a Component in the Parametric Environment by Creating a Part Database __ 7 19 Specifying Orientation for Mirror Copied Component____ 7 23 Changing a Reference Assembly 7 25 Editing an External Assembly 7 27 Understanding System Messages 7 28 Changing Structure Appearance 7 29 Blanking a Subassembly 7 29 Compressing a Subassembly 7 30 Reordering a Component 7 32 Placing a Component above Another in the Main Assembly___ 7 32 Placing a Component above Another in a Reference Assembly 7 33 Placing a Component below Another Component 7 34 Obtaining Information about Components 7 35 Using the CAMU Status Window 7 35 Using the Verify Object Function 7 36 Listing Reference Assemblies 7 39 Defining Assembly Geometry Guidelines for Creating Model Geometry 8 2 Working on Model Geometry 8 3 A New Component and Its Associated Model 8 3 Activating a Model 8 3 Using a Source Model to Create a New Model 8 4 Component Instances and Their Locations 8 6 Locations of Components in Reference Assemblies 8 6 Locating Model Space Origin for a New Model 8 7
42. Drawing It is a part and drawing implemented expressly for CAMU as a special CADDS part Adrawings allow you to define views to look at the assembly its components and their associated models Adrawings contain view states and layer information and are used to maintain assembly detail geometry When you activate a new assembly an assembly drawing file Adrawing called DEFAULT is activated Each assembly has a minimum of one Adrawing the DEFAULT Adrawing and can have multiple Adrawings For more information or additional terms see the Glossary The figure below shows the assembly named wagon labeled with examples of assembly structure terminology Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 1 9 Introduction to Concurrent Assembly Mock Up The Assembly Structure Figure 1 2 Assembly Structure for an Assembly Named wagon reference assembly nuti leaf component hub_3 anle_2 parent component of wheel 3 and wheel_ 4 child of frame _1 disk_4 wheel _4 relation instance hub siblin class of asle instance axle_1 leat root node instances of classes of Please note The assembly structure shown above is displayed in the Assembly Structure Window 1 10 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Introduction to Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Assembly Tree Window Assembly Tree Window An Assembly Tree Window supplements the Assembly Structure window The key features of th
43. Geometry Highlighting the Appearance of Geometry Highlighting the Appearance of Geometry Highlight Component lets you highlight model geometry associated with a specific component or subassembly and save the highlighted view state upon filing the active Adrawing The highlighted view state is retained the next time you activate the Adrawing Components and their corresponding model geometry remain highlighted until you turn off the highlighting using the Highlight Component property sheet From the top bar select COMP ASSY Select Highlight or select the component you want to highlight and then Select Highlight Component from the Assembly Structure menu Jighlight Component Component ipiston assy_t All Instances _J Subassembly apply Reset This technique is helpful if you wish to visually associate model graphics that correspond to a particular component or subassembly Highlighted components display an H in the component box in the Assembly Structure window By default components and their corresponding model geometry highlight automatically display in reverse video when you select the component from the Assembly Structure window Conversely selecting the edge of a viewed solid model in the Graphics window highlights the entire solid model and its corresponding component displays in reverse video in the Assembly Structure window The default highlighting is not retained and is removed as soon as you turn off
44. In the Parametric environment you get details of part mirroring a list of inserted source part names and out of sync source part information Please note The details relating to inserted source parts and out of sync source part appear only if the model associated with the component being verified is created using the Insert Ppart command Refer Parametric Modeling User Guide and Menu Reference for details on resolving out of sync source parts Verify Object Component yiston Apply Reference Specifies a reference assembly assembly instance to verify When used with Component specifies the referenced assembly containing the object Component Specifies the component instance name to query Brief Displays the assembly name object type ID number lock status associated model name and whether the component is viewed 7 36 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Changing the Assembly Structure Obtaining Information about Components Detailed Additionally displays the class name and the ID number child relation names and information about attribute groups associated with the component instance or reference assembly instance Please note Ifthe model associated with the instance is viewed the Detailed option also provides location and orientation information The Report Window appears as follows when accessed from the UTILITY pull down menu Report Window validity information v
45. Instances 3 17 Adding Multiple Instances of the Same Component 3 18 Add Component Property Sheet Options Specified _ 3 18 Instance Names 3 19 Making a Change to Only One Instance of a Component___ 3 19 Relations Between Components in the Structure 3 20 Adding Existing Assemblies to Your Assembly 3 2 Reference Assemblies 3 2 Copied Assemblies 3 22 Contents vi Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 3 23 Adding a Reference Assembly Example of Referencing an Assembly 3 24 Nested Reference Assemblies 3 24 Example of a Nested Reference Assembly 3 25 Controlling the Level of Nested Reference Assemblies Example Open Close Reference 3 26 3 27 Using the Prefix Option 3 30 Creating a New Assembly by Exporting 3 31 Example Exporting without Referencing 3 32 Example Exporting with Referencing 3 33 Exporting a Reference Assembly 3 35 Exporting the Active Assembly 3 35 Filing an Assembly Filing Your Changes 4 2 4 2 Updating Associative Annotation Updating Active Reference Assemblies 4 3 Deactivating a Reference Assembly 4 3 Understanding System Messages 4 3 Filing All Active Assemblies 4 3 Filing and Locking Interactivity 4 3 Filing Assembly Structure Default Adrawing and Root Node Model _ 4 4 Filing with and without Exiting 4 4 Sel
46. Positions After Modeling Change on page 6 37 for more information on updating positions parametrically after modeling changes have been made Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 5 27 Working in an Existing Assembly Several Users Can Work Concurrently Multiuser CAMU Example In the example two users A and B are working concurrently on the pen_1 assembly A is working on the barrel_1 assembly and B on the cap_1 assembly e A and B activate pen_1 assembly A and B both activate the pen_1 assembly and each of them lock the portion on which they are working A asterisk indicating the component is locked appears in the applicable component box for each user e A and B begin modifying the assembly A adds an ink cartridge to the barrel_1 component B adds a clip to the cap_1 component Neither B nor A have filed or refreshed the assembly so neither see what the other has done 5 28 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Working in an Existing Assembly Several Users Can Work Concurrently e A files the assembly A selects the FILE icon and selects File Assembly This commits him changes to the database Note that what A sees is the same as that before filling because B has not yet filed the work e B refreshes the assembly B selects Refresh Assembly It allows him to see the changes that A filed However the refresh has not committed any of B s change
47. Up User Guide and Menu Reference Configuring Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Data Management Locking Models Do not use the Model option when locking LOCK COMPONENT unless you want to prevent other users from activating the associated model When you use the Model option CAMU creates a LOCK and TEMP file in the associated models directory In the event of an abnormal shutdown you should delete these LOCK and TEMP files This also means that it is worth quitting any suspended models after you file them Archiving the Assembly Ensure that you archive the following items for any assembly e The assembly database assembly_name _db e All Adrawings assembly_name adraw_name _pd and assembly_name adraw_name _fd e The DDRAW of the Adrawing named default assembly_name DEFAULT _gr e All models associated with component classes in the assembly or product structure model_name _pd and model_name _fd e The explicit graphics file _gr for all models associated with component classes in the assembly or product structure nodel_name _gr which contains the drawing and model graphics data along with the tessellation data e The vp_links subdirectory of each model model_name vp_links see vp_links Directory on page 2 24 e All explicit figures nodal figures used by or within models or Adrawings figure_name _nfig and figure_name _gr e All procedure files parametric and execute files explicit e All applicable featur
48. You can activate the root node model within the interpart constraint process only in Parametric Assembly environment while the same is not required or recommended in Explicit Assembly environment The root node model is specifically designed to facilitate interpart constraints see Chapter 9 Using Interpart Constraints You must open the database prior to importing components see Basic Steps to Use Constraints in an Assembly on page 9 2 Please note The root node facilitates the interpart constraint process only within Parametric Assembly environment with a restriction that it does not house geometry views of assembly components or annotations Component A generic term for any tree structure A component is also referred to as a node It represents either a piece part subassembly or assembly Component instance A specific occurrence of a component class The _n with the component name indicates it is an instance of a particular component class Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 1 7 Introduction to Concurrent Assembly Mock Up The Assembly Structure Assembly instance A component instance representing a component of an external referenced assembly Component class A unique name assigned to a component Multiple instances of a component class can exist in the assembly structure Each component class instance has the same base name followed by an underscore and a unique system generate
49. a key strength of CAMU Explicit Models If explicit models that contain geometry used to define positioning constraints are modified you may again need to specify constraints For example during Explicit Boolean operations or edge filleting the original entities faces edges and vertices are deleted You must recreate these constraints When this occurs the Modify Position Constraints menu displays a No Geometry status Using Reference Assemblies The assembly instance root node of a reference assembly is treated as a fully constrained subassembly Its orientation and position can be specified or changed as a group single unit It is not possible to specify or change positional constraints between its leaf components You can create constraints between geometries inside a reference assembly and another reference assembly or main assembly Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Parametric Positioning Using Constrain Component Using Constrain Component Constrain Component enables you to create parametric positioning constraints in the active main assembly as well as in the active reference assembly Constraint options are Mate Align Orient and Fix You can list and optionally delete constraints for the selected parent component You can also select a base component see Designating a Base Component on page 6 34 See Sample Procedure for Creating Constraints on page 6 22 for a graphic
50. all instances of the selected component By default it is off which allows viewing of the single component instance Layer Allows you to specify a value by which to increment layer display For example if the model geometry resides on layers 3 and 30 and you specify a Layer value of 6 the model geometry appears on layers 9 and 36 in the active Adrawing The default value is 0 Please note When you specify the layer number in the Parametric environment the component is viewed on a layer which is the sum of the specified layer and the existing part layer For example if the component is on Layer 2 of a part and you specify layer 23 in the assembly the component is viewed on Layer 23 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 8 19 Defining Assembly Geometry Viewing a Component s Associated Model Geometry e Layer List Allows you to specify a range of viewing layers for the associated model geometry For example the associated model may contain geometry on layers 2 through 5 and layers 10 15 that you wish to see while you do not wish to see the geometry that resides on the other layers in the model Separate individual layers and layer lists by a comma The default range is 0 254 which is all layers e To Color Specifies a color for the component A valid color number ranges from 0 to 65 Zero resets the color component status Outline Geometry You can create outline additional layout or envelope g
51. annotation see Dimensioning and Annotating on page 12 21 12 4 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Documenting the Assembly Generating HLR Using HIDE OBJECT Generating HLR Using HIDE OBJECT This section describes how to perform hidden line removal HLR on assemblies made up of components associated with solid models HLR consists of three command options that are accessible from the Hidden Line Removal command palette Using HIDE OBJECT CADDS generates limbs and surrogate curves to accurately reflect the HLR appearance You can create associative or nonassociative HLR You can associatively dimension to the HLR curves Use the UPDATE HLRIMAGE command to update the HLR display if objects are resized relocated and so on and its associative dimensions Or recreate the HLR while maintaining dimensional associativity using the HIDE OBJECT command again Use the UNHIDE OBJECT command to restore hidden lines Remove Hidden Lines enables you to erase hidden lines and generate silhouettes on objects to produce a complete three dimensional image You can hide the lines in one view or all views You can also blank the hidden lines or show them as dotted lines see Removing Hidden Lines on page 12 6 Restore Hidden Lines completely restores the hidden lines of the object You can restore lines for all objects or only those that you select You can also restore lines and keep the limbs created by
52. assembly that all users can access manipulate view query e Create a separate assembly for each major functional grouping main subassembly branches For example a vehicle would contain a body chassis and electrical assembly e The project manager can assemble the entire product by adding each of these functional assemblies to the master assembly database as reference assemblies e The users within each assembly can see the entire assembly or specific portions by adding a reference instance adding a reference assembly of each of these top level assemblies into their own assembly e Prevent nesting and looping reference assemblies e Create trees by geographic area and in these zones break down the trees by functional groups One technique is to e Divide the product car ship airplane etc into a series of zones based on factors such as area complexity people involved geographic locations for design and manufacture an so on Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 3 5 Creating a New Assembly Building the Assembly Structure e Create zone trees to group all the models in the geographic zone together e Use a module type approach to construct trees from the functional areas but divided by geography For example an engine manufacturer could have a number of trees for the brakes module depending on how many zones the brakes module was contained in Guidelines for Creating the Assembly S
53. assembly tree window e Choose the All option to read and display all the reference assemblies e Choose the Level option to read and display the desired level of reference assemblies You can specify any real number greater than zero The default number is 1 Choose the Notify option to display a list of models that have been modified more recently than those in the view state of the Adrawing name you specify When you activate an assembly the following message appears in the Text window Explicit or Message window Parametric The following models have been modified more recently than this Adrawing Please note You are notified only about changes to models that were viewed in the Adrawing the last time the Adrawing was filed Choose the Exploded View On option to have the Adrawing you select appear in its exploded view orientation Enter the name of a component instance in the Component Instance field The system activates the model associated with the component If it is a new model you can specify modeling units Click on the list button next to the Environment field to display a list of environments Choose the environment in which to activate the assembly Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 5 3 Working in an Existing Assembly Activating the Main Assembly 8 Choose the Modeleroptions option to name and activate a new Adrawing Choose the form standard sheet nonstandard sh
54. asterisk indicates the equation has been solved exclamation point indicates the equation has not been solved 9 14 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Using Interpart Constraints Establishing Relationshios Between Variables In Automatic Mode If you are in automatic mode you can see the following in the Report window Report Vindove eq id Text 1 akle od 2 wheel mradi If you select the List Variable icon you see what happened to the variable values when the equation is solved Name Type Status Value mod alue axle _ d Length Free 0 437500 O 436000 wheel _ mradi Length Free 0 279000 MULL In Manual Mode If you are in manual mode this is what you see in the Report window when you list your equations eq id text 1 ake od 2 wheel___ mradi List variables Note that no changes have been made Mame Type Status Value mod value axle di Length Free 0 437500 MULL wheel _ mrad Length Free 0 279000 MULL Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 9 15 Using Interpart Constraints Establishing Relationships Between Variables Solve equations then list variables You can see the changes Name Type Status Value mod value axle dd Length Free 0 437500 O 436000 wheel _ mrad Length Free 0 219000 MULL 5 9 16 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Using Interpart Constraints Changing Variable Val
55. by the MDRAW This enables you to activate and work on the geometry of different models in the context of the assembly without disrupting your view of the assembly itself Moving from an Active Model to an Active Adrawing When you activate an existing Adrawing all the previously activated models are suspended After activating an Adrawing the view state in the graphics window changes This is because Adrawings have their own view states which are preserved by DDRAW DDRAW preserves the view state of the latest filed version of the Adrawing Figure 5 10 Graphics Window after Activating an Existing Adrawing Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 5 17 Working in an Existing Assembly Moving Between Models and Adrawings Figure 5 11 Assembly Structure after Activating an Existing Adrawing Assembly Structure Fneve crankassy_1 Fassy_1 s Fpiston assy_2 lt v endeap 2 Activating a New Adrawing When you activate a new Adrawing the model instances previously viewed in the graphics window are no longer visible Figure 5 12 Graphics Window after Activating a New Adrawing with Four Views TOPYiaw ISO0view 5 18 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Working in an Existing Assembly Moving Between Models and Adrawings Figure 5 13 Assembly Structure after Activating a New Adrawing Poise Structure S cranketaft_1 crankshaft_1 conrod_ 1 SW p
56. class This is illustrated in the example below Instance Only This option removes just the specific child instance from the specific parent instance along the selected relation line This action changes the component s parent to a unique class because it is now different from other members of its original class In this example you will remove one instance of wheel from each instance of axle as Specifically you will remove the whee1_3 and wheel_4 instances The relation between axle as_1 and wheel_3 is r2308_1 The relation between axle as_2 and wheel_4 is r2308_2 Notice that wheel_3 and wheel_4 are instances of the same relation class r2308 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 7 9 Changing the Assembly Structure Removing a Component Figure 7 1 Assembly Structure Showing Relation Instance Names Assembly Structure 21704 wheel_ axle as_4 K i eet wheel_3 wagani Frame 2304 7 o Oy wheel_2 axlemas EKC i Ee wheel_4 Please note Relation names do not actually appear on the screen Use the Detailed option on the Verify Object property sheet to see relation names see Obtaining Information about Components on page 7 35 1 Open the REMOVE COMPONENT property sheet 2 Select the relation line between axle as_1 and wheel1_3 or between axle as_2 and wheel_4 The relation value appears in the Component Instance field 3
57. component then rotate it any number of times Now you can locate the component 1 Choose the View and Position option from the Add Component property sheet 2 Enter a value in the Layer field if desired 3 Click Apply A pulldown menu appears The bottom selection is Done n field which displays the number of instances of the component to be positioned See Position Component on page 8 30 for more information on positioning a component instance 3 14 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Creating a New Assembly Adding a Family Member of a Master Model Adding a Family Member of a Master Model The Family Member and Member options on the Add Component property sheet enable you to associate the new component class to a Family Member of the named Master Model The master model name must be specified in the Model name field of the Add Component property sheet The Member name specified must already exist in the Table File of the Master Model The regeneration of the Family Member and or its association to the named component class is performed when you add the component to the active CAMU structure Like the GENERATE FAMILY command the Family Member is regenerated from its corresponding Master Model and Table File Master Model Part create the family member Family Hermber Add the component The Member menu option is valid only when a new class of component new Component Name is a
58. component is locked giving you write access to it Locking is explained further in Chapter 4 Working in an Existing Assembly 1 32 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Introduction to Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Accessing Functions Figure 1 11 Example of a Context Sensitive Menu in the Assembly Structure Window File Edit View File Edit View Options Assembly ace lo 2 aja far wagon_1 frame_1 box_1 New Adrawing Old Adrawing Save Viewstates File Adraws Models List Adrawings List Assemblies Refresh Assembly Scroll Structure Delete Adrawing Undo Acommand Menu displays commands available when no component is selected Please note Using Online Documentation Activate Blank Change Copy Delete Collapse All Export Highlight Lock Move Quit View Render Reorder Report Translucent Menu displays commands available when a component is selected Export Assembly is also available when a component is selected This user manual is supplied in HTML and PostScript form see Preface of this User Guide Select the Information Access icon on the top bar menu Select DOCUMENTATION The system displays a list of available books Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 1 33 Introduction to Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Accessing Functions Commands and Command Help You can use icons to perform functions in CAMU or you can
59. constraint Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 6 19 Parametric Positioning Using Constrain Component Deleting a Constraint The Delete options on the Modify Position Constraints property sheet enables you to delete any existing constraint Once you select the Delete option you can select multiple items from the runtime list and delete them all at once 1 2 3 Click on the Delete icon Select the constraint s Select Apply option on the property sheet and exit the command The parametric positioning option used to define that constraint is removed from the database Please note Once the constraint is deleted it cannot be undeleted Accessing Modify Position Constraints Menu You can open the Modify Position Constraints menu in one of the following ways When you activate or refresh the assembly or when you issue the Assemble Component command than select the Unsolved Sub assembly option If you select a subassembly the Modify Position Constraints menu appears If you open the menu in this manner the runtime list displays only unsolved overconstrained and underconstrained constraints It will not display the solved ones When you issue the Constrain Component command and select the Modify Position Constraints option It shows all the constraints defined for the selected subassembly You can select the Modify Position Constraints option from the COMP ASSY task set Example Dele
60. curves which are still visible after the execution of the command Please note When you perform an operation for hidden line removal a warning message appears if the selected entity is not a properly formed solid For viewed entities this message displays the name of the part or component its instance name ID Name and its Master Index Pointer miptr in the original part as follows Warning Error in reading solid entity 324785 Miptr 324785 is miptr 62641 in the model VALVE component valve_l If dimensions are applied to the Surrogates in HLR Image the UNHIDE OBJECT command preserves these dimensions and they are applied to the corresponding viewed part curves Dimensions applied to Limbs are not transferred To Access HLR 1 Click the Render icon paintbrush on the Environment Global area of the top bar 12 6 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Documenting the Assembly Generating HLR Using HIDE OBJECT 2 Choose Hidden Line Removal from the pulldown menu HIDDEN LINE REMOVAL SHADED WITHOUT WIREFRAME SHADED WITH WIREFRAME HIDDEN LINES DASHED HIDDEN LINES REMOVED WIRE FRAME NO INTERACTIVE RENDERING IMAGEDESIGN EDDM ETGIWRE S XIT PICTURE The Hidden Line Removal command palette appears Hidden Line Removal SEPIE Posko hi Cancel The following steps describe how to use Hide Object menus to perform hidden line removal on a crankshaft assembly 1 Click the R
61. describes how you can create a new assembly add components and subassemblies to the assembly and optionally view and position associated geometry The topics are e Creating Activating a New Assembly e Building the Assembly Structure e Adding a New Component to the Structure e Adding a Family Member of a Master Model e Multiple Occurrences of the Same Item e Relations Between Components in the Structure e Adding Existing Assemblies to Your Assembly e Creating a New Assembly by Exporting Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 3 1 Creating a New Assembly Creating Activating a New Assembly Creating Activating a New Assembly These instructions show you how to create activate a new assembly This activated assembly uses existing parts that contain geometry and new parts for which you create geometry later For existing parts view and position the parts on your screen Your assembly can also incorporate an assembly that exists outside your active main assembly called a reference assembly as a subassembly Using the Default Adrawing An Adrawing is both a drawing and a special CADDS part It allows you to e View the model geometry associated with the components of the assembly e Define the view state scale orientation location and size of component instances in the assembly e Use the viewed geometry to establish the position and orientation of component instances e Determine which compone
62. error You can query for the status of the transaction table in CADDS 5 and print the status to the Report Window In the Parametric environment you can also print the status to the log file The Topology bus report lists details of each transaction In the Parametric environment you can log the contents of the Report Window ina report file This report file is stored in the _bcd directory as an external ASCII file You can control the display of the alert messages by setting the ATB_ALERT_POLICY variable appropriately in the caddsrc local file Set the ATB_ALERT_POLICY variable as follows to display an alert message after each successful or failed transaction setenv ATB_ALERT POLICY ALWAYS Set the ATB_ALERT_POLICY variable as follows it to display the alert message only after a failed transaction setenv ATB_ ALERT POLICY ONERROR Check the Report Window for the details of each transaction Use the Generate Topology Bus Report option from the Query option on the top bar of the CADDS window to obtain the following types of reports e Specific transactions e A range of transactions e All transactions e Successes or failures of each part for an imported or exported assembly transaction Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 1 43 Chapter 2 Configuring Concurrent Assembly Mock Up This chapter provides the information you need to configure Concurrent Assembly Mock U
63. fonting dimensioning and hidden line removal should not be attempted while working in an MDRAW The MDRAW has the ability to inherit the view state of the previous active drawing MDRAW or DDRAW In other words the views contained in the MDRAW are temporary for the active session Any view specific operation in a multi view MDRAW can cause the corresponding entities in other views to be affected The purpose of an MDRAW is to provide a seamless visual transition from one active model to another ERASE ENTITY Design Restriction All views in the MDRAW use the same universal composition As CADDS entities declare their view specific appearances via composition numbers all appearance commands in the MDRAW effectively have the allviews functionality Manually activating a normal drawing anything other than MDRAW in the CADDS model after node switching allows you to use view specific appearances Please note You can use commands such as ERASE ENTITY CHANGE APPEARANCE and so on if the entities are physically located in the active part Moving to a New Adrawing or New Model e The drawing DDRAW in the new Adrawing or MDRAW in the new model is activated e No view orientation zoom scale is inherited into the DRRAW of the new Adrawing The existing view state of the previously active part model or Adrawing is inherited by the MDRAW of the new model 5 8 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Wor
64. hidden line removal performed using the HIDE OBJECT command Creating an Adrawing Document Before you perform hidden line removal shading or detailing of the assembly do the following 1 Activate a new Adrawing in the CAMU Explicit environment 2 Define views at an appropriate scale orientation and location 3 View on the model instances you want to use Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 12 3 Documenting the Assembly Creating an Assembly Drawing Document Example 1 Create a new Adrawing Use a blank sheet no views predefined or a company standard format sheet such as one containing your company logo title block and so on activate He drawing Medel U ite 2 Define the desired views at the desired orientation scale and location on the Adrawing For example define a front view at half scale locate it and define the view clipping boundaries 3 Use the View Component property sheet to view the desired component instance s model geometry 4 Define any additional views For example if you have defined a front view fold a right and top view off of it using viewed geometry from the front view Please note To learn about manual view definition including folding views see the Design and Drafting User Guide and Menu Reference or the DEFINE VIEW online command help To generate HLR see Generating HLR Using HIDE OBJECT on page 12 5 To insert dimensions and
65. instance Specify the MSO location for any model in your assembly before you create the model database otherwise it is at the same location as the MSO of assembly itself Creating A New Model without Locating Model Space Origin The example that follows pulley assembly shows how to create and locate a new model in an assembly without first specifying the MSO location of the new model Pulley Assembly Structure Assume the DEFAULT Adrawing is active and the assembly structure has already been created At this point none of the required models exist The leaf nodes in this assembly structure are associated with nonexistent models Figure 8 1 Pulley Assembly Structure crs eg ee pale assy Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 8 7 Defining Assembly Geometry Locating Model Space Origin for a New Model Figure 8 2 The Finished Pulley Assembly Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 8 8 Defining Assembly Geometry Locating Model Space Origin for a New Model Activating the Model Associated with the Base Component Activate the model associated with the component ACTIVATE MODEL creates the model associated with the base_1 component Figure 8 3 Pulley Assembly Structure after Activating the Model for base_1 whet 1 Model Space Origin Location of the New Model Activating a new model places the MSO location of the new model at the same MSO locati
66. instance name whose child components you want to positionally constrain All the child components are highlighted indicating the subassembly graphically e Base Reference Specifies the reference assembly that contains the base component e Base Component Specifies the component from the main assembly or from the active reference assembly as a base component Designating a Base Component You can identify the base component yourself or let the system establish one by default To identify the base component by name use the Constrain Component command see Using Constrain Component on page 6 13 The default base component is the one whose geometry you identify select first when creating a parametric positioning constraint 6 34 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Parametric Positioning Solving Parametric Positioning Constraints Redesignating a Base Component You can redesignate the base component at any time using the Constrain Component command and specifying a new base component Recognizing Full Constraints Status An assembly that contains parametric positioning constraints is understood to be either fully constrained underconstrained or overconstrained When you issue the Assemble Component command the positions of all the components for the selected subassembly are computed At this time the system makes the determination whether the assembly is fully constrained underconstrained or
67. mod value axle d Length Free 0 437500 O 436000 wheel _ mradi Length User changed 0 279000 O 600000 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 9 19 Using Interpart Constraints Regenerating the Component Regenerating the Component If you have made changes to constrained variable values in your assembly and solved those components the values for corresponding variables in your model are also changed However you must regenerate the component to see these changes in the representation of model geometry in the Graphics window You must solve a component before you regenerate it 1 Select the Regenerate Component icon from the task set Eh The property sheet appears listing all components for which you have imported variables Regenerate Component 4H gt Select All gt Select by Name 2 Select the components you want to regenerate all components on the list or specific components Click Apply The list can contain both solved and unsolved components If you attempt to regenerate both solved and unsolved components the system regenerates the solved ones and gives you a message No Parameters Modified for the ones you have not solved 9 20 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Using Interpart Constraints Regenerating the Component The figure that follows shows the changes to the graphic representation of the assembly In the example the Grap
68. models Surfaced models can be either ASD or Nurbs trimmed surfaces e All models in the assembly must be of the same precision e If 3D wireframe models exist associate the relevant component in the assembly structure with them Rebuild them as 3D solids or surfaces as time permits e Each model should contain a current explicit graphics file _gr containing the drawing and model graphics data along with the tessellation data Ensure that the tessellation data stored in the _gr file is in sync with the model e Use trimmed rather than block surfaces that is oversize surfaces with the profile of the panel or piece projected onto it to enable accurate clash detection and visualization e You do not need to create model geometry using Nurbs but the process of trimming should yield Nurbs surfaces as output e All surface models should have a small mesh suitable to the shape of the surface that is 2x2 before filing to prevent confusion when viewing large models and assemblies e Blank all model geometry not required for viewing by the rest of the team that is construction geometry before filing the model e All components should have entities to assist with their location in an assembly For example lines down the centers of bores and shafts where they mate with other components and lines along the X Y and Z axes of the part datum model space origin of the model e Create a mass point for the solid or surface in the final s
69. operate on the root component the active model or ancestors of the active model Neither can they operate on component instances of a reference assembly except in an Exploded View state Please note Model instance positions are constant across all Adrawings in the assembly Locations of Components in Reference Assemblies You cannot reposition a component instance in a reference assembly unless the Exploded View option is turned on For more information see Chapter 10 Adrawings and Alternate Views 8 6 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Defining Assembly Geometry Locating Model Space Origin for a New Model Locating Model Space Origin for a New Model Specifying the model space origin MSO of new models before creating them simplifies the layout design and assembly process for the entire design team It also eliminates problems for other members of the design team who may wish to use the same model in different assemblies If the MSO of a model is not appropriate for use in another assembly you can activate the model and move its geometry onto MSO in the assembly However moving geometry at the piece part level shifts out of position any component instances in other assemblies that are also associated with this model Whenever you translate geometry at the piece part level it affects the position of all component instances associated with that model in all assemblies containing that component
70. overconstrained and acts accordingly Fully Constrained Assembly As a result of the Assemble Component command the assembly is viewed in its assembled configuration with all positioning constraints satisfied Underconstrained Assembly As aresult of the Assemble Component command there will be an attempt to satisfy existing constraints If the specified positioning constraint set is underconstrained an optimal solution will be provided Overconstrained Assembly As a result of the Assemble Component command there will be an attempt to satisfy constraints and eliminate redundancies If the positioning constraint set specified by the user is overconstrained there will be an attempt to eliminate the redundant constraints provided they are consistent If they are inconsistent the status in the Modify Position Constraints menu will be displayed Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 6 35 Parametric Positioning Changing Positioning Constraints Changing Positioning Constraints You cannot change an existing parametric positioning constraint You must delete and redefine the constraint see Modify Position Constraints on page 6 17 and Using Constrain Component on page 6 13 6 36 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Parametric Positioning Updating Positions After Modeling Change Updating Positions After Modeling Change Parametrically positioned parts that ha
71. real number To avoid this begin component names with an alpha character 9 10 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Using Interpart Constraints Constraint Variable Names of Imported Components The following table shows examples of extended variable names Table 9 1 Examples of Extended Variable Names as Mapped by the System Variable Name length length length length length Component Name Intermediate Form top table top table amp o0p table to tabletop top___length table top___ length table amp op___ length table to ___ length tabletop___length Final Extended Name top___ length table_top___length table__op___ length table_to length Xtabletop___ length Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Using Interpart Constraints Preparing to Add Equations Between Variables Preparing to Add Equations Between Variables Before adding equations to establish relationships between variables decide whether you want to have equations solved in automatic mode or in manual mode This section explains what happens when you solve equations and change variable values Subsequent sections describe the steps you must follow to add equations and change variable values Perform the following steps 1 Choose whether equations are to be solved automatically the default or manually 2 Add equations 3 Solve all equations Do this only if you are in manual mode
72. real number string or array and whether the name is to be associated with one or all instances of the component Specify which components in your structure are to be associated with the group you defined This lets you store information with the component for each attribute you named Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 11 3 Defining Nongraphic Information for the Assembly Creating Attribute Groups Creating Attribute Groups An attribute group is a category that can contain several different attributes Create Attribute Group creates the attribute group and associates it with all components or one component instance When you define a group associate it with all the components in the structure a global group or to one component instance To associate with one component the component must be locked 1 Select the Create Attribute Group icon from the task set The Create Attribute Group property sheet appears Figure 11 2 Create Attribute Group property sheet Create Attribute croup Reference Attribute Group M s Global Reference Component a Componank Instance 2 To define several attribute groups in succession click the pushpin icon to keep the property sheet displayed Define one attribute group Click Apply The property sheet is still displayed for you to define the next attribute group 3 When the cursor appears in the Attribute Group field enter a name 4 To h
73. relation by 7 9 selected instance 7 9 Removing a reference assembly 7 3 Reordering a component 7 32 above a component 7 32 above a reference assembly 7 33 below a component 7 34 Report created from attribute 11 19 Reset on a property sheet 1 31 Restoring Hidden Lines 12 15 Unblank Viewed Object 12 15 Reversing a command 1 36 Root component 1 7 Rotating a component 8 27 Runtime list 1 29 S Save Restore viewstates 10 12 Saving your work 4 2 Select Assemble 6 4 Selecting a component property sheet 1 28 Selecting an option 1 28 Sibling 1 8 Solve Component property sheet 9 18 Solving equation in assembly 9 12 Square button 1 30 Standard view 10 7 Subassembly blanking 7 29 compressing 7 30 removing 7 7 reordering parent of 7 32 Suspended Adrawing 5 7 Suspended model 5 7 Suspended when quitting 4 5 Suspending model caddsrc environment variable 1 38 Suspension buffer 5 9 Suspension buffer setting 2 4 Switching Node 5 7 Symbol status of constraint equation 9 14 1 Template Adrawing 5 4 TIM parts 1 40 Toggle Exploded View 10 9 Translating a Component 8 26 U Undo AD Command 1 24 1 36 Unexport Variable property sheet 9 5 Unfix Component property sheet 9 22 Unview component 8 18 property sheet 8 19 Updating TIM parts 1 41 Updating assembly structure 4 4 5 36 Updating parametric position 5 30 Updating session multiuser CAMU in 5 27 User defined information for the assembly 11 2 Using CVPATH 2 20 U
74. s Associated Model Geometry e Specifying a layer list enables you to control which aspects of the associated model geometry are visible in the Adrawing based on their layer residency in the model e Not specifying a layer list defaults to a range of 0 254 which is all layers Temporarily Blanking Viewed Model Geometry If you Unview a component while active in an Adrawing and then file and exit the assembly its Layer and Layer List settings are lost for that Adrawing To avoid this do one of the following e Use Blank Component to temporarily view off the model graphics in the Graphics window This retains the component s viewed layer assignment in the Adrawing The blanked state is not saved when you file the assembly e Create a procedure file Parametric or execute file Explicit that captures the applicable ACTIVATE ADRAWING and VIEW COMPONENT command Have it available for recreating the Layer and Layerlist settings Checking part database of a Model Associated with the Component You can check the part database of a component while activating the model associated with the component or viewing the component using a third party executable ckCAD You can use the ckKCAD executable by setting an environment variable DB_CHECKING in the caddsrc_local file refer caddsrc local File Information on page 2 3 If the part database of a component is corrupt you cannot view activate or file save that component Onc
75. structure of the assembly The name of the assembly suffixed with _1 appears in a small box at the far left of the Assembly Structure Window This root component represents the entire assembly As you build your assembly other components representing subassemblies and piece parts are connected to each other and to this root component For more information about the different components of the logical structure of your assembly and how they relate to each other see The Assembly Structure on page 1 7 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 1 5 Introduction to Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Windows Note a To display the Assembly Structure Window set the AD_C_SERVER_ENABLED environmental variable to no The default value of this variable is yes b To display a context sensitive menu of available CAMU options right click when the pointer is in this window See Using the Context Sensitive Menu Within the Assembly Structure Window on page 1 32 e CAMU Status Window This window states the name of the selected component its associated model name the name of the user who has locked the component and its status inactive active or suspended Please note The CAMU status window is displayed along with the Assembly Structure Window only That is when the AD_C_SERVER_ENABLED environmental variable is set to no e Assembly Tree Window The Assembly Tree Window supp
76. structure up to the specified reference assembly node The specified reference assembly node is marked with gt gt symbol in the assembly structure Please note You cannot close an active reference assembly e Viewed Display the latest saved viewstate of the components in the open assemblies Use this option with Open option only Please note To save the current view states of a reference assembly the reference assembly must be open while saving the main assembly The view states are lost when the reference assembly is closed For more information about the view states of a reference assembly refer to TAN number 123167 A gt gt symbol on a reference assembly node in the assembly structure tree denotes that it contains further more reference assemblies in close state 3 26 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Creating a New Assembly Adding Existing Assemblies to Your Assembly You can also access the Open Reference and Close Reference options from the context sensitive menu within the assembly structure window Please note You cannot export subassemblies having a closed reference assembly in any of its instances Example Open Close Reference Following is an assembly structure tree of an open assembly body_1 It has two instances of reference assembly hub as hub_1 and hub_2 Each of these hub assemblies further have two instances of reference assembly wheel as wheel_1 and wheel_2 Assembl
77. the atb command line option cadds5 atb Updating TIM Parts with Pending Regeneration State If you have added geometry or features to a CADDS TIM part you must update the part and regenerate the part on subsequent activation Such TIM parts are called parts in pending regeneration state To complete the associative update process of a TIM part in pending regeneration state perform the following steps 1 Activate the CADDS TIM part in the Parametric environment Please note You cannot activate TIM parts that are in pending regeneration state in the Explicit environment 2 Activate a drawing The Parametric geometry that is dependent on the imported TIM part geometry is regenerated automatically Please note If regeneration fails the failed command and all subsequent commands that have not been regenerated are removed 3 File the part The changes are permanent 1 42 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Introduction to Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Accessing the Associative Topology Bus ATB Option Querying the ATB Transactions In an ATB session each of the Import Export Verify Update and the show Pro ENGINNER part and Pro ENGINEER TIM part or assembly operations is uniquely identified by a transaction number starting from zero The Report Window displays the beginning and end of each transaction In addition an alert message appears at the end of the transaction or in case of an
78. the Main Assembly Refreshing the Main Assembly Refresh an active assembly to update its assembly structure graphics and associative dimensions When you refresh an assembly changes made and filed by other users working on the same assembly appear in your active assembly You can see the most current version of the assembly structure and any viewed geometry REFRESH ASSEMBLY can detect for reference assemblies that have changed in the current session but have been deleted by another user working concurrently in the same main assembly This event opens an alert window with a prompt for filing or quitting the main assembly If the model associated with the root component is active when a refresh is performed the constraints management system is updated to reflect changes from the imported components in the model associated with the root component Models are not updated according to the new constraint parameters For more information on constraints see Chapter 9 Using Interpart Constraints Refreshing the assembly updates all associative annotation When you issue REFRESH ASSEMBLY the following occurs based on the level of parametric constraints in place in the assembly The Modify Position Constraints menu may appear see Modify Position Constraints on page 6 17 Please note If you have set Select Assemble On previously all parametric positioning constraints are solved when you issue this command Fully C
79. the copied component refer Figure 8 22 around an axis defined by two location points P1 and P2 e Choose the appropriate option from the Orientation menu e Specify 30 degrees as the angle of rotation in the Angle field e Select any two points P1 and P2 on the graphics area to define the axis of rotation e Click Apply The resultant geometry is rotated by 30 degrees around the axis defined by location points P1 and P2 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 8 39 Defining Assembly Geometry Moving a Component Figure 8 27 The copied component is rotated around an axis defined by location points P1 and P2 by an angle of 30 degrees Origin af Copied Component a r Example 5 Translating a Component by a Displacement Specified by Two Locations Translates the component by a displacement specified by two locations To translate the copied component refer Figure 8 22 by a displacement specified by two points Choose the appropriate option from the Orientation menu Click Apply Select a location on the graphics area to define the starting point P1 of the displacement vector Select again a location to specify the end point P2 of the vector The resultant geometry is translated to the new location by the specified displacement 8 40 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Defining Assembly Geometry Moving a Component Figure 8 28 The copied component is
80. the user imports the whee1_1 and axle_1 component instances All the exportable variables for the components specified are imported to the root component model Import Component H gt on lt gt Off Please note If you add new variables to the model after a component is imported you must unimport the component then import it again to have the new variables included If you do not do so you receive a message WARNING Component already imported 10 Select the List Variable icon to display a list of the imported variables 11 Click Imported from the menu that appears 9 8 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Using Interpart Constraints Placing Component Variables in the Active Assembly In the Report window the information you just requested is listed below the information from previous requests This continues until you click Clear Save the information from the report window by opening a report file before you select List Variable For example Report Windov Name Type Status Value mod value Exportable variables for model WHEEL mrad Length Free 0 219000 MULL Exportable variables for model As LE d Length Free 0 437500 MULL xf x EE RH EX EH RR EH XN HE ER EH XN EM HH MN EH MH EH MN EM HE XN ER ERR ER ER Current assembly imported variables axle di Length Free 0 437500 MULL wheel __mrad i Length Free 0 219000 MULL The system has assigned extended names to the variables when
81. to conrod_1 at a different angle than all other piston conrod relationships in piston assy you must create a new class such as piston assy 15degrees If you do not create the new class manually CAMU will create it automatically if you use the Instance Only option on the property sheet If you change class name using the Change Component property sheet you can use the Retain Not Retain option to keep or discard existing constraints for the new class name Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 6 11 Parametric Positioning Creating Positioning Constraints Please note For more information on how to create a new class rather than propagate a change to all instances of a class see Changing a Component Name Can Create a New Class on page 7 6 Hybrid Positioning You can explicitly and parametrically position components in existing and new assemblies Parametric and Explicit Positioning Any assembly can have a combination of explicitly positioned components and parametrically positioned components An explicitly positioned component can be repositioned parametrically by using parametric positioning functionality Similarly any parametrically positioned component can be repositioned explicitly by deleting the associated constraints Its location will then no longer be driven by changes made to adjacent components Laying out a 3D assembly and experimenting with different what if configurations is
82. to the last orientation of the previous instance Positioning tools include e ANGLE lt angle gt AXIS lt axis gt Specifies the angle of rotation and the axis of rotation AXIS defines the axis e With two location points FREE e Along a selected line LINE e Through a specified point and parallel to the positive x y or z axis of the active Cplane X Y Z 8 34 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Defining Assembly Geometry Moving a Component Orienting a Component Work Examples You can view and position the component after copying moving or mirroring using the appropriate orientation options from the Orientation menu Explained below are a few examples Following is the result of a Copy Component command In this example the Cplane is ISO and is viewed in ISO view The resultant component is positioned at location 50 50 0 Figure 8 22 The copied component after positioning at a location but before orientation Copied Comparani a igra Comparer The copied component can be oriented as follows Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 8 35 Defining Assembly Geometry Moving a Component Example 1 Rotating a Component at its Origin around x Axis Rotates the component at its origin around the x axis with a specified angle of rotation e Choose the appropriate option from the Orientation menu e Specify 30 degrees as the angle of rotation in th
83. translated from the original location by a displacement specified by points P1 and P2 sr Orig nal saion cad eee par v P gt 5 lt P Use the Align and Adjust options in a similar manner to e Align the copied component e Adjust the copied component Clearing a Component s Inherited Orientation The following applies to the View and Position options of the Add Component and Copy Component property sheets and options under the Move icon when you add multiple instances of a component the orientation specification can be inherited from a previously positioned component instance Use the RESET option to clear an orientation specification inherited from a previously positioned component instance or an unwanted rotation of the component you are currently positioning Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 8 41 Defining Assembly Geometry Moving a Component Positioning Tools The options on Orientation menu provides to translate align and adjust The bottom icon RESET resets to the last orientation of the previous instance TRANSLATE lt vector gt Translates the component using a vector Specify the vector with two locations This option translates the origin of the first location to the origin of the second location ALIGN lt loc gt lt loc gt lt loc gt lt loc gt Aligns the component you select with another component so that the vectors defined by one set of locations on each compon
84. wheel component to create its geometry Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 8 17 Defining Assembly Geometry Viewing a Component s Associated Model Geometry Viewing a Component s Associated Model Geometry When working in an active Adrawing use View Component to see a component s associated model geometry 1 Select the component you want to view from the Assembly Structure window 2 Choose the View Component option from the pop up menu Or select COMP ASSY from the top bar and choose View from the menu that appears Figure 8 16 View Unview Component Property Sheet YiewsUnview Component Component Component Instance piston Outline No Action All Instances Intermoade No Action m _ Layer WI Wl No Action ve Apply 3 Specify the Component Instance as indicated below e Enter the name of a component instance in the Component Instance field in order to view the model associated with it or the models associated with its descendants e Enter the name of an assembly instance in the Reference field to view the models of a reference assembly based on a Component in that reference assembly Each assembly drawing Adrawing can have a unique layout of viewed and or unviewed components Some components might be viewed off and some might be viewed on for different layers Layer lists are also unique for each Adrawing 8 18 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu
85. with any of the shade or HLR rendering options File the part e Run the update_gr script Create a part to serve as the handlepart The handlepart must have at least one entity Do one of the following e Create a part that serves as the handlepart and specify the part s name in the CV_ASSEMBLY_HANDLE_PART variable Access this part via the CVPATH or by using a full CADDS style path name 1 38 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Introduction to Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Preparing to Work e Activate a part in your Create directory to serve as your handlepart Follow the guidelines in the following file to create the handlepart usr apl cadds data am supplements README_1 Establishing the DB Daemon In a single user CAMU environment the DB daemon ODB_DAEMON runs locally on your machine It is started when you invoke CAMU or when you run the db_daemon script In a multi user CAMU environment the DB daemon is used to control a multi user CAMU session using a spawned ODB_SERVER process tied to the assembly upon its activation and therefore must be established on a host machine Each user who accesses a particular assembly must access the same DB daemon and specifically the same ODB_SERVER process The following line establishes the host system on which the DB daemon is to reside CADDSHOST can be a local or remote system name setenv DB_DAEMON_HOST SCADDSHOST
86. 1 Verify that all NFS mounts are established correctly a Change to the mounted directories b Verify that all users absolute path names to the mounted directory are identical by typing pwd c List any existing directories and check that the ownership permissions allow access to group members 2 Log in to the user accounts and enter CAMU on local systems The assemblies if existing should be displayed If there are existing assemblies in the mounted file system and they do not display in CAMU do the following a Check the absolute path name for the active directory displayed in the LDM for accuracy b If the assembly directory is not the create directory in CVPATH either select the Active Directory or Display all Files in CVPATH from the LDM menu c Check to see if the remote file system is mounted correctly d Verify permissions on the assembly directories e Activate either an existing assembly or a new one f If there are problems activating a new assembly or an existing assembly check the Troubleshooting section that follows Add a component to the root node of the assembly File the assembly This test establishes that the assembly database can be written by at least the user who created it Activate the test assembly from the other user accounts Log in to the other network systems using the accounts that run multi user CAMU and follow steps 1 and 2 above Activate the assembly which
87. 2 11 Sample Procedure to Configure Multi User CAMU 2 11 Example 1 2 12 Example 2 2 12 Example 3 2 12 Testing the Multi User Configuration 2 13 Troubleshooting 2 14 Activating a New or an Existing Assembly 2 14 Single User Environment 2 15 Terminating the ASSEMBLY_DESIGN and ODB_SERVER Process 2 16 Multi User Environment 2 16 ODB Object Data Base Administration Tool 2 18 Arranging Projects Using CVPATH 2 20 Example of setting multiple CVPATHs 2 20 Data Management 2 2 Assembly Database Items 2 21 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Contents v Model Items 2 2 Locking Models 2 22 Archiving the Assembly 2 22 CADDS Drawing Files 2 22 vp_links Directory 2 23 Aborting a Command 2 23 Crash Recovery 2 24 Creating a New Assembly Creating Activating a New Assembly 3 2 Using the Default Adrawing 3 2 Steps to Activate a New Assembly 3 2 Building the Assembly Structure 3 5 Typical Structuring Approaches 3 5 Guidelines for Creating the Assembly Structure 3 6 Naming Conventions 3 7 Ways You Can Add Components or Assemblies 3 7 Adding a New Component to the Structure 3 9 Options on the Property Sheet 3 1 Viewing and Positioning the Component 3 12 View and Position without Orienting 3 13 Position and Orient 3 14 Adding a Family Member of a Master Model 3 15 Multiple Occurrences of the Same Item 3 17 A Parent Component Having Multiple
88. 2 on page 7 16 Select the instance fork assy_1 from the assembly structure widow using left mouse button This specifies the component to be mirror copied OR Enter the Component name for Component Instance as fork assy_1 Select the instance handle fork_1 from the assembly structure window using middle mouse button This specifies the parent component to which the mirror copied component is to be attached OR Enter the Component name for Parent as handle fork_1 Enter the Component Name Suffix as 1hs Select the Create Part Database option Enter the Model Name Suffix as lhs Choose Apply The Mirror Component menu appears see Figure 7 3 on page 7 17 7 20 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Changing the Assembly Structure Mirroring a Component 8 Choose Plane The Plane menu appears see Figure 7 4 on page 7 18 a Choose the first option from Plane menu to specify the plane perpendicular to the active Cplane and passing through the two specified locations b Select two points as shown below Figure 7 8 Two points specifying the mirror plane TOP view A line appears which denotes the plane normal to xy plane 9 Choose Done Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 7 21 Changing the Assembly Structure Mirroring a Component The mirrored copy of the original component appears as shown below Figure 7 9 Final mirror copied ge
89. 6 13 Modify Position Constraints Enables you to view all the positional constraints in the selected subassembly You can modify or delete these listed constraints See Modify Position Constraints on page 6 17 Display Unresolved Subassemblies This opens the Unresolved Sub Assemblies menu This menu shows subassemblies that have not yet been solved because of either of the following conditions e You have issued Select Assemble Off and not yet issued Assemble Component e The subassembly is either overconstrained or underconstrained and cannot be solved in its present state Assemble Component If you have issued Select Assemble Off you can selectively assemble using this property sheet Specify the subassembly component name that you wish to assemble and choose Apply option The positions of the specified components are updated to satisfy the constraints Figure 6 1 Assemble Component property sheet ASSEMBLE COMPONENT Assembly Instance Component Instance ipiston Apply Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 6 3 Parametric Positioning Understanding Parametric Positioning For more information see Solving Parametric Positioning Constraints on page 6 32 Select Assemble You can solve the constraints automatically or manually For automatic update choose Assemble On For manual update choose Assemble Off and then use Assemble Component to selectively solve the const
90. A variable value can change e As aresult of solving equations e If you change its value with Change Variable In both of the above cases you must solve the component to have the change reflected in the model The section Changing Variable Values and Applying the Changes on page 9 17 explains these procedures in detail Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 9 13 Using Interpart Constraints Establishing Relationships Between Variables Establishing Relationships Between Variables Es From the root component model choose Add Equation to create equations to AK B C establish constraint relationships between imported variables 1 Select the Add Equation icon from the Constraints task set The Add Equation property sheet appears 2 Enter an equation in the Equation field For a list of variable names click the Variables field Add Equation Equation axle _ dial 2 wheel mradi Oe then ee Pant or wot x wheel mrad i arcsin arccos arctan Please note In the equation use the extended variable names that were generated by the system when you selected Import Component For the example the user constrained the variable whee1 mrad1 from the wheel model to the variable axle___d1 of the axle model To see what happens as the equations are added select the List Equation icon Symbols in the last column indicate the status of any equation s that contain the variable
91. ARS 252 227 7013 OCT 88 or Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights at FAR 52 227 19 c 1 2 JUN 87 as applicable 02202007 Parametric Technology Corporation 140 Kendrick Street Needham MA 02494 USA Table of Contents Preface Related Documents xvii Book Conventions xviii Window Managers and the User Interface xix Online User Documentation xix Online Command Help XX Printing Documentation XX Resources and Services xxi Documentation Comments xxi Introduction to Concurrent Assembly Mock Up What You Can Do With CAMU 1 2 A Look at CAMU 1 3 Local Data Manager Menu 1 4 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Windows 1 5 Overview of CAMU Windows 1 5 The Assembly Structure 1 7 Terminology 1 7 Root component 1 7 Component 1 7 Component instance 1 7 Assembly instance 1 8 Component class 1 8 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Contents iii Parent Component 1 8 Child Component 1 8 Siblings 1 8 Leaf Component 1 8 1 8 1 9 1 9 Relation Instance Model Adrawing Assembly Tree Window 1 11 Shortcut Menus within the Assembly Tree Window ___ 1 15 Assembly Tree Window Top Bar Options 1 19 Assembly Tree Window Toolbar Options 1 20 CAMU Top Bar Options 1 22 Assembly Environment Task Sets 1 23 Common Tasks 1 23 Moving to Other Environments a
92. Apply tE Cancel If you are removing a component in a reference assembly specify input in the Reference column If you are removing a component in the main assembly specify input in the Component column 1 Choose the REMOVE COMPONENT option from the COMP ASSY task set or select the component from the structure 2 Choose REMOVE COMPONENT from the popup menu in the Assembly Structure window 3 Enter the name of the component instance you want to remove in the Component Instance field by typing by selecting from the structure or by selecting from the Graphics window 4 To remove all instances of the component class choose the All Instances option 5 Click Apply Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 7 7 Changing the Assembly Structure Removing a Component Please note The procedure describes how to remove a single component instance or all instances of the component class from the Assembly Structure and Graphics window It is possible to remove selected members of a component class by selecting the relation instance instead of the component box see Removing a Component by Removing the Relation on page 7 9 Please note If you have issued Select Assemble On see Automatic Assembly on page 6 32 all parametric positioning constraints are solved when you remove a component Component Instance Numbers Consecutive instance numbers are given to multiple instances of the same comp
93. Assemblies to Your Assembly Example of Referencing an Assembly In this example an existing assembly named handle is referenced into the active assembly wagon As a result the handle subassembly s root component appears in a bold box Figure 3 8 Using the handle Assembly As a Reference Assembly in the wagon Assembly Assembly Structure before addingthe handle assembk Assembly Structure whl assy Assembly Structure after addingthe handle assembly handle_1 whl assy Nested Reference Assemblies When you add a reference assembly to your active assembly the reference assembly too can have a reference assembly s within it This is called a nested reference assembly In that case CAMU assigns a dot extension to the nested assembly name This preserves the instance portion of the instance name of the nested reference assembly You cannot change the dot extension In your active assembly the parent components of both of the reference assembly and the nested reference assembly appear in a bold box 3 24 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Creating a New Assembly Adding Existing Assemblies to Your Assembly Example of a Nested Reference Assembly The figure below shows the assembly structure for the hub It contains a reference assembly housing_1 instance The hub assembly will be added to another assembly as a reference When you activate an assembly named
94. Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Changing the Assembly Structure Changing Structure Appearance Changing Structure Appearance When your assembly structure is large and complex you can simplify its appearance by compressing or blanking the display of subassemblies Compress a subassembly to show multiple instances of leaf components as a single component Blank a subassembly to show only its parent component Use the DISPLAY STRUCTURE option from the popup menu or select the icon from the COMP ASSY task set Please note If an assembly is activated in the Assembly Tree Window then e The Display Structure menu is unavailable e The information about hidden sub assembly structures the result of DISPLAY STRUCTURE BLANKFLAG YES command is not considered and the entire assembly tree structure is available for display If you lock the parent of the subassembly before changing the display the change is saved in the database If you do not lock the parent the change is for only the current session Blanking a Subassembly Select the parent component of a subassembly or reference assembly to blank and click Apply The structure displays only the parent component you specify A greater than sign gt indicates the component is blanked and that components exist below it When you unblank all components below the parent reappear Display Structure Companent Apply Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide an
95. Assembly Structure Display Results When you generate HLR using HIDE OBJECT BLANK the affected components are prefixed with the appropriate icons in the assembly structure For details see the section Assembly Tree Window 12 14 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Documenting the Assembly Generating HLR Using HIDE OBJECT Restoring Hidden Lines The following steps describe how the Restore Hidden Lines icon restores unblanks the hidden lines of all or the selected objects 1 Select the Render icon paint brush from the top bar 2 Select Hidden Line Removal from the pulldown menu 3 Select the Restore Hidden Lines icon from the Hidden Line Removal command palette The property sheet appears as shown below sv For all Objects ar selected Objects _ Unblank Viewed Object 4 Choose one of the following options a Choose For all Objects to restore all objects in the specified view including the objects that are completely hidden Graphically select the views for which you want to restore the hidden lines b Choose For Selected Objects to restore hidden lines for selected objects only Graphically select the views for which you want to restore the hidden lines ce Choose Unblank Viewed Objects to unblank the viewed models that were blanked by an earlier HLR process 5 Select Apply Please note The Restore Hidden Lines property sheet is an immediate action property sheet
96. By default at most three reference assemblies can be active at the same time in an assembly session setenv CV_MAX_ACTIVE_REF max number of active ref assem When the limit of active reference assembly is reached you can use the command QUIT REFERENCE to deactivate active reference assemblies CV_POSITION_CONSTRAINT_FEEDBACK enables you to specify a color scheme for displaying parametric positioning constraint feedback in the Modify Position Constraints menu This menu is opened by the Constrain Component command see Modify Position Constraints on page 6 17 The defaults are setenv PC_NOT_SET_COL Blue setenv PC_SET_COL Yellow setenv PC_OVER_DEFINED_COL Red setenv PC_NOT_CONSISTENT_COL Orange setenv PC_NOT_CHANGED_COL lightgray setenv PC_SATISFIED COL Green setenv PC_NO_GEOMETRY_COL Orange setenv PC_INVALID_COL Magenta CV_ASSEMBLY_NO_MODEL enables you to add a component without associating any model to it If it is not set or set to no the name of the model associated will always be the component name setenv CV_ASSEMBLY_NO_MODEL yes AD_LIST_CONSTRAINTS enables you to list the parametric positioning constraints to a report file window Set it to yes in order to get the listing to a report file window setenv AD_LIST_CONSTRAINTS yes DB_CHECKING specifies the path of the ckCAD executable It starts Database checking during activating filing and exiting of parts Make sure tha
97. CADDS 2 Choose Information Access the i button in the top left corner of the CADDS desktop or the LDM 3 Choose DOCUMENTATION A list of available CADDS documentation appears 4 Click the book title you want to view Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference xix Preface From the Documentation CD ROM 1 Mount the documentation CD ROM 2 Point your browser to CDROM_mount_point htmldoc mainmenu html UNIX CDROM_Drive htmldoc mainmenu html Windows Online Command Help You can view the online command help directly from the CADDS desktop in the following ways e From the Information Access button on the CADDS desktop or the LDM From the command line From the Information Access Button on the CADDS Desktop or LDM 1 Start CADDS 2 Choose Information Access the i button in the top left corner of the CADDS desktop or the LDM 3 Choose COMMAND HELP The Command Help property sheet opens displaying a list of verb noun combinations of commands From the Command Line Type the exclamation mark to display online documentation before typing the verb noun combination as follows 01 INSERT LINE Printing Documentation A PDF Portable Document Format file is included on the CD ROM for each online book See the first page of each online book for the document number referenced in the PDF file name Check with your system administrator if you need more information
98. Close Reference property sheet assigning a value of 1 for the Level option This opens the reference assembly hub_1 up to one level that is the two instances of reference assembly wheel are displayed as shown in the given figure EA Assembly Structure a ko a wheel_i 1 gt hub_4 oee wheel_z d gt E a L ee disk wheel_1 2 ra ae tyre_i wheel_2 2 ve Using the Prefix Option You can use the prefix option to maintain class name uniqueness in the event that the assembly you are adding contains class names which are already present in the active assembly For example the active assembly contains a class named disk The existing assembly that you are adding also contains the component class disk Use the Prefix option and a value such as hd to prefix the incoming instances of class disk as hd disk 3 30 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Creating a New Assembly Creating a New Assembly by Exporting Creating a New Assembly by Exporting You can create an assembly database from any subassembly in the active main assembly including a reference assembly You can also transfer Adrawings from the main assembly to the exported assembly These Adrawings contain view states associated with the assembly selected for exporting You can optionally import the selected subassembly as a reference assembly in the active main assembly You can file the active ass
99. Component see Lock Unlock Component Property Sheet on page 5 33 or let the system lock it for you as a function of the Add Component task see Adding a New Component to the Structure on page 3 9 Please note Locking any component within a reference assembly automatically activates that reference assembly in the main assembly see Activating a Reference Assembly on page 5 34 5 32 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Working in an Existing Assembly Locking Components Attribute Groups and Models Lock Unlock Component Property Sheet The Lock Unlock Component property sheet has several options Figure 5 17 Property Sheet for Locking or Unlocking a Component Lock Unlock Component Reference Component Wwheel_t gt Subassembly gt Model Reference Specifies the name of the reference assembly assembly instance to of which the component is to be locked Once specified you can lock a Component within that referenced assembly Leave this entry blank if you want to lock a component in the active main assembly Component Specifies the component instance to lock within either the active main assembly or the named Reference assembly Subassembly Locks the component instance and its children components If other users are working on the same assembly selecting this option prevents them from activating and filing any changes to the model geometry associated with this compon
100. Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference CADDS 5 15 0 DOC38700 018 Parametric Technology Corporation Copyright 2007 Parametric Technology Corporation All Rights Reserved User and training guides and related documentation from Parametric Technology Corporation and its subsidiary companies collectively PTC is subject to the copyright laws of the United States and other countries and is provided under a license agreement that restricts copying disclosure and use of such documentation PTC hereby grants to the licensed software user the right to make copies in printed form of this documentation if provided on software media but only for internal personal use and in accordance with the license agreement under which the applicable software is licensed Any copy made shall include the PTC copyright notice and any other proprietary notice provided by PTC Training materials may not be copied without the express written consent of PTC This documentation may not be disclosed transferred modified or reduced to any form including electronic media or transmitted or made publicly available by any means without the prior written consent of PTC and no authorization is granted to make copies for such purposes Information described herein is furnished for general information only is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a warranty or commitment by PTC PTC assumes no responsibility or liab
101. Constraints Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 1 37 Introduction to Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Preparing to Work Preparing to Work Before you begin working in CAMU be sure that the software is installed and your system is properly configured Viewing Parts To ensure that you and other users can view the parts that you create and or use in CAMU the following entry in the caddsrc local file is set to yes so that a vp_links directory is automatically created for each new part setenv CADDSENABVP yes Entering CAMU Enter cadds5 in a command shell window This automatically brings up the CAMU LDM menu if the following environment variable has been set in your caddsrc local file If this variable is not set type cadds5 assembly to enter CAMU CV_UI_DEFAULT_ENV assembly Manipulating a Component That Has No Geometry The cv_ASSEMBLY_HANDLE_PART environment variable establishes the name of the handlepart that you must create to position a component that has no associated model geometry Set the default environment variable as follows setenv CV_ASSEMBLY_HANDLE_PART adhandlepart Any existing ahandlepart should contain the updated _gr file To ensure that the _gr file is up to date do one of the following steps e Activate the part in the Explicit environment Run the Render View or Change Renderview command
102. Creating A New Model without Locating Model Space Origin ___ 8 7 Pulley Assembly Structure 8 7 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Contents xi Activating the Model Associated with the Base Component __ 8 9 Model Space Origin Location of the New Model 8 9 Building the Model Geometry 8 10 Specifying Model Space Origin before Creating the Model___ 8 12 Position the Model Instance Associated with Bracket__ 8 12 Locating MSO for New Model Associated with Wheel __ 8 15 Viewing a Component s Associated Model Geometry 8 18 Options on the Property Sheet 8 19 Outline Geometry 8 20 Controlling Layer Display 8 22 Temporarily Blanking Viewed Model Geometry 8 23 Checking part database of a Model Associated with the Component 8 23 Moving a Component 8 24 Using Translate Rotate and Orient Component 8 25 Alternative Procedure for Orienting and Positioning wheel_2 8 28 Six Point Orientation Method 8 30 Position Component 8 30 Orientation Procedure 8 32 Rotating a Component around an Axis passing through the Origin of the Part 8 32 Rotating a Component around an Axis passing through a Selected Location 8 33 Translating Aligning and Adjusting Components __ lt 8 34 Orienting a Component Work Examples 8 35 Example 1 Rotating a Component at its Origin around x Axis 8 36 Example 2 Rotating a Component at its Origin around an Axis Defined by
103. EMP files Revision conflict of ODB_DAEMON or ODB_SERVER code Verify that the same revision of CADDS specifically usr apl cadds bin ODB_DAEMON ODB_SERVER is installed on the remote DB_DAEMON_HOST You cannot lock components of an assembly that are locked by other users You can determine who has locked any given component by selecting it and using the Verify Object property sheet If you activate an assembly that was exited abnormally and then attempt to lock components that you had locked in the previous session the system displays a message indicating that the component is locked by another user Correct this at the OS level by removing the LOCK and TEMP files in the model s subdirectory Single User Environment In a single user assembly environment the common cause of a problem is that there is a default ODB_SERVER process connected to the assembly from the previous session To resolve this do the following 1 Find the associated ODB_SERVER process using the ps command The associated assembly name is appended to the ODB_SERVER process in the output Kill the ODB_SERVER process with the UNIX kill lt pid gt command and reactivate the assembly Please note Do notuse the kill 9 command to kill the ODB_SERVER process This may create problems with the ODB_DAEMON which will prevent you from activating the assembly previously activated by this process Only the superuser can kill the ODB_SERVER process
104. MU session setenv CADDSASSOC_UID yes Checking Which Server Process is Attached to the Assembly With several users working concurrently on the same assembly there may be times when you want to determine which ODB_SERVER process is attached to a particular assembly To do this open a shell window and enter the command bin ps ef grep ODB_SERVER grep v grep See Chapter 2 Configuring Concurrent Assembly Mock Up for more information on CAMU system management 5 30 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Working in an Existing Assembly Locking Components Attribute Groups and Models Locking Components Attribute Groups and Models Locking establishes read write permissions on the assembly or portions of it attribute groups and component model geometry It is a safety mechanism that prevents users from activating and filing changes to the model associated with the assembly component at the same time Its purpose is to prevent users who are active in the same assembly from having write permissions to the same components at the same time This prevents work from being inadvertently overwritten Components are automatically locked when you create them However when you activate an existing assembly nothing is locked You must lock the portion of the assembly on which you want to work Locking is session dependent When you exit the assembly all locks are rem
105. Menu Reference Adrawings and Alternate Views Adrawings The Adrawing Provides Consistency As you activate and access the various CADDS parts that make up the assembly the assembly database retains information about how you look at the geometry This includes which component instances you have viewed VIEW COMPONENT as well as view scale orientation location and so forth In addition the Adrawing retains information such as layer discrimination and layer residency of all components viewed at the time you last filed This provides a consistent environment in which to work on the assembly and its component parts The Default Adrawing When you activate a new assembly you activate an Adrawing named DEFAULT You can specify characteristics on the Activate New Assembly and Adrawing property sheet or take the defaults which are displayed on the property sheet Adrawings and the Alternative View State Each Adrawing in an assembly permits the display of associated models in two separate positions e Actual standard view state e Alternate exploded view state Once you have toggled the view state to exploded you can use the Move Component property sheet to define an alternate position for some or all of the associated model instances Views on the Adrawing are not altered with respect to scale orientation size location and quantity when view state is toggled Please note The first time you toggle to Exploded for an Adraw
106. Multiuser CAMU 5 27 Updating Your Session 5 27 Multiuser CAMU Example 5 28 Updating Parametric Positions After Modeling Changes ___ 5 30 Checking Which Server Process is Attached to the Assembly ___ 5 30 Locking Components Attribute Groups and Models 5 31 Locking Areas of the Structure 5 32 Determining What to Lock 5 32 Lock Unlock Component Property Sheet 5 33 Contents viii Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Activating a Reference Assembly 5 34 Refreshing the Main Assembly 5 36 Fully Constrained Assembly 5 36 Underconstrained Assembly 5 37 Overconstrained Assembly 5 37 Parametric Positioning Understanding Parametric Positioning 6 2 Task Set Options 6 2 Parametric Positioning Tools 6 4 When Does Solving Occur 6 4 Understanding Solving Process Order 6 4 Using Positioning Constraints within Multiuser CAMU 6 6 Path Locking 6 6 Creating Positioning Constraints 6 7 Locking 6 7 Creating Relationships between Component Geometry 6 8 Constraint Mapping between Cylindrical Surfaces 6 8 Ambiguous Selection 6 8 Using the Flip Option 6 8 Entity Selection 6 9 Multiple Instances of a Subassembly Class 6 10 Creating a New Class to Capture Unique Positioning 6 1 Hybrid Positioning 6 12 Parametric and Explicit Positioning 6 12 Explicit Models 6 12 Using Reference Assemblies 6 12 Usin
107. PTIONS Adrawings and models To file the assembly structure default Adrawing and the root node model select the Assembly Structure button For the Adrawings and or models you select changes are added to the databases Models remain viewed You can file a specified model with a new name FILE amp EXIT All the changes are added to the database Suspended items are unsuspended then updated You are returned to the LDM menu FILE amp EXIT W A property sheet appears listing your active and or suspended OPTIONS Adrawings and models To file the assembly structure default Adrawing and the root node model select the Assembly Structure button To file other items select from the list of Adrawings or models To file selected Adrawings and the Assembly Structure file the Adrawings you select Apply and file the structure Apply again QUIT SUSPENDED On the property sheet select the suspended Adrawing or model you want to quit Changes since the last filing are not saved in the database although they are visible on your screen QUIT REFERENCE Enables you to close an open reference assembly See Deactivating a Reference Assembly on page 4 3 QUIT amp EXIT Any changes made since the last time you filed are not saved Returns you to the LDM menu CONSTRUCT INSER These options are available only in the Explicit modeling or Explicit T PART Assembly environments They enable you to create or insert a CADDS 4X type par
108. Reference Defining Assembly Geometry Viewing a Component s Associated Model Geometry e Determine which components you would like to see on the assembly drawing e Decide whether or not to view the leaf components e Decide on which layer you wish to view the leaf components e Decide which if any layer ranges you would like to use for specific component or assembly instances You do not need to lock a component to view it Please note Layer viewing conditions established for a component by the VIEW COMPONENT command are lost if you file the assembly with that component unviewed To avoid this create an execute Explicit or command Parametric file that captures your VIEW COMPONENT commands Options on the Property Sheet These options are available for viewing the component Outline Allows you to view unview or make no viewing change to the model associated with the specified component instance see Outline Geometry on page 8 20 Intermode Allows you to view unview or make no viewing change to the components between the selected component and the leaf components Detail Allows you to view unview or make no viewing change to the model s associated with the leaf node descendants of the specified component instance Parameter Allows you to view unview or make no viewing changes to the parameters that were displayed the last time the associated model was filed All Instances Allows you to view
109. Remove Hidden Lines see Restoring Hidden Lines on page 12 15 Update HLR Image enables you to update the present HLR image based on parametric modeling changes to the original geometry relocation of the original geometry and so on Associative dimensions affected by the HLR update are regenerated and updated see Updating the HLR Image on page 12 16 HLR Commands You can also use the following commands e Remove hidden lines using the command HIDE OBJECT e Restore hidden lines using the command UNHIDE OBJECT e Identify changes using the command MARK CHANGES e Update the HLR graphics using the command UPDATE HLRIMAGE Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 12 5 Documenting the Assembly Generating HLR Using HIDE OBJECT For more information on hidden line generation and manipulation see the Hidden Line Removal and AEC HLR User Guide and Menu Reference Removing Hidden Lines Removing hidden lines reduces the visual complexity of an object and gives it a three dimensional appearance This enables the natural visualization of solid models by blanking those features that would be invisible or hidden from the viewer if the object were solid If the HIDE OBJECT command is applied to previously HLRed entities it preserves the associative dimensions of the Limbs or Surrogates Similarly if the dimensions are applied to the viewed part entities HIDE OBJECT preserves the dimensions for those
110. See usr apl cadds scripts templates caddsrc all for description of this environment variable This is the default setting 2 Activate the part model using either ACTIVATE PART or ACTIVATE MODEL in the Explicit or Explicit Assembly environment 3 Issue the following command TAG ENTITY PERMANENT ALL 4 File the part model Please note You only need to perform steps 2 4 for parts that will participate in parametric positioning constraints CADDSASSOC_UID The CADDSASSOC_UID variable enables the parametric solver to retain the original task tags during model regeneration If you have set CADDSASSOC_UID to yes in caddsrc local the associativity of tag IDs is maintained and the solver solves constraints based on the new geometry If you have not set CADDSASSOC_UID in the caddsrc local before regenerating a model Refresh Assembly will attempt to solve the constraints However the original tags involved in the constraints will not be found The new tags will be flagged as invalid 6 38 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Parametric Positioning Parametric Positioning and Adrawings Parametric Positioning and Adrawings Parametric positional constraints are stored in the assembly database and are applicable to all Adrawings You can optionally issue the Select Assemble On command once for any given Adrawing The select statement is retained when you file the Adrawing part see Automatic Assembly on
111. See in the Graphics Window What you see in the graphics window depends on which Adrawing was active the last time you worked in the assembly If you activate a model the view state of the active model inherits what was last viewed from an Adrawing or from a model that was previously active DDRAW A DDRAW is a special CADDS drawing file that is automatically activated when you activate an Adrawing The DDRAW maintains the view state of the latest filed version of a particular Adrawing MDRAW An MDRAW is a special CADDS drawing file that is automatically activated when you activate a model from within CAMU The MDRAW preserves the view state orientation scale number of views viewed model instances view render mode setting spaceball and mouse based dynamic view manipulation settings and clip model settings of the assembly when you move from one active model to another Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 5 7 Working in an Existing Assembly Moving Between Models and Adrawings The MDRAW maintains the view state of the assembly only until you activate an Adrawing When you activate an Adrawing the view state orientation scale number of views viewed model instances view render mode setting spaceball and mouse based dynamic view manipulation settings and clip model settings resets to the view state of that particular Adrawing Please note Detailing and other view specific operations such as line
112. ULL Exportable variables for model 44LE d1 Length Free 0 437500 MULL In the report window the Value column is the original value of the variable before it was changed The mod value indicates the new value after any equation in which the variable appears is changed A NULL in the column indicates the value has not changed Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 9 7 Using Interpart Constraints Placing Component Variables in the Active Assembly Symbols in the last column indicate the type of variable asterisk indicates the variable is associated with a parametric dimension in the model equals sign indicates a static variable a variable not associated with a parametric dimension Please note Ifyou file the assembly after you import components any variables in the components you imported become constants You must import them again Before you do so turn on a command file to save the series of functions you perform as you import variables and add equations containing the variables You can then run the command file to export the variables 6 Select the Import Component icon The property sheet appears 7 Click the pushpin so the property sheet remains open 8 In the Component Instance field enter the name of the component instance from whose associated model you exported variables 9 Click Apply Repeat this procedure for every model from which you exported variables In the example
113. You Can Do With CAMU Using the Concurrent Assembly Mock Up CAMU product you can design an overall product structure You can use the structure to manage the overall development of the product You can design individual part models in the context of the overall assembly with several users working concurrently You can define and associate information about different portions of the product structure then extract the information using CVMAC programs CAMU provides a way to manage the assemblies that you design You can see and work on both a logical representation and the geometry of the assembly The logical diagram shows all the assembly components and the relationships between components While building the logical diagram you can see the geometry of the assembly as you view and position the various models associated with the assembly structure components CAMU eliminates data redundancy by associating part models to components of your assembly An assembly can have several instances of the same component each associated with a single part Any changes you make to that one part are reflected in all component instances associated with that part and within all assemblies that contain the same component instance Assemblies created using CAMU can be made up of any combination of new or existing piece parts and or subassemblies Piece parts or subassemblies can be designed in both the Parametric and Explicit environments either within or ou
114. active main assembly This essentially enables you to file the active main assembly as a new name Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 3 35 Chapter 4 Filing an Assembly This chapter describes the different options available for filing your assembly The topics are e Filing Your Changes e Filing or Quitting Selected Adrawings or Models Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 4 1 Filing an Assembly Filing Your Changes Filing Your Changes While working on the Assembly structure or model periodically file your work When you do so any changes made during that work session are written to the assembly database You can file an entire assembly or selected Adrawings and or models The default Adrawing and root node model are filed whenever you file the assembly structure When you file suspended Adrawings or models the system deactivates the suspension and updates the database with all the changes made before it was suspended If other users are also working on the active main assembly filing commits your own changes to the database then refreshes the assembly to show you any changes that other users have filed since you began working in the assembly or since you last filed whichever was most recent After you file other users can update their copy of the assembly with your changes by filing or refreshing the assembly from their own system For more information about filing an
115. actual CADDS model The number you specify is added to the layer number on which the actual model graphics resides The model graphics are then viewed on the layer which is the sum of these two numbers For example if the model graphics reside on layer 10 and you want to view them on layer 15 you would enter layer 5 in the layer field If you do not specify a layer the model graphics appear on the same layer on which they reside in the actual CADDS model regardless of the active layer of the Adrawing in which you are currently working 3 Click Apply A pulldown menu appears with optional Orientation selections and a Done n field which displays the number of instances of the component to be positioned Cirientation Done n 4 To position the component select a CADDS Location icon Parametric or Entity Placement icon Explicit from the left bar You can position it as many times as you want The last location is the actual position 5 The component is added to the assembly structure and viewed in the graphics window Click Done For adding multiple instances the Done n field counts down indicating the number of instances remaining for you to position To position the next instance repeat Step 4 6 Click Apply The assembly structure is updated Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 3 13 Creating a New Assembly Adding a New Component to the Structure Position and Orient Position the
116. alid edge entity Geometric Type straight line Topological Type genuine edge LAYER 0 NAME Information for EDGE JEDGE ENTITY TYPE MODEL COORDINATE OUTPUT Validity information valid edge Geometric Type straight line Topological Type genuine edge LAYER 0 NAME EDGE ENTITY TYPE MODEL COORDINATE OUTPUT validity information valid edge Geometric Type straight line i Topological Type genuine edge LAYER 0 NAME Information for EDGE EDGE ENTITY TYPE MODEL COORDINATE OUTPUT validity information valid edge Geometric Type straight line Topological Type genuine edge LAYER 0 NAME EDGE ENTITY TYPE MODEL COORDINATE OUTPUT Validity information valid edge Geometric Type straight line Topological Type genuine edge LAYER 0 NAME Information for EDGE EDGE ENTITY TYPE MODEL COORDINATE OUTPUT Validity information valid edge Geometric Type straight line Topological Type genuine edge LAYER 0 NAME Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 7 37 Changing the Assembly Structure Obtaining Information about Components Sample output of the Report Window is shown below Assembly name USERS SPATIL PARTS CAMERA Object type component instance ID number 116 Associated Model USERS SPATIL PARTS CAMERA FRAME Lock Status not locked by anyone Model Status active by prevelas Layer Offset 0 Layer List 0 254 ID
117. and Menu Reference 8 37 Defining Assembly Geometry Moving a Component Figure 8 25 The copied component rotated at its origin parallel to an axis defined by points P1 and P2 by an angle of 30 degrees Grigin of Go pied Com ponent Pay P2 Example 3 Rotating a Component around the y Axis passing through a Location Rotates the component around the y axis passing through a specified location To rotate the copied component refer to Figure 8 22 around the y axis passing through a location specified by point P1 Choose the appropriate option from the Orientation menu Specify 30 degrees as the angle of rotation in the Angle field Click Apply Select the point P1 on the graphics area to specify the location through which the axis is passing The resultant geometry is rotated by an angle of 30 degrees around the y axis passing through the location point P1 8 38 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Defining Assembly Geometry Moving a Component Figure 8 26 The copied component is rotated around Y axis passing through location P1 by an angle of 30 degrees Grigin of Go pied Component Nae P Sg Follow the same procedure to rotate the component around the x and z axis passing through a given location Example 4 Rotating a Component around an Axis Specified by Two Locations Rotates the component around an axis specified by two location points To rotate
118. anes Parametric Create utility construction planes to use when you position components with the Add and Position commands Using a utility Cplane has different results depending on whether you select it before or after you locate or rotate a component 8 42 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Defining Assembly Geometry Moving a Component e Select utility Cplane then rotate or locate the component The component is oriented with respect to the utility Cplane e Locate or rotate the component then select utility Cplane The component is oriented with respect to the active Cplane at the time it is located or rotated Locate or rotate the component then select utility Cplane The component is oriented with respect to the active Cplane at the time it is located or rotated The component does not use the utility Cplane for orientation but uses it as a reference for any subsequent rotations and or locations When you add multiple components the orientation and selected Cplane which could be a utility Cplane are inherited by the next component instance you position e To override the inheritance of the orientation select RESET to use the inherited Cplane e To override the inheritance of the Cplane select a new utility Cplane then RESET This matches the orientation of the component to the new utility Cplane Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 8 43 Defining Assembly
119. are available only if the Interference Computation option is selected first The following modifiers are available for this control Layer Specifies the layer in which the HLR intersection curves are displayed If the layer is not specified the active layer value is used Tol Specifies tolerance to be used for the intersection process If the tolerance is not specified the default tolerance value is used This submodifier is not available in the Faceted engine mode The slidebar available when the Faceted engine and Quality option is selected can be used to choose the quality of the HLR The higher the quality the more accurate the result and slower the calculation Please note The modifiers Tolerance Limb Tolerance No of Segments and Refine are available only in the Analytical engine mode C Tolerance Use this option to determine whether two curves occupy the same place in a view The default value is 0 0001 inches In the field beside Tolerance you can specify the tolerance value either in Model units or in Draw units The tolerance value controls the following factors Curves and Space The smaller the tolerance the more curves will be occupied in the given space Limb accuracy The smaller the tolerance the more accurate the limbs are Limb Tolerance Use this option to specify the tolerance factor in units for generating limbs The default value is derived from the Tolerance option Warning Using Limb Toleran
120. ars MODEL loc 4 Enter a two point translation vector The second point defines the center of rotation XOYOZO IX 1 5875 These four steps simultaneously locate and rotate wheel_2 To rotate about a second vector enter a comma and enter another pair of coordinates You can use location filters such as END ORIGIN INTERSECTION and so on and select viewed geometry Six Point Orientation Method The six point orientation method is available in Explicit only Position Component Position Component allows you to view and position a component instance in the same procedure Use Position Component when your component instance is not viewed Position a component when you add it to the assembly or later select the Position Component icon from the Move component property sheet 8 30 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Defining Assembly Geometry Moving a Component To position a component using the Move Component property sheet 1 Select the Position Component icon from the Move Component property sheet The Position Component icon is displayed Figure 8 20 Move Component property sheet with Position option Move Cdeponenk Reference Component Component Instance icrankshart_i layer B gj gt Layer List I ATE Cancel 2 Enter the name of the component instance or reference assembly instance you want to position in the Component Instance or the Assembly In
121. associated model This specifically pertains to a dash letter or dash number following the model name on disk e Layer Allows you to specify a value by which to increment layer display For example if the model geometry resides on layers 3 and 30 and you specify a Layer value of 6 the model geometry appears on layers 9 and 36 in the active Adrawing The default value is 0 e Layer List Allows you to specify a range of viewing layers for the associated model geometry For example the associated model may contain geometry on layers 2 through 5 and layers 10 15 that you wish to see while you do not wish to see the geometry that resides on the other layers in the model Separate individual layers and layer lists by a comma The default range is 0 254 which is all layers e View and Position Allows you to see and place the associated model instance s e Family Member Toggles the use of family of parts functionality on and off If enabled the Member option is unhazed and available See Adding a Family Member of a Master Model on page 3 15 Please note Family of Parts functionality is described in the Parametric Modeling User Guide and Menu Reference e Member Allows you to specify the name of a Member found in the Table File associated with the Master model You can select a member of the Master model model name specified using the Model option from the optional Family Member List The Member option is only valid when addi
122. assy_1 conrod_ endcap_ niston_z histon ass _2 conrod_z endcap_ Crank U61293_1 niston_ nistan assy_3 OO conrod_3 antes __ _ eo OS TSE OTe Orv endcap_2 crankshaft _i pistons pniston assy_4 a Se conrod_ 4 eae endcap_4 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 6 7 Parametric Positioning Creating Positioning Constraints Creating Relationships between Component Geometry You can only select components that are valid for defining the positioning constraints For example in the case of the crank assembly see Locking on page 6 7 piston assy is locked in order to add components The piston and conrod are added To add the endcap parametrically you can select geometry only from the piston and the conrod This is because you are positioning the components within subassembly piston assy If the design calls for positioning the endcap with respect to the crankshaft this implies that subassembly piston assy needs to be positioned parametrically in relation to the crankshaft Lock piston assy crankshaft and the root component Then define positioning constraints between the endcap and the crankshaft Constraint Mapping between Cylindrical Surfaces Using the Mate option see Mate on page 6 15 the constraint maps to tangent constraint The two cylinders will have a line contact if their radii are differe
123. ave the attribute group apply to every component in your assembly structure click the Global button 5 To have the attribute group apply only to one instance of a component click the Component Instance button In the Component Instance field type the name of a component instance with which the attribute group should be associated 6 Fill the property sheet Click Apply 7 If you are defining more than one attribute group at a time repeat Steps 3 4 and 5 11 4 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Defining Nongraphic Information for the Assembly Associating an Attribute Group with a Component Associating an Attribute Group with a Component When you create an attribute group if it is not a global group specify the component instance with which you want the attribute group to be associated You can associate the attribute group to an additional component s The component you are associating the group with must be locked 1 Select the Associate Attribute icon to associate an attribute group with a component instance The property sheet appears Figure 11 3 Associate Atiribute Group property sheet Associate Attribute Group Reference Component Component Instance erankshaft_1 ACtribute Group hnn 2 Specify the Attrioute Group name and the Component Instance you are associating in the respective fields 3 Click Apply Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Men
124. can access labeled functions from both the ASSEMBLY EXP and ASSEMBLY PAR global menus The upper portion includes icons for Refresh Assembly Undo Acommand Lock unlock Component model Move Component translate rotate orient and position Activate Model and Copy Component The portion of the menu under COMP ASSY the taskset includes Add Component Change Component Remove Component and Assemblies Compressing Blanking Reordering Mirroring Components in the structure Add Component And Add Assembly are discussed in Chapter 3 Creating a New Assembly The other functions are discussed in Chapter 7 Changing the Assembly Structure 1 24 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Introduction to Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Assembly Environment Task Sets Figure 1 4 Assembly Taskset for Parametric and Explicit Assembly Environments Add Cemporerd Change Comporern Reames Campane Add Assembly Change Assembly Remas Assembly Reorder Campane om apay Struewure Esperd Assembly R Corstain Cempenent Unresolved Sub Assembly Assemble Companent Assemble Orn CH Miror Camporert Moving to Other Environments and Task Sets You can move to other environments and task sets without having to file and exit your active main assembly Both the ASSEMBLY PAR and ASSEMBLY EXP global menus provide options fo
125. cart and add two instances of the hub assembly to it The instances of hub appear in bold because they are reference assemblies The instances of housing the nested reference assemblies also appear in bold In addition each instance of housing has been assigned a dot extension Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 3 25 Creating a New Assembly Adding Existing Assemblies to Your Assembly Controlling the Level of Nested Reference Assemblies Use the OPEN CLOSE REFERENCE option to read and display the desired level of reference assemblies of the active main assembly in the assembly tree window Select the COMP ASSY menu from the top bar to access this option The Open Close Reference property sheet appears as shown Open Close Reference Reference Instance hub_1 Expand Reference All Level EA e Open Close 7 ewed e Reference Instance The reference instance name that you want to open or close e Expand Reference The level up to which you can specify to read and display the reference assembly in the assembly structure tree e All Read and display all the reference assemblies e Level Read and display the specified level of reference assemblies You can specify any real number greater than zero The default number is 1 e Open Read and display the assembly structure of only the open reference assemblies This is set on by default e Close Curtail the assembly
126. ce increases the size of the database and negatively affects the quality of the disolayed object No of Segments Use this to select the number of segments to be generated The default value is 1 000 12 10 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Documenting the Assembly Generating HLR Using HIDE OBJECT f Refine Use this option when the HIDE OBJECT command does not produce accurate Hidden Line Removal This option provides better quality results of an HLR image In the Faceted engine mode the Quality factor may be adjusted to achieve similar results Figure 12 4 Selection Method Options Remove Hidden Lines Engine Selection Method ae all objects a wire z gt Mark Include El Mark Exclude select Graphically a Solid Entities surface Entities Specify objects Ej Curve Entities AEC Entities Image Details Apply Cancel 3 Enable Selection Method to view the available options These options are the same for Faceted and Analytical modes The options are as follows a Select All Objects to remove hidden lines from all the objects that are shown in the views you choose This is the default option if you select the Selection Method option In the Faceted mode All Objects is the default option even if you do not select the Selection Method option In the Analytical mode All Objects is not the default option b Use the Clip option to remove hidden lines only
127. ciative update 4 2 model geometry 12 21 anon variable setting 2 6 Apply on a property sheet 1 31 Archiving the assembly 2 22 Assemble component 6 3 automatic 6 32 manual 6 32 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Index 1 Index Assembly 1 7 Explicit tasks set 1 24 Parametric task set 1 24 Assembly drawing generation 6 2 12 2 Assembly instance 1 8 activating associated assembly 3 21 5 4 5 31 creating 3 21 editing external assembly 7 27 filing edits 4 3 modifying associated assembly 7 25 Assembly refreshing 5 36 Assembly Structure 1 2 1 7 blanking components in 7 29 building 3 5 changing 7 2 changing appearance 7 3 changing appearance of 7 29 compressing Components in 7 30 creating guidelines 3 6 example 1 10 line between components 3 20 naming convention 3 7 obtaining information 7 3 plotting 12 29 relationship between components in 3 20 structuring approach 3 5 terminology 1 7 Assembly Tree 1 11 shortcut menu 1 15 top bar menu 1 19 Assist line 1 33 Associate Attribute Group property sheet 11 5 Associative Mass Point 5 22 Merge Mass Point 5 24 Associative Topology Bus 1 40 ATB 1 40 ATB operations 1 40 Attribute 11 2 assigning new name 11 16 assigning value 11 11 Attribute Editor window 11 11 changing property 11 16 creating 11 3 11 8 creating report with 11 19 editing 11 11 floating point number in 11 10 removing 11 17 type 11 9 Attribute group 11 4 associating with component 11 5
128. cked Component Node Unlocked Component Node Viewed Component Node Blank Component Node Highlighted Component Node Active Component Node Ko 6 amp Pw Suspended Component Node Open Reference Node ct Closed Reference Node Hidden Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 1 13 Introduction to Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Assembly Tree Window In the Assembly Structure the three icons that precede the component or reference assembly node denote the state of the component or reference assembly as shown in the next table Table 1 2 State of Component Node and Reference Assembly Node Icon Component Node Reference Assembly Node First Locked or Unlocked Open or Closed Second Active or Suspended Locked or Unlocked Third Viewed Blanked or Highlighted Active A few combinations of the three icons for the state of the component or reference assembly follows Table 1 3 Icon Combination for Component and Reference Assembly State Icon Combination State of Component or Reference Assembly a F a ag aM i a4 You can toggle the states of the component node by double clicking on the corresponding icon in the assembly tree Component Locked and Highlighted Component Unlocked and Blank Component Locked Suspended and Viewed Component Locked and Active Reference Assembl
129. core and number indicates how many instances of that relation exist Relation names are not shown in the assembly structure You can select the relation and or execute the command VERIFY OBJECT to show the relation name in the Explicit environment Text window or Parametric environment Report window In the figure below the relation instance between whl_assy_1 and wheel_1 is r2301_1 The relation between whl_assy_2 and wheel_3 is r2301_2 Both relation instances have the same relation class name r2301 whl_assy_1 and wheel_1 are related to each other in the same way as whl_assy_2 and wheel_ 3 Figure 3 7 wagon Assembly Showing Relation Instances r230 1 whl assy 1 ZA re whl assy 2 Component names can contain any combination of alphanumeric characters In addition component names can contain a period and a dollar sign If you plan to use the interpart constraints capabilities of CAMU see Chapter 9 Using Interpart Constraints 3 20 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Creating a New Assembly Adding Existing Assemblies to Your Assembly Adding Existing Assemblies to Your Assembly There are two ways to add an existing external assembly to the assembly you are designing e Add a reference to the external assembly When you add an external assembly to your assembly a component assembly instance representing the root component of the external assembly is added to
130. d the Adrawing has the model instances of the entire crankshaft assembly viewed in the isometric orientation Although the model graphics of the crankshaft are visible in the graphics window you cannot change any of the model geometry because you have activated an Adrawing which is also a CADDS part 5 10 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Working in an Existing Assembly Moving Between Models and Adrawings Figure 5 2 Graphics Window with the Crankshaft Assembly in ISO Orientation Activating a Model While Active in an Adrawing When you activate the model associated with the component instance conrod_4 the letter A appears in the conrod_4 component box indicating that the associated model is active Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 5 11 Working in an Existing Assembly Moving Between Models and Adrawings Figure 5 3 Assembly Structure after Activating the Conrod_4 Model Instance Y crankshaft 1 new crankassy 1 assy_1 The view state of the assembly in the graphics window does not change Figure 5 4 Graphics Window after Activating the Conrod_4 Model Instance 5 12 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Working in an Existing Assembly Moving Between Models and Adrawings Moving from One Active Model to Another When you activate the model associated with the component instance piston_4 activating another model
131. d Menu Reference 7 29 Changing the Assembly Structure Changing Structure Appearance If you are specifying a Component in a reference assembly specify the assembly instance name in the Reference field Assembly Structure Assembly Structure Unblanked Blanked Compressing a Subassembly When you compress a component instance or reference assembly instance all leaf nodes that exist below the component and have multiple instances are compressed A single component with a number represents the compressed leaf nodes When you select Uncompress all compressed nodes below the specified component instance are displayed with one component for each instance Fill in the property sheet by selecting a component instance or assembly instance from the Assembly Structure window or by typing the name on the property sheet Please note Component instance numbers must be in numerical order to be compressed see Reordering a Component on page 7 32 Display Structure Component Component Inszance gt icrank 061293_1 a Compr i Unecompr Apply 7 30 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Changing the Assembly Structure Changing Structure Appearance If you are specifying a Component in a reference assembly specify the assembly instance name in the Reference field Assembly Structure Assembly Structure Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 7 31 Changing the A
132. d components such as 5 40 nut_5 5 40 nut_7 3 48 nut_9 and so forth The subassembly side assy consists of three subassemblies journal assy_1 journal assy_3 and frame assy_1 A section of the assembly is shown below Assembly S M 3 6 5 tudes 3 a a A Sts tudassy Peo frore onsh_1 ie c amp 3 6 5 tudassy T FET ee ee eee ee 5 40 l Tet tudassy_ pmi N 5 40 tudes su 3 cell tnt i r ee WY 5 40 nut_ a j 3 48 nut 9 ee 3 5 nut_11 Y 8 nut_13 _ _ooo 1 TS truck oarsy_1 p 3 nut 15 es 5 Journ ls bowel Sr e journal box corerp_1 a Ki Journal assy_1 Journal hingt pin_l se i side wss4_l In the example of a truck assembly the positions of the leaf components of the rightmost subassemblies such as 5 40 studassy_1 3 48 studassy_7 and so forth are solved first Then the parametric positions related to the nearest common parent component frame assy_1 are solved After that subassembly side assy_1 is solved positioning frame assy_1 journal assy_1 and journal assy_3 with respect to each other Finally the root component truck_assy_1 is solved Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 6 5 Parametric Positioning Understanding Parametric Positioning Using Positioning Constraints within Multiuser CAMU Multiple users can work on different parts of the assembly For example User A might work on the frame a
133. d number If model information is associated with a component all instances of that component class are associated with the same model information Operations performed on a member of a component class are reflected in all other instances of that class both in the structure and the graphical representation of the class Parent Component A component that represents a subassembly also called a subassembly node A parent component must have a child component and it can be a child of a higher level component Child Component A component that is one level down from a parent component Siblings Components that have the same parent Siblings do not have to be instances of the same class Leaf Component A component that has no children Leaf components are the components typically associated with models CADDS piece parts Relation Instance The line in the assembly structure that connects one component to another showing the parent child relationship In the assembly database the relation instance is the mechanism that links the entire assembly hierarchy These relation instances contain information such as node connectivity and orientation information between a component and its parent 1 8 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Introduction to Concurrent Assembly Mock Up The Assembly Structure Model A CADDS part associated with a component class within the assembly Adrawing An Assembly
134. d positioning 6 12 Import Component property sheet 9 8 Imported variable deleting 9 23 Instances adding 3 9 Interrupt HLR 12 9 L Layer retaining assignment 8 23 Layer utilities positioning a component 8 42 LDM menu 1 4 activating new assembly from 3 2 Leaf component 1 8 List component data 7 35 field on property sheet 1 29 imported variable 9 7 parametric positioning constraints 6 17 List assembly 7 39 List Attribute Groups property sheet 11 7 List Variable icon 9 7 Local Data Manager LDM menu accessing environments from 1 39 illustration of 1 4 Locating a component 8 6 with no associated model 3 8 Lock status reference assembly in 5 34 Lock Unlock Component Model 1 24 Locking 5 31 and viewing a component 5 32 assembly structure 5 31 crash recovery 2 24 model 2 22 property sheet 5 33 root node 5 34 what to 5 32 M Managing data 2 21 Manual mode solving equation 9 12 Mass Point 5 22 Mate 6 15 MDRAW 5 7 Menu help 1 33 Mirror Component property sheet 7 16 Mirroring a component 7 15 example 7 19 graphical 7 15 orientation specifying 7 23 part 7 15 procedure 7 16 Model 1 9 Model geometry 8 3 activating 8 3 creating 8 3 creating guidelines for 8 2 using source model 8 4 viewing 8 18 Model Space Origin MSO 8 7 locating 8 7 Modify Attribute property sheet 11 16 Modifying position constraint 6 17 deleting 6 20 offset value changing 6 19 ways to 6 20 Move Component property sheet 8 24 Orient Component
135. d refreshing assemblies in a multi user environment see Chapter 5 Working in an Existing Assembly If your active main assembly includes a reference assembly the reference assembly is also updated that is it reflects any changes that have been made and filed to its associated external assembly since you last filed your active assembly When you file the assembly all active reference assemblies are also filed See Updating Active Reference Assemblies on page 4 3 Positional constraints are saved when you file Please note If you have issued Select Assemble On see Automatic Assembly on page 6 32 all parametric positioning constraints are solved when you file Updating Associative Annotation Filing the assembly updates all associative dimensions HLR hatch and cross sections 4 2 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Filing an Assembly Filing Your Changes Updating Active Reference Assemblies If you have activated and edited a reference assembly within the active main assembly filing the active main assembly commits those changes Once committed you can optionally deactivate active reference assemblies using the QUIT REFERENCE command Deactivating a Reference Assembly QUIT REFERENCE enables you to de activate an active reference assembly The assembly becomes read only This allows you to activate another reference assembly when the maximum number of active reference ass
136. d so on of multiple objects The mass point is inserted into the physically active part Please note Associative mass points can be created only if the solid or Tsurf to which they pertain is physically resident in the active part As opposed to this the ASSOCIATIVE option in the CAMU environment is available only with the ADD option There is no such limitation in the active part environment 5 22 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Working in an Existing Assembly Associative Mass Points Using the Associative Mass Points Option Lo Select the Physical Properties icon from the Model task set The following command palette is displayed Associative Wess Poiats fhi Zancel Select the Mass Points icon from this palette to display the following Mass Points property sheet Mass Points From file Area 1 000000 Volume Nass Ixx Ixy If y y gt Vv a a E F E Cancel Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 5 23 Working in an Existing Assembly Associative Mass Points This property sheet allows you to insert change and merge mass points Selecting any one of these icons changes the property sheet to the relevant modifiers Select the Update Select Associations icon to update one or more associative mass points These mass points are based on the most current size shape and so forth of either the associated solid the trimmed surfac
137. d the local systems must have the same revision of CAMU specifically the ODB_DAEMON and ODB_SERVER executable files under usr ap1 cadds bin to run multi user CAMU across the network Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 2 11 Configuring Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Configuring Multi User CAMU Other System Considerations If you do not have write permissions to an assembly the system does not allow you to activate it To set up a configuration that allows write access to a common assembly directory and or library parts directories give users the same group id in the etc passwd file Next insert the umask 2 command in the login or cshrc file for each user This turns on read write permissions on files created by the user and allows any member of the group to activate and modify files created by any member of the same group sample Procedure to Configure Multi User CAMU Follow this procedure to configure multi user CAMU 1 Establish which system on the network is to be the DB_DAEMON_HOST e Is the system accessible to all CAMU users on the network e Is the same revision of CADDS installed on the system e Is there an ODB_DAEMON process running on the system e Ifthe DB_DAEMON_HOST system is not the same system that the assemblies live on can it access the system s where the common assembly directory and parts exist The system designated as the DB_DAEMON_HOST for this example is a file ser
138. dded to the assembly Then the model corresponding to the selected Family Member is associated with the component If the associated model is not found regeneration of the Family Member is performed The name of the associated model is wholly based on the naming conventions established in the Table File of the master Model for Family Member information Please note The terms Master Model Table File and Family Member as well as Family of Parts functionality in its entirety are documented in the Parametric Modeling User Guide and Menu Reference and in parametric online command help for the GENERATE FAMILY command In the following example the model associated with the Family Member member1 of the Master Model impianto freon is associated with the new component class impianto freon Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 3 15 Creating a New Assembly Adding a Family Member of a Master Model Please note The Component class name and the Model name can be identical but they do not need to be Figure 3 4 Add Component property sheet with Family Member details Add Component Reference Component Parent gt iframe_i Component Jimpianto_freon fi Hodel limpianto_freon View and Position paier Family Member Member Imember Cancel Accept 5E Cancel e Model Name Specifies the name of the Master Model e Member Name Specifies the name of a member found in the Table File associated wi
139. ded or hidden appearance of a viewed model in the assembly the viewed model must have a current _gr file containing the drawing and model graphics data along with the tessellation data If the _gr file of your model is missing the VIEW COMPONENT command dynamically generates the graphics data for that model by reading the _pd file of that model However this can adversely impact the performance of the VIEW COMPONENT command For more information refer to the CADDSHADE IT User Guide Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 12 17 Documenting the Assembly Generating HLR Using CADDShade Generating CADDShade II HLR This section shows you how to generate CADDShade HLR of viewed components You can shade or hide viewed components using CADDShade Your graphics display output appears in the main graphics window Follow these steps 1 Activate an Adrawing 2 View all desired components 2 wheel 2 wheel_2 ai axle 1 12 18 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Documenting the Assembly Generating HLR Using CADDShade 3 Establish hidden line defaults for the assembly Background color Cyan Smoothness 4 Perform CADDShade Hidden Line generation using any of the following commands CHANGE RENDERVIEW HLREDGE CHANGE RENDERVIEW HLRNOEDGE RENDER VIEW HLREDGE RENDER VIEW HLRNOEDGE Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 12 19 Docum
140. ds to produce three report files To run the query extraction routine type run cvmac cvmac doquery and press Return To run the BOM and tree routines enter the same command and replace the name query with the name BOM and tree All files output from in the Explicit CADDS environment are placed in the _bcd subdirectory of the CADDS create directory In this example the report files would be placed in usr2 pam parts _bcd 12 List your cvmac directory which is usr2 pam parts cvmac in this example and compare the listing with the directory listing produced in Step 1 Note the cmand dm files Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 11 23 Chapter 12 Documenting the Assembly This chapter describes how to generate HLR dimensions text labels and other annotations to document the assembly The topics are e Creating an Assembly Drawing Document e Generating HLR Using HIDE OBJECT e Generating HLR Using CADDShade II e Dimensioning and Annotating e Plotting Please note For more information see the following online books e Design and Drafting User Guide and Menu Reference e Drawing Generation Best Practices e Parametric Modeling Best Practices Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 12 1 Documenting the Assembly Creating an Assembly Drawing Document Creating an Assembly Drawing Document CAMU simplifies the design and management of projects and assemblies It als
141. e or data of the other associative mass points source mass points Select the Update All Associations icon to update all associative mass points in the active part Select the Mark Mass Points icon to highlight mass point associations by marking the entities that are associated with the selected object Select the Layer icon to move the highlighted entities onto the specified layer Select the Dissociate icon to break the association between a solid or Tsurf and its associated geometric mass point or between a merged mass point and all of its source mass points Using Merge Mass Point Options In the CAMU environment the ASSOCIATIVE modifier is available only with the ADD modifier When some of the selected Source Mass Points are viewed in anew Merged Mass Point is created without replacing the existing one To differentiate between the new and the old mass point use the MARK MPOINT UPDATE MPOINT and DISSOCIATE MPOINT commands to determine the relationships Select the Merge option on the Mass Points property sheet The property sheet changes as shown The Merge option allows you to calculate the mass properties of an object for instance the sum or difference of two or more other objects For example to calculate total weight merge the mass points of all models within an assembly 5 24 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Working in an Existing Assembly Associative Mass Points Figure 5 16 Merg
142. e Angle field e Click Apply The resultant geometry is rotated by 30 degrees at the origin of the copied component around the x axis Figure 8 23 The copied component rotated at its origin along x axis by an angle of 30 degrees Grigin ef Go pied Com ponent Rotating Incrementally To rotate the component again by an angle of 30 degrees around the same x axis click the Apply option once more on the Orientation menu The following is the resultant geometry 8 36 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Defining Assembly Geometry Moving a Component Figure 8 24 The copied component rotated incrementally at its origin along x axis by an angle of 30 degrees rigin of Copied Com po nent Follow the same procedure to rotate the component around the y and z axis about point of origin Example 2 Rotating a Component at its Origin around an Axis Defined by Specifying Two Locations Rotates the component about its origin around an axis passing through its origin and parallel to an axis defined by specifying two locations and the angle of rotation To rotate a copied component refer to Figure 8 22 about its origin Choose the appropriate option from the Orientation menu Specify 30 degrees as the angle of rotation in the Angle field Click Apply Select two points P1 and P2 to define the axis parallel to the required axis of rotation Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide
143. e Assembly Tree are e You can easily expand or collapse any parent node that has child nodes e The tree display enables you to use and understand the assembly structure with ease e The current state of a node is represented by an icon e You can right click a node for a shortcut menu with options for the node s current state The Assembly Tree Window is the default window To revert to the Assembly Structure Window set the value of the following environment variable in the caddsrc local file setenv AD_C_SERVER_ENABLED no Please note You can specify the default location and the size of the Assembly Tree Window against the CV_ASSEMBLY_GEOM in the cadds scripts templates caddsrc file For further information on this please refer the caddsrc file When you activate a new or existing assembly the assembly structure appears in a separate window In an active assembly session you can minimize this window but not close it Please note On Windows when you activate a new or existing assembly the Assembly Structure opens in a separate window which may be hidden behind the CADDS window To bring the Assembly Tree Window to the front click the Assembly Tree icon on the taskbar Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 1 11 Introduction to Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Assembly Tree Window The following figure shows an Assembly Tree Figure 1 3 Assembly Tree File Edit View O
144. e Mass Points property sheet Mass Points Insert Add Subtract Replace original mass points Associative Cancel e Choose Add to add the indicated mass points e Choose Subtract to subtract the second and subsequent mass points from the first one e Choose Replace original mass points to delete the original source mass points of the merged mass point e Choose Associative to create an association between the new merged mass point and all selected source mass points e Choose Tag and assign a name to the mass point Tag names are limited to six alphanumeric A Z 0 9 characters The new merged Mass Point is created in the active part which is typically an Adrawing This mass point is associated with the selected source mass points The source mass points are in the viewed in models Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 5 25 Working in an Existing Assembly Associative Mass Points The following example creates a mass point whose values represent the sum of two merged mass points eplace original mass points Change 1 Select the Merge option on the Mass Points property sheet 2 Choose the Add option 3 Now choose the Associative option 4 Click Apply 5 In the graphics window select the mass points that you want to merge Mew mass point created contains sum of data contained in mass points selected 6 Select Done from the Utilities menu 5 26 Concurrent Ass
145. e Restore Viewstates Property Sheet Save Restore VYiewstates Filename Jdefault assy hlr view top B Overwrite p Current default assy hlr view top default test detail assy t2 1 In the Filename field specify the name of the file in which you want to save the view state information or from which you want to restore the information The default value is the name of the current Adrawing followed by a hyphen You can either retain this default value as part of the file name or specify another file name 2 Select Current to save the file in the lt active part dir gt _bcd directory of the active part If no part is active then by default the file is saved in the _bcd directory of the active Adrawing of the active assembly If a part is active and you do not select Current the file is saved in the _bcd directory of the Default Adrawing of the active assembly 3 Alternatively select Overwrite if a file with the specified name exists and you want to overwrite it with a new one Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 10 13 4 Select if you want to save the viewstate information into the file 5 Select if you want to restore the viewstate information from the selected file You can select from the list of files where the viewstates of the current assembly are already saved in the Default Adrawing directory or the directory of the current part You can also enter the name of the file in the File
146. e Set button is unhazed Set information appears in the second column A new prompt appears SELECT set Attribute Editor Create Set Define valve SELECT s t Use different sets to assign several different attribute values to the same attribute name s in a group When you select a group set is automatically created To create additional sets select the Create Set button To remove a set select the Remove button next to the set number you want to remove 2 Select the set in which you want to add information The button is highlighted The attribute s created in the attribute group that you selected in Step 2 appear in the third column The prompt changes to SELECT definition Attribute Editor Create set Define Value SELECT definition Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 11 13 Defining Nongraphic Information for the Assembly Editing Attributes 3 Select an attribute name from the definition column The attribute selected is highlighted The Define Value button becomes unhazed and fields to define values appear in the fourth column The prompt tells you the type for the attribute you are editing Apply Create Set Define Value set Default alue Class Value Instance value Attribute Type string 4 Click the Define Value button Type the information You must press Return after entering a value 5 Select another attribute definition from
147. e adhandlepart Options on the Property Sheet The Add Component property sheet options are described below e Parent Specifies the name of the component instance to which the new component will be added The new component will become a descendent of the parent specified Type the parent name or select it from in the assembly structure using the middle mouse button e Component Specifies the class name of the component you wish to add Do not type the underscore and instance number they will be created automatically when you add the component Please note The component class name and the model name can optionally be identical However the Component class name is often used as a descriptive term while the model name represents a part number or other company specific method of naming actual CADDS parts e n Specifies the number of instances of the component class that you wish to add e Model Specifies the name of the CADDS part to associate with the component class name The part model can exist currently but does not need to The Model option is only valid when adding a new component class Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 3 11 Creating a New Assembly Adding a New Component to the Structure Please note If you wish to use the Family Member option the model name specified must be a Master model as defined using CADDS Family of Parts functionality e Revision Specifies the revision of the
148. e again to unselect the second entity You can now reselect the second entity or press the backspace key again to undo the first pick You can then reselect the first entity and then the second entity e Pressing the backspace key after the first pick undoes its selection You can now reselect the first entity or specify another modifier mate align or orient Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 6 13 Parametric Positioning Using Constrain Component Please note You can only use the backspace key to undo selection of the last pair of entities Further backspacing does not undo the constraints created earlier in the command Aborting the command undoes the creation and solution of the last constraint created in the current command line and ends the command Applying the property sheet exits the command If you have exited the command and are not satisfied with the result undo the Constrain Component command using the CAMU Undo UNDO ACOMMAND Please note Deleting constraints does not reposition components To reposition components while still active in the command use the backspace key as just described You can also abort the command To reposition components after you have exited the command use the CAMU Undo as just described Constrain Component Property Sheet Options Select the Constrain Component icon from the task set to open the Constrain Component property sheet Figure 6 3 Constrai
149. e appropriate value For the Modeling Environment group other valid settings are parametric assyparametric explicit and assyexplicit setenv CV_UI_ACT_ASSY assyparametric For the Eng Prod Environment group the valid variable settings are harness and piping For the Q A Environment group available only on Sun systems the valid variable settings are design dmis inspection and programming Refer to the following file for other related variables usr apl cadds scripts templates caddsrc CADDSASSOC_UID enables associative HLR and dimensions and ensures that associativity is properly mapped between the parametric and explicit environments It also enables parametric positioning To take advantage of these powerful capabilities set the following variable in your caddsrc local file setenv CADDSASSOC_UID yes See Updating Positions After Modeling Change on page 6 37 to see a practical application of this setting Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Configuring Concurrent Assembly Mock Up caddsrc local File Information See Using Pre Revision 8 0 CADDS Models on page 6 38 to learn what to do if you have not enabled this variable Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 2 5 Configuring Concurrent Assembly Mock Up caddsrc local File Information CV_MAX_ACTIVE_REF sets the limit on the number of active reference assemblies in an assembly session
150. e field enter the name of the attribute whose properties you want to change 3 You can change the following e Attribute name e The group with which the attribute is associated e Attribute type e Value of the default e Association of the attribute with one or all instances of a component class 11 16 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Defining Nongraphic Information for the Assembly Removing an Attribute Removing an Attribute Use Remove Attribute to delete an attribute and all its definitions in the group You must first lock the attribute and all its associated definitions AS 1 Select the Remove Attribute icon The property sheet appears Figure 11 10 Remove Attribute property sheet Remove Attribute Group bom Apply 2 Specify the group name to be removed in the Attribute Group field 3 Specify the Attribute 4 Click Apply Please note Ifa value is associated with one of the group definitions the system identifies the associated group and displays a warning message You cannot remove a group that is associated with a component Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 11 17 Defining Nongraphic Information for the Assembly Removing an Attribute Group Removing an Attribute Group To remove an attribute group and all its definitions in the group use Remove Attribute Group The attribute group and all its associated definitions must be locked 1
151. e graphics window when moving from one active model to another 5 14 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Working in an Existing Assembly Moving Between Models and Adrawings Figure 5 7 Crankshaft Assembly Changed to Front Orientation with the Piston Model Active Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 5 15 Working in an Existing Assembly Moving Between Models and Adrawings Activating a Model After Changing the View Orientation When you activate the model associated with crankshaft with the assembly viewed in the Front orientation the previously activated models conrod and piston are both suspended Figure 5 8 Graphics Window after Activating the Crankshaft Model Instance Assembly Structure Fneve crankassy_1 Fassy_1 Parana Lye rar y Fendcap 3 Sy conrod 4 After activating a new model your view of the assembly in the graphics window does not change The number of views orientation zoom scale viewed model instances view setting spaceball and mouse based dynamic view manipulation 5 16 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Working in an Existing Assembly Moving Between Models and Adrawings settings and clip model settings are identical to the view state of the assembly before you activated another model Please note When moving from one active model to another active model the view state of the assembly is preserved
152. e locked You can lock components explicitly All model instances that were visible the last time the active Adrawing was saved are viewed in the Graphics window About Adrawings An Adrawing provides a workspace on which you can view and manipulate viewed model instances An Adrawing is both a CADDS part and a drawing The Adrawing contains views that allows you to see the model space with a particular orientation and scale that you define The Purpose of Adrawings Adrawings allow you to define different views of the entire assembly subassemblies or specific components of the assembly Each assembly can have many Adrawings each with its own view state This includes location number of views orientation zoom scale and viewed model instances You can also include annotations within an Adrawing to highlight viewed geometry You can turn off the view of certain components on one Adrawing and have them turned on to another Adrawing Each Adrawing provides two different view states in which you can view the model instances of the assembly The default Standard Adrawing shows the model instances in their true or assembled position The Alternate state Exploded state allows you to view model instances at some other location and or orientation Viewing model instances in the Exploded view state does not change their true location in the assembly The Exploded view state allows you to test points of stopped motion Showing a door
153. e of the Active Adrawing 10 2 The Adrawing Provides Consistency 10 3 The Default Adrawing 10 3 Adrawings and the Alternative View State 10 3 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Contents xiii Options on the Property Sheet 10 4 Annotating the Adrawing 10 4 Obtaining Information About Adrawings 10 4 Viewing Models in Adrawings 10 5 Using Alternate Views in Your Design 10 6 Basic Steps to Create an Alternate View 10 7 The Standard View 10 7 Selecting Exploded View 10 9 In an Active Adrawing 10 9 As You Activate an Adrawing 10 9 The Exploded View 10 10 Changing an Adrawing 10 11 Deleting an Adrawing 10 12 Saving and Restoring Viewstates 10 12 Defining Nongraphic Information for the Assembly About Attributes 11 2 Attributes Task Set 11 2 Overview of Procedure to Use Attributes 11 3 Creating Attribute Groups 11 4 Associating an Attribute Group with a Component 11 5 Disassociating an Attribute Group from a Component 11 6 Listing Attribute Groups 11 7 Creating Attributes 11 8 Floating Point Numbers Editing Attributes Attribute Editor Window Locking Attributes and Attribute Groups Changing Attribute Properties 11 10 11 11 11 11 11 15 11 16 Contents xiv Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 11 17 Removing an Attribute Removing an Attribute Group 11 18 Generating Output Using Su
154. e the part associated with a component is identified as corrupt the component and all its instances are marked with character F in the Assembly Structure Any further attempt to view or activate any instance of the component is denied as long as it is marked with character F If you try to view activate this corrupt component a message appears indicating that the component is corrupt The character F on the component instance is not permanent and is valid only for the active session of the assembly Use the Change Component option to change the associated model part of the component The changed part if not found corrupt is not marked with the F character This allows you to view the model part of the component instance Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 8 23 Defining Assembly Geometry Moving a Component Moving a Component ty Ss Options from the Move Component icon provide ways to translate rotate orient or position components in the assembly Select the Move Component icon from the ASSEMBLY PAR or ASSEMBLY EXP task set The property sheet displays four icons for moving a component instance in the context of the assembly The component and its parent component must be locked You do not have to lock the associated model because you are not changing the model s geometry You are changing only the location of the component instance in the assembly Please note You ca
155. e to change the external assembly or the revision but if only the parent is to be changed it is set to a particular instance and not to all instances If you are changing an assembly in a reference assembly specify the assembly instance name in the Reference field 7 26 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Changing the Assembly Structure Changing a Reference Assembly In the example the user has changed the name of the reference assembly from handle to grip Assembly Structure BEFORE handle_1 wheel 1F axle_1 wagon t frame _1 vheel 2 Assembly Structure xa axle 1 i ETLE Please note You do not need to activate the referenced assembly to perform this change Editing an External Assembly To perform modification in a reference assembly the reference assembly must be activated The first time you lock a component in a reference assembly the assembly instance root component of referenced assembly is automatically locked and activated Once the assembly is active it becomes a concurrent assembly Everyone else active in the same assembly can see other concurrent changes through the Refresh Assembly capability Everyone can establish locks on components to prevent modifications by others By default three reference assemblies can be active at the same time in an assembly session Use the CV_MAX_ACTIVE_REF variable to set the maximum number of active reference assembl
156. ections from the FILE Icon 4 4 Filing or Quitting Selected Adrawings or Models 4 6 Filing with Options 4 6 Filing the Active Model Only 4 7 Quitting with Options 4 8 Working in an Existing Assembly Activating the Main Assembly 5 2 Viewing Model Geometry 5 5 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Contents vii About Adrawings 5 5 The Purpose of Adrawings 5 5 Clarifying Terms 5 6 Moving Between Models and Adrawings 5 7 What You See in the Graphics Window 5 7 DDRAW 5 7 MDRAW 5 7 ERASE ENTITY Design Restriction 5 8 Moving to a New Adrawing or New Model 5 8 Moving to a Suspended Model 5 9 Moving to a Suspended Adrawing 5 9 Understanding the Suspension Buffer 5 9 Filing an Active Model That Is in History Replay Mode 5 9 Examples of Moving Between Adrawings and Models__ 5 10 Activating the Assembly and an Existing Adrawing 5 10 Activating a Model While Active in an Adrawing 5 11 Moving from One Active Model to Another 5 13 Moving from an Active Model to an Active Adrawing 5 17 Activating a New Adrawing 5 18 Moving from a New Adrawing to an Existing Adrawing ___ 5 21 Visual Changes When Activating Parametric Models__ 5 21 Associative Mass Points 5 22 Using the Associative Mass Points Option 5 23 Using Merge Mass Point Options 5 24 Several Users Can Work Concurrently 5 27 Determining Status in
157. ed component see Determining What to Lock on page 5 32 You can Change the name of a component Change the instance name of a component Assign the component to a different parent Change the model with which the component is associated or remove the association between the model and the component Associate the component to a different mode based on revision name for example change a model association from abx8020 a to abx8020 b or remove the revision number Please note Ifyou have issued Select Assemble On see Automatic Assembly on page 6 32 all parametric positioning constraints are solved when you change a component Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Changing the Assembly Structure Changing a Component Steps to Change a Component Follow these steps to change a component 1 Choose the CHANGE COMPONENT option from the COMP ASSY task set or select a component from the Assembly structure 2 Choose CHANGE COMPONENT from the popup menu in the Assembly Structure window The CHANGE COMPONENT property sheet appears Change Component f Reference Component Component Instance Wheel 221 ieyra New Cowporent New Component Instance Model H eee E No Model Revision I fT No Revision Ho Retain If you are changing a component in a reference assembly specify input in the Reference column If you are changing a component in the main asse
158. ee the CVMAC Language Reference Manual 1 Compile the files found in the appropriate subdirectory using the CVMAC command CVMCOMP For example cvmcomp getvalue 2 Make a link file to create the executable program A sample link file for the query program is shown below E users xxx cvmac query IN usr apl cadds data am supplements query KM usr apl cadds data am supplements query addvalue KM usr apl cadds data am supplements query askuser KM usr apl cadds data am supplements query compare KM usr apl cadds data am supplements query display KM usr apl cadds data am supplements query gettree NKM usr apl cadds data am supplements query getvalue KM usr apl cadds data am supplements query has attr K e K e K e K e e 2 2 2 2 222 2 z z M usr apl cadds data am supplements query prntpage M usr apl cadds data am supplements query convert M usr apl cadds data am supplements query header INKM usr apl cadds data am supplements query findcomp NKM usr apl cadds data am supplements query getattr NDLINK 3 Link the files with the link file to make the executable using the CVMAC command CVMLINK The executable is the file specified by the IMAGE statement in the link file For example Be Pe rena ae nah oe crn Biota lains oy 2 P P P PPPBPPDPPPBPP P n ea cvmlink users xxx cvmac linkfile 4 In CADDS issue the command RUN CVMAC lt filename gt where filename inc
159. eet or template icon The icons on the property sheet allow you to select standard sheet sizes with or without predefined views Choose nonstandard sheet sizes without predefined views or select from a list of templates Templates save time if you have to create an Adrawing similar to the one that already exists To activate a new Adrawing and select other modeler options access the assembly by activating an existing Adrawing Then activate an Adrawing from the assembly 9 Click Apply While activating an assembly please note the following e You can activate and edit a reference assembly from the active main assembly by locking a child component of the associated assembly instance The act of locking any child of a reference assembly instance activates the associated assembly database _db You can list all active and non active reference assemblies see Listing Reference Assemblies on page 7 39 The Modify Position Constraints menu may appear when you activate an existing assembly see Modify Position Constraints on page 6 17 To hasten assembly activation time activate an Adrawing such as default or some other agreed upon name that contains no viewed components or geometry Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Working in an Existing Assembly Viewing Model Geometry Viewing Model Geometry When you activate an existing assembly none of the components or associated models ar
160. eference cam erabody 1 The sub assembly bxdy_1 is converted to reference assembly cam era body The camera body _db file is created No Adrawings are copied or created for the new assembly 3 34 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Creating a New Assembly Creating a New Assembly by Exporting Exporting a Reference Assembly You can create a duplicate of a reference assembly as a new name from the active main or reference assembly 1 Activate an assembly In this example the active main assembly is camera _db and the active Adrawing is default camera body 1 camera 2 Select the assembly instance root component of the desired reference assembly to export In this example select camera body_1 3 Open the Export Assembly property sheet The selected assembly instance name appears in the Reference field 4 Specify a new assembly name in the Export Name field In this example the new assembly name is camera body v2 5 Do not enable the Convert Reference option Please note The Convert Reference option is ignored when the source component is a reference assembly instance 6 Apply the property sheet A new assembly camera body v2 is created It is exactly the same as the camera body assembly Please note See also Example Exporting with Referencing on page 3 33 Exporting the Active Assembly You can create a new assembly database that is identical to the
161. eference Changing the Assembly Structure Reordering a Component 5 Click Apply The component specified in step 3 is placed above the component specified in step 4 Reorder Component Reference Component i piston assy_t Component Instance krankshaft_i If you are specifying a Component in a reference assembly specify the assembly instance name in the Reference field Placing a Component above Another in a Reference Assembly 3 To place a component above a sibling component in a reference assembly do the following 1 Activate the reference assembly in the main assembly by locking any one of its children components 2 Open the REORDER COMPONENT property sheet 3 Select the Above icon on the property sheet 4 Using the left mouse button select the component instance you want to reposition Its name appears in the Component field in the Component Instance row Its parent assembly instance name appears in the Reference field in the Component Instance row 5 Using the middle mouse button select the component instance you want to place it above Its name appears in the Component field in the Above row Its parent assembly instance name appears in the Reference field in the Above row 6 Click Apply The component specified in step 4 is placed above the component specified in step 5 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 7 33 Changing the Assembly Structure Reorderin
162. eferred to as a node It represents either a piece part subassembly or an assembly Component class A unique name assigned to a component Multiple instances of a component class can exist in the assembly structure Operations performed on a member of a component class are reflected in all other instances of that class both in the structure and the model representation of the class Component instance One single occurrence of a component class Drawing A workspace that supports any number of views and that contain various annotation items such as dimensions hatch text etc Drawings reside within a part database A CADDS part can contain many drawing files See Part Glossary 2 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Glossary Explicit Graphics File gr A file that stores the drawing and model graphics data along with the tessellation data The _gr file allows you to see a part s graphics in the active drawing Get The act of moving a copy of a file from a central database management repository such as Optegra Vault to your local disk HLR Acronym for hidden line representation HLR is created and manipulated using the HIDE OBJECT UNHIDE OBJECT and UPDATE HLRIMAGE Explicit commands LDM See Local Data Manager Leaf node A component that has no children Leaf components are those typically associated to CADDS piece parts Local data manager Start up screen that appears when you
163. eling environment Explicit or Parametric and task set in which to work When a model is activated the view is inherited from the Adrawing you were in when you selected Activate Model 5 Define or revise model geometry using the same procedures as when you activate a part in the CADDS Parametric or Explicit modeling environments For more information see the Parametric Modeling User Guide and Menu Reference and the Explicit Modeling User Guide and Menu Reference Using a Source Model to Create a New Model You can use the Insert Ppart command to create a new parametric model target using some or all of the geometry in an existing parametric model source You can also use the Update Ppart and Dissociate Ppart commands Insert Ppart enables the following scenarios e Multiple designers can work independently on different sections of the same piece part They can then merge these parts together into one parametric model e The same parametric part can be used to define or drive both a finished part and the manufacturing counterpart for example mold cavity used to create it 8 4 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Defining Assembly Geometry Working on Model Geometry For example a forging model is created Additional operations must then be performed on the model to generate a machined part Any modifications to the forging must be propagated to the machined part pa we Associativity between
164. elonging to piston assy_2 and piston assy_3 respectively e Between H1 and H2 belonging to piston assy_1 and piston assy_4 respectively The constraint between holes H1 and H2 is an align with an offset value The other two constraints have offset zero The offset value between H1 and H2 is incorrect The assembly will not solve because this error creates an inconsistently overconstrained assembly 1 Solve the constraint The following output appears in the Modify Position Constraints menu Align piston assy 1 piston assy 4 Cremonstained Align piston assy z piston assy 3 Cwemeonstrainead Align piston assy 1 piston assy 4 Cremonstra ined 2 Select the assembly from the runtime list 3 Select any of the constraints in the list to see the underlying geometry highlight in the graphics window Please note Highlighting helps you distinguish between constraints and see constrained geometry pairs You can easily see and delete unwanted or redundant constraints 4 Resolve the conflict and solve the system either by correcting the offset or removing the align constraint between P1 and P4 sample Procedure for Creating Constraints In this example we will create a mating constraint between the connecting rod and endcap in the piston subassembly 1 Lock all affected components 2 Display one of the piston subassemblies in the sample crankshaft assembly y piston piston assy_1 vV conrod_
165. emblies is reached Please note Before you can issue this command you must file the active main assembly This commits the changes you have made to the active reference assembly s 1 Choose File gt Quit Reference from the top bar This opens the Quit Reference property sheet 2 Specify the desired reference assembly in the Reference field Understanding System Messages If you attempt to deactivate an inactive reference assembly following message appears ERROR You can t deactivate an inactive assembly When the assembly has modifications that have not yet been committed following message appears ERROR The assembly tname still has changes that have not been committed yet Please use the FILE ASSEMBLY command to file the changes Filing All Active Assemblies The FILE ASSEMBLY command files the active main assembly and all active reference assemblies Filing and Locking Interactivity Regular locks LOCK COMPONENT remain when you file the assembly See Locking Areas of the Structure on page 5 32 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 4 3 Filing an Assembly Filing Your Changes Filing Assembly Structure Default Adrawing and Root Node Model The active main assembly all active reference assemblies the default Adrawing and the root node model are filed with the FILE ASSEMBLY option Click FILE ASSEMBLY or click FILE ASSEMBLY W OPTIONS and then select the
166. embly or any reference assembly within it with a new name by exporting the root component of the active main assembly or the assembly instance of a reference assembly You can maintain different versions of the same assembly by saving the assembly with different revisions To export an assembly proceed as follows 1 Choose the Export Assembly option from the COMP ASSY task set The Export Assembly property sheet appears Figure 3 9 Export Assembly Property Sheet EXPORT ASSEMBLY Reference Component Component Instance jc Export Name Revision x Convert Reference Adraving No 7 All Name a Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 3 31 Creating a New Assembly Creating a New Assembly by Exporting 2 Choose the Component from the active or reference assembly to be exported as a new assembly Or enter the component name in the Component Instance field 3 Enter the name for the exported assembly in the Export Name field 4 Specify the revision of the assembly in the Revision field if the same assembly is to be saved with a different revision 5 Specify the Adrawings associated with the selected assembly that you want to copy to the exported assembly Choose one of the following options to select the Adrawings e No To not copy any of the Adrawings to the exported assembly If you do not select an Adrawing the No option is checked by default e All To c
167. embly see ODB Object Data Base Administration Tool on page 2 19 before proceeding 3 Remove LOCK and TEMP files for e All suspended models e All suspended Adrawings e The active part Adrawing or model e The active assembly database e All models that you locked LOCK COMPONENT using the MODEL option 4 Remove all files in each applicable vp_links directory Please note Junk files will be in the vp_links subdirectory of each model that was viewed VIEW COMPONENT at the time of the abnormal shutdown Delete the files not the vp_links directory itself 5 Kill the ODB_SERVER process associated with the assembly using a straight kill command e Make sure you Do not use kill 9 This can corrupt the assembly Do not kill the ODB_SERVER process if anyone is still in the assembly Only kill the ODB_SERVER process that belongs to the hung assembly Use aps command such as ps ef to see both the process ID and the assembly name associated with the process 6 Kill the CALLBACK_SERVER processes There will be a CALLBACK_SERVER process for each reference assembly that was active when the abnormal shutdown occurred Please note The slay script may kill CALLBACK_SERVER processes Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 2 25 Configuring Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Data Management 2 26 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Chapter 3 Creating a New Assembly This chapter
168. embly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Working in an Existing Assembly Several Users Can Work Concurrently several Users Can Work Concurrently A critical and central feature of CAMU is its ability to enable multiple users to work simultaneously on the same assembly database _db Several users can work on the same assembly at the same time You must lock the component s on which you want to work Locking is central to the concurrent assembly design process see Locking Components Attribute Groups and Models on page 5 31 Please note To configure the system for multiuser operation see Chapter 2 Configuring Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Determining Status in Multiuser CAMU VERIFY OBJECT displays whether the component is active or suspended and if so by which user LIST ADRAWINGS display the details of Adrawings in the assembly including which user has write permissions to a particular Adrawing The CAMU Status window states the name of the selected component its associated model name the name of the user who has locked the component and its status inactive active or suspended Updating Your Session File or refresh the active main assembly to see changes that other users have made and filed in their CAMU session This also updates associative dimensions in the assembly See Chapter 4 Filing an Assembly and Refreshing the Main Assembly on page 5 36 for more information See Updating
169. ender icon paintbrush from the top bar 2 Choose Hidden Line Removal from the pulldown menu The Hidden Line Removal command palette appears 3 Select the Remove Hidden Lines icon from the palette Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 12 7 Documenting the Assembly Generating HLR Using HIDE OBJECT The Remove Hidden Lines property sheet appears as follows Figure 12 1 Remove Hidden Lines Property Sheet Remove Hidden Lines Engine ete Selection Method Image Details 12 8 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Documenting the Assembly Generating HLR Using HIDE OBJECT The following steps describe the options available to you for removing the hidden lines 1 Select the engine that you want to use to remove the hidden lines e Faceted to use the Faceted engine e Analytical to use the Analytical engine Please note are identical in function While using the Faceted engine you can interrupt the HLR operation by pressing ESC Q while the HIDE OBJECT FACETED command is running All options and modifiers common to the Faceted and Analytical engine 2 Select Quality to view the controls related to the quality of the results of HLR The Faceted and Analytical modes of the Remove Hidden Lines menu appear as shown respectively Figure 12 3 Quality Option in Faceted and Analytical Mode Remove Hidden Lines Engine __ Faceted analytical
170. ent Since the View and Position option was not selected when the components were added to the assembly these components appear at their original locations 4 Choose the Move Component option from the COMP ASSY task set The Move Component property sheet appears 5 In the Component Instance field type in the component name whee1_1 6 Click Apply 7 At the prompt specify a model location for example Model loc X0Y0Z0 ORG d1 The figure below shows the whee1_1 component after translation 8 26 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Defining Assembly Geometry Moving a Component 8 View the component wheel_2 The component is viewed at its default MSO location To properly locate wheel_2 you can also use the Orient Component option see Alternative Procedure for Orienting and Positioning wheel_2 on page 8 28 9 Select the Move Component and Rotate component icons from the property sheet Click the AZ button and type 180 This rotates the wnee1_2 component 180 around the Z axis Click Apply A prompt appears for you to define the center of rotation AZ 180 MODEL loc 10 Enter orientation modifiers or freehand locate to define model location In the example you can enter the following at the prompt Az 180 MODEL loc X0Y0Z0 11 In the figure below whee1_2 has rotated 180 degrees about the Z axis using XOYOZO its initial origin position as the center of rotation
171. ent The Lock Component command can lock components in a reference assembly to establish the right to modify those components The Subassembly option will lock the selected component and its children until the first reference instance see Changing a Reference Assembly on page 7 25 Model Locks the model associated with the named Component If you have also specified the Subassembly option it locks all models associated with the subassembly Please note The Model option is not required to lock the component and activate the model associated with it It prevents other users from activating the associated model and filing any changes made to it including users who are not working in your assembly Using this option places a LOCK and TEMP file in the associated model s subdirectory Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 5 33 Working in an Existing Assembly Locking Components Attribute Groups and Models Reference Root Node Also Locks the root node of the reference assembly Activating a Reference Assembly The first time you lock any component within a reference assembly the reference assembly is automatically activated see Editing an External Assembly on page 7 27 You can activate and save the changes made to the reference assembly without quitting the main assembly The root node of the reference assembly and the reference instance are represented by the same node in the main assembly
172. ent align with each other ALIGN conducts a translation and rotation of the component allowing for possible translation in three axes and rotation in two axes Coincident points The system reorients the first component so that the first points selected on each component 1 and 3 are coincident Alignment of axes The system aligns the axes defined by the first and second points respectively on each component ADJUST lt loc gt lt loc gt lt loc gt lt loc gt lt loc gt lt loc gt Adjusts the plane of the selected component with the plane of another component defined by two sets of three locations each so that the first and fourth locations are coincident It conducts a full rigid transformation of the component allowing possible translation and rotation in all three axes Requirement Define the mating plane with three locations on the component you want to align then provide three locations on the component with which you want to align the first component Utilities for Positioning When adding multiple components select a layer to view each component on a different layer e Layer Utilities You can view component model instances on different layers using Add and Position Component Specify the layer before you locate the instance If you do not specify a layer the model geometry associated with the component instance views on the same layer on which it resides at the piece part level Utility Construction Pl
173. enter commands in the Text window Some icons perform the functions of one or more commands To list the commands incorporated in a particular icon move the cursor over the icon and press the HELP key The resultant screen shows a menu listing all commands represented by the icon Use online command help to get information on the desired command Assist Lines The assist line provides brief on screen help It appears by default unless specified otherwise in the caddsrc or caddsrc local file If not select Assistance from the Information Access icon i at the upper left of the screen An assist line appears in the bottom portion of the screen As you move the cursor over each icon a description of the icon s function appears in the assist line Using Online Command Help Online information for a specific function is available from the Information Access icon on the top bar menu Select COMMAND HELP The system displays a property sheet containing two lists e Subject Verb Noun Command Help rH Verb Moun AD Commands S Activate Adravring All Commands a Activate Assembly Adrave ings I Activate Model Assemblies Add Assembly Attributes Add Component Constraints Associate Agroup Components Change Adraving Models mA Change Assembly Cancel Based on your choice from the Subject list the Verb Noun list displays the commands related to the chosen subject area The default Subject Verb Noun list display is All Commands
174. enting the Assembly Generating HLR Using CADDShade CADOS Picture VWindovy For more information refer to the CADDSHADE IT User Guide 12 20 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Documenting the Assembly Dimensioning and Annotating Dimensioning and Annotating You can create associative annotation in an Adrawing of the following types e Hidden line representation HLR e Dimensions e Hatch e Sections This section describes how to create dimensions to viewed model geometry and HLR in the active Adrawing It does not discuss the variety of dimensioning styles and detailing options available within CADDS For more information about CADDS detailing options see the Design and Drafting User Guide and Menu Reference View orientation has been changed to orthographic front for the wheel assembly The wheel_1 wheel_2 and axle_1 component instances are viewed on Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 12 21 Documenting the Assembly Dimensioning and Annotating Associative HLR has been generated Inserting Dimensions and Annotation You can insert associative dimensions and labels text and other annotation to describe viewed model geometry in the active Adrawing When the viewed model geometry to which you have dimensioned is modified or moved the associative dimensions update accordingly You can associatively dimension to HLR geometry This specifically perta
175. enu Reference In the Parametric environment of Concurrent Assembly Mock Up you can establish constraint relationships between variables in different models in the same assembly You define variables and establish their relationships using methods similar to those you would use from the CADDS Parametric modeling environment without Concurrent Assembly Mock Up All the Constraints icons are available to you However the Constraints task set in CAMU has additional icons that allow you to constrain between models in your assembly Please note Interpart constraints described in this chapter and parametric positioning described in Chapter 6 Parametric Positioning are two separate and distinct means of using parametrization in an assembly They are two different systems Basic Steps to Use Constraints in an Assembly The following steps give an overview of how to constrain between models in your active assembly 1 Activate the assembly in the Parametric environment 2 Activate a model and assign a variable to each parameter you want to relate to a parameter in another model of the assembly 3 Export the variable s in the model you want to relate to parameters of another model in your assembly 4 Activate the other model Assign a variable to each parameter as you did in the first model 5 Export the variable s of the second model that you want to relate to the variable s you exported from the first model 6 To cons
176. enu sequence Adrawing gt Drawing gt Activate New or Activate Old Once active in the drawing define views as you normally do when creating Explicit detail drawings For example define a Front view and fold a Top and Right view from it Insert associative dimensions and so on Please note All models that were visible VIEW COMPONET in the previously active part model or Adrawing are presently visible To display only Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 12 25 Documenting the Assembly Dimensioning and Annotating the model geometry that is physically resident in the active part unview VIEW COMPONENT the entire assembly structure 12 26 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Documenting the Assembly Plotting Plotting You can plot the contents of the Graphics window You can also plot the contents of the Assembly Structure window Plotting the CADDS Graphics Window You can plot the contents of the CADDS Graphics window to a dot matrix laser or electrostatic printer or plotter 1 Select Adrawing from the top bar 2 Select Plot from the resultant pulldown menu ADRAW ING VIEW ACTIVATE MEW ACTIVATE OLD CHANGE DELETE TOGGLE EXPLOOED DELETE EXPLOOED ADDER es SAVE RESTORE VIEWSTATES Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 12 27 Documenting the Assembly Plotting The Plot Drawing property sheet a
177. eometry in a model associated with a subassembly component non leaf node This is a useful way of showing the space that a subassembly requires in the assembly without showing all the detail of the piece parts in that subassembly It can be used to simplify the display of the component s leaf nodes or child components If you want to use this technique activate a model associated with a subassembly node and build the geometry Example of Using Outline Geometry Technique The examples that follow use a barbe11 assembly to illustrate how to display outline and or detail geometry using the View Unview Component property sheet The first figure shows the barbe11 assembly and the geometry associated with its components The figures show the assembly with the results of specifying the following on the View Unview Component property sheet e Outline View and Detail Unview e Outline Unview and Detail View e Outline View and Detail View The left side of the figure shows the barbe11 assembly structure The right side shows the graphics for each component s associated model These figures are not an accurate representation of the CADDS Graphics window 8 20 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Defining Assembly Geometry Viewing a Component s Associated Model Geometry Figure 8 17 barbell Assembly and Associated Model Geometry Model associated with barbell assembly Structure weight 1 and weight_2
178. er model Options on the Property Sheet on page 3 11 Please note When orienting components that have no associated CADDS model the following message appears in the Text window For example you may want to orient a subassembly whose parent component has no associated model WARNING The model part partname does not exist You are now using the handlepart 3 8 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Creating a New Assembly Adding a New Component to the Structure Adding a New Component to the Structure You can add one or more instances of a component using the icon from the Component Assembly task set or by choosing the Add Component option from the Assembly Structure window pulldown menu You can view and position the component in the graphics window A sample Add Component task is illustrated below See page 3 11 to learn more about each property sheet option 1 Choose the Add Component option from the Component Assembly task set The Add Component property sheet appears 2 Select the desired parent component from the assembly structure to automatically enter its name in the Parent field on the Add Component property sheet OR 3 Select the parent component to which you will add the new component Select the parent component from in the assembly structure 4 Press and hold the right mouse button and choose Add Component from the resultant pulldown menu The Add Component property shee
179. es databases e All NC toolpaths model_name jcf e All model specific CVMAC routines CADDS Drawing Files All the CADDS drawing and model graphics information is stored in the explicit graphics file _gr The _gr file is subordinate to the CADDS part model that was active at the time you issued the ACTIVATE DRAWING command You must consider archiving the _gr file of each model in your assembly when you archive the assembly and its models so that you can view the component in CAMU Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 2 23 Configuring Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Data Management Please note Whenever you activate and save a part the size of the explicit graphics file _gr file may increase or decrease by up to 1 The information in the file is restructured or reordered every time you save the part This is an expected behavior when compressed data is read from and written to a file If the _gr file of your model is missing the VIEW COMPONENT command dynamically generates the graphics data for that model by reading the _pd file of that model However this can adversely impact the performance of the VIEW COMPONENT command Additionally to view the model in any of the shade or HLR rendering modes the _gr file must contain the tessellated data for the solid or surface geometry in that part To create the tessellated data in the _gr file activate the part in the Explicit environment run the Render View or
180. ess or writing to the parent databases during filing operations To achieve optimum performance of a CAMU multi user configuration set the DB_DAEMON_HOST on a fileserver type system that also contains the common assembly directory and assembly library parts directory NFS Network File System Prerequisites For remote NFS mounts each user s local system mount point to a common assembly directory on a remote system must be the same on all systems The absolute path name of an assembly must be the same for all users who concurrently access that same assembly Example The common assembly directory exists on system server as usr2 parts assys The local systems have to mount server usr2 parts assys from the same mount point directory for example mount server usr2 parts assys Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 2 9 Configuring Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Configuring Multi User CAMU Or the local systems can use a mount point that is not necessarily the same directory name as the server s file system mount server usr2 parts assys users assyparts As long as the mount points on all the local systems accessing the common assembly directory are identical users configured for multi user CAMU can concurrently access the assembly databases If the server s assembly directory is accessed from different mount points on the network although the assembly database is accessible through different
181. et Activate Assembly LDM Add Assembly Add Assembly Copy Component Copy Component Constrain Component Constrain Component Orient Component Move Component Position Component Move Component Refresh Assembly side bar Refresh icon Rotate Component Move Component Translate Component Move Component This method is suggested Manual Request to Assemble In case you have used the Select Assemble Off command use the Assemble Component command to assemble all the child components of the selected parent component The components are assembled by solving their parametric positioning constraints and are placed at their newly computed positions orientations Please note A subassembly can be assembled without locking anything 6 32 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Parametric Positioning Solving Parametric Positioning Constraints Base Component The base component is the one with respect to which all other components are positioned It is used as a datum in order to assemble the children of the selected parent component together It remains fixed when the constraints are solved There can be only one base component for each subassembly for which parametric positioning has been defined Base component behavior is described below e Each component subassembly can have only one base component e A base component is specific t
182. et ERROR This assembly is being crea It cannot be activated until it ha ERROR Errors have occurred in the ERROR There is a problem activati name gt ERROR Errors have occurred in the Assembly Design Version 2 0 Activating Assembly Design Enviro You have to reissue ACTIVATE ASSEM ted by another user s been filed warehouse process ng the assembly tree lt assembly BLY warehouse process nment Command only valid while there is an active part Command only valid while there is an active part To resolve these errors the user who originally activated the assembly must file the assembly e The following message is displayed when you activate an assembly using the DEFAULT Adrawing or any Adrawing another user The Adrawing is activated Activating OLD part This is a CADDS5 DESIGN The file is in use that has already been activated by for read access only Part is activated but may not be filed under this name The Assembly Drawing is read only Please note If graphics are not visible for all of the components check the following conditions e If in the Parametric environment are all layers echoed e Is there a view defined for the active Adrawing e Does the model have a current explicit graphics file _gr If not either run update_gr or activate the model in the Explicit environment run the Render View or Change Renderview command wi
183. ettree usr2 pam parts cvmac getvalue usr2 pam parts cvmac has attr usr2 pam parts cvmac prntpage usr2 pam parts cvmac convert usr2 pam parts cvmac header usr2 pam parts cvmac findcomp usr2 pam parts cvmac getattr NK s sS s Ss s s z i a EE ea Bes P athe EA Eee ve SSsssesasgass s T RPHHHHHHHHEH UO Ea Q 6 Link the 1inkquery file with the compiled files to make the executable query routine as shown in the example below pwd usr2 pam parts cvmac cvmlink linkquery lt cr gt 7 Repeat Step 5 to write a link file for both the Bom and the tree routines Use the file name BOM in place of the file name query and again for the file name tree 8 Repeat Step 6 to link the 1inkBoM and the linktree files with their compiled files to make the executable BOM and tree routines 11 22 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Defining Nongraphic Information for the Assembly Generating Output Using Supplied CVMACs 9 The executable files query BOM and tree are now ready to use Be sure to change your CADDS create directory to its original state In this example the create directory would be reset to usr2 pam parts 10 After assigning attributes file the assembly and perform the data extraction routines while you are active in the assembly 11 Based on the example shown in this section type the following CADDS Explicit comman
184. ev Assembly and Gdravire EXIT CADOS Oo R Message You can toggle between Assemblies mode and Parts mode by selecting LDM MODE on the top menu bar 1 4 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Introduction to Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Windows Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Windows CAMU provides you with windows to look at the logical structure of assembly models associated with your assembly in the graphics window and to input CADDS or CAMU commands Icons in task sets are similar to those within the CADDS Explicit and Parametric environments Overview of CAMU Windows CAMU uses several windows to display specific types of information A description and sample are given below CADDS Graphics window In this window you build and view model of your assembly and its component subassemblies or piece parts or both Explicit Text window or Parametric Command message line This window displays the CADDS commands that are run using various icons and property sheets It also contains command specific prompts and messages such as error messages For the list of the most common errors and their solutions refer to the section Error Messages in Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Best Practices CADDS Expanded Message Buffer This is the standard parametric environment option that expands the Command Message line history Assembly Structure Window This window shows the logical
185. exploded state The term Exploded View is somewhat misleading In the alternate or exploded view state it is the position viewed model instances that are affected not view scale orientation and so forth The actual positions of the components in the assembly do not change regardless of how you display them in the exploded view You can use alternate views to isolate parts separate parts for clarity create an exploded view and use them with Hide and Plot commands to produce an image For example you can display different operational states In a car design you can show the door open in the exploded view and closed in the standard view In the exploded view you can move each component as you wish to establish its position see Moving a Component on page 8 24 for more information Note the following differences between the standard and exploded view states e Instances of a class can have different Exploded view positions and orientations e Component instances of a reference assembly can be positioned and oriented in the exploded view e When you reposition or orient subassembly components in the exploded view the descendants are also repositioned oriented Please note When you are moving components that have no associated CADDS models the following message appears in the Text window WARNING The model part PISTON ASSY does not exist You are now using the handlepart 10 6 Concurrent Asse
186. f an assembly If you are in the history replay mode of an active model and try to activate another model or Adrawing the following menu is displayed Fileoption for Replay Edits Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 5 9 Working in an Existing Assembly Moving Between Models and Adrawings You can choose from the following options e File Saves the results of an edited or incomplete history replay session to the model database by filing the model The results are stored in the _fd edt file of the part database e Quit Quits the history replay mode while retaining the part database files The_fd edt file is also retained if it exists e Remove Deletes the existing _fd edt file from the part database and quits the active model Examples of Moving Between Adrawings and Models The examples that follow demonstrate what happens in both the Assembly Structure window and in the CADDS Graphics window when you move between Adrawings and models e Activating the Assembly and an Existing Adrawing e Activating a Model While Active in an Adrawing e Moving from One Active Model to Another e Moving from an Active Model to an Active Adrawing e Activating a New Adrawing e Moving from a New Adrawing to an Existing Adrawing Activating the Assembly and an Existing Adrawing When you activate an existing assembly named new crankassy and activate an existing Adrawing in which the view state is already define
187. ference assembly that exists within a parent reference assembly See Component Node switching The process of changing from an active adrawing or model part to another Adrawing or model part in an assembly design session This facility helps in modeling individual parts while referencing the geometry of other components of the assembly Parent component A component that represents a subassembly also called a subassembly node A parent component must have a child component and it can be a child of a higher level component Glossary 4 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Glossary Part A CADDS database that contains graphic and nongraphic information any number of drawings and any number of views on those drawings See also Model Product structure See Assembly structure Put The act of moving a file from your local disk to a central database management repository such as Optegra Vault Read only disk This houses work in progress assemblies and models available for concurrent viewing of project data Any part which is checked out to your local disk and filed from the menus is copied to this disk to allow other users access to view this part or Assembly Reference assembly The Assembly that is created through the Add Assembly reference command See Assembly instance Reference instance The root component of a reference assembly Also called an Assembly instance Accessed using
188. for running CAMU Please note To customize your environment create a caddsrc local file in your home directory and add these variables You can copy the template version into your home directory as caddsrc local and modify it to contain only the custom settings DB_DAEMON_HOST specifies the target system on which the CAMU database server ODB_SERVER runs For multi user configurations each user needs to connect to a common database server By default ODB_SERVER runs on your local machine machine_name setenv DB DAEMON _HOST machine_name ODB_am_wh sets the name of ODB database server to ODB_SERVER setenv ODB_am_wh usr apl cadds bin ODB_SERVER CV_ASSEMBLY_PACKAGE sets the default assembly package to either CAMU or PMD You must set this variable to access the CAMU environment setenv CV_ASSEMBLY PACKAGE camu CADDSENABVP enables disables the automatic creation of a vp_links directory for each new part It should be set to yes when you use CAMU setenv CADDSENABVP yes CV_ASSEMBLY_HANDLE_PART allows you to manipulate the position of a component that is not associated with a part model using the ORIENT COMPONENT TRANSLATE COMPONENT and ROTATE COMPONENT commands For specific information on creating the default part see usr apl cadds data am supplements README_1 The default part is listed but any user can override it to access any existing part You can access the default part using the CVPATH or using a f
189. from those entities that lie within or cross the selected view boundaries This option has the following modifiers e In Removes hidden lines from entities inside the view clip volume e Cross Removes hidden lines from entities that cross the view clip volume Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 12 11 Documenting the Assembly Generating HLR Using HIDE OBJECT In and Cross Select both the options to remove hidden lines from the entities that lie within and cross the selected view boundaries Alternatively perform the same operation by clearing the In and Cross options Choose the Mark Include option to remove hidden lines from marked entities only Choose the Mark Exclude option to remove hidden lines from unmarked entities only Choose Select Graphically to remove hidden lines from the objects that you select graphically Select Specify Objects to remove hidden lines from all the entities of a specified type You can choose one of the following entities Solid Entities Removes hidden lines from all visible solid entities Surface Entities Removes hidden lines from all visible surface entities Curve Entities Removes hidden lines from all curved entities AEC Entities Removes hidden lines from all visible AEC entities 4 Select Image Details to view the related controls These controls are common for both Faceted and Analytical modes Figure 12 5 Image Details Options Remove Hidden Lines
190. g Constrain Component 6 13 Constrain Component Property Sheet Options 6 14 Changing Offset Value 6 19 Deleting a Constraint 6 20 Accessing Modify Position Constraints Menu 6 20 Example Deleting Invalid Constraints 6 20 Color Scheme 6 21 Example Isolate Constraint Problems 6 21 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Contents ix Sample Procedure for Creating Constraints Example Variant 1 Example Variant 2 Solving Parametric Positioning Constraints Automatic Assembly Manual Request to Assemble Base Component Designating a Base Component Redesignating a Base Component Recognizing Full Constraints Status Fully Constrained Assembly Underconstrained Assembly Overconstrained Assembly Changing Positioning Constraints Updating Positions After Modeling Change Using Pre Revision 8 0 CADDS Models CADDSASSOC_UID Parametric Positioning and Adrawings Exploded View State Changing the Assembly Structure Ways to Change the Assembly Structure 6 22 6 28 6 30 6 32 6 32 6 32 6 33 6 34 6 35 6 35 6 35 6 35 6 35 6 36 6 37 6 38 6 38 6 39 6 39 7 2 Changes You Can Make to the Assembly Structure Changing the Appearance of the Structure Obtaining Information about the Structure 7 2 7 3 7 3 Changing a Component 7 4 Steps to Change a Component 7 5 Changing a Component Name Can Create a New
191. g a Component Placing a Component below Another Component To place a component below a sibling component in the structure access the REORDER COMPONENT property sheet Select the Below icon Fill in the fields as appropriate For reference see Placing a Component above Another in the Main Assembly on page 7 32 or Placing a Component above Another in a Reference Assembly on page 7 33 7 34 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Changing the Assembly Structure Obtaining Information about Components Obtaining Information about Components You can obtain information about a component in two key ways e Using the CAMU Status Window e Using the Verify Object Function Using the CAMU Status Window The CAMU Status window appears above the Assembly Structure window When you select a component in the assembly structure the Status window is updated to display the following information e Selected component instance name e Name of the user who has locked the component e Associated model name and revision e Associated model status active suspended or inactive The CAMU Status window is as shown CAMO STATUS WINDOW Component Instance axle_t Locked By KADAM PARTS AXLE Model USERS R Revision Status Not Active You can close the status window by clicking the Cancel option on the window To launch the CAMU Status window select the CAMU Status Window option from the Information
192. g reasons e User does not have correct permission to the create directory or existing assembly e Problems with the usr tmp directory such as insufficient permission lack of disk space e Incorrect path to mounted assembly s file system e System displays a Activating Old Assembly message when activating the assembly that is currently active by another user However when the assembly is activated it only displays the root node without the component added by the previous user This behavior is caused by users having different CVPATHs which point to the same assembly directory but access it through different absolute paths Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 2 17 Configuring Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Configuring Multi User CAMU To resolve this condition modify the user s caddsrc 1local files so that the CVPATHs pointing to the common assembly directory are identical e System displays a Cannot Activate Assembly Assembly is in use by another user message e Check the DB_DAEMON_HOST environment variable in the user s caddsrc local to make sure it points to the common system designated as the DB_DAEMON_HOST by the active user e Check the mount point systems concurrently accessing the assembly They must be identical e The following errors are displayed if a user activates an assembly which has been activated as a new assembly by another user but has not been filed y
193. g the environmental variable CV_ASSEMBLY_NO_MODEL to no caddsrc local File Information on page 2 3 for more details on setting this variable 9 If desired specify a revision number in the Revision field This field allows you to access different versions of the model part associated with the component For example if the revision number is 2 and the model part name is frame the actual model part name is frame 2 10 To update the assembly click Apply The assembly structure gets updated Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Creating a New Assembly Adding a New Component to the Structure Figure 3 3 Changes in the Assembly Structure on adding a component Assembly Structure Assembly stucure Please note Ifthe new component represents a model that has not yet been built you can enter the name of the model that is to be built later You can add a component without associating it with a model In case you specify the View and Position option while adding a new component which is not associated with an existing model the system accesses the default CADDS part called adhandlepart that resides in the CADDS create directory This is a CADDS part that you create and point to using an environment variable in the caddsrc or caddsrc local file It provides you with model space until the actual part is built See caddsrc local File Information on page 2 3 for more information about setting up th
194. ge Copy Reference Mirror Delete Reference All Instance Expand All or Collapse All Export Highlight Highlight Component Highlight Subassembly Unhighlight Subassembly Advanced Lock Lock Component Lock Subassembly Unlock Subassembly Advanced Move Open Next Level All Advanced Close Quit Reference Advanced Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Introduction to Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Assembly Tree Window Table 1 4 Options on the Assembly Tree Window Shortcut Menus Node Selected Option Suboption Reference Assembly node View View Component View Subassembly Advanced Reorder Report Brief Detailed The Advanced option appears on the shortcut menus Choosing Advanced displays the property sheet for the selected option You can then specify more details for the operation For example if you select the View option from the shortcut menu the component appears without any attributes Choose the Advanced option to specify other attributes such as parameter layer and so on The contents of the shortcut menu depend upon the state of the selected component node For example if you select a locked node the Unlock option appears on the shortcut menu If the node is unlocked the Lock option appears The following table lists options for each state of a selected component Table 1
195. gn and inteter optional eor E string of digits with decimal point If the number of input values is less than the number of values in the array the remaining elements have the value 0 0 For example if the user inputs the following default values 3 5 5 6E 01 for an Array 3 data type the first element has the default value of 3 5 the second has the value of 56 and the third has a value of 0 0 11 10 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Defining Nongraphic Information for the Assembly Editing Attributes Editing Attributes Edit attributes to assign values to them 1 Select the Edit Attribute icon The property sheet appears Figure 11 7 Edit Attributes property sheet Feference Conponenz Componerat Instarce jondeap_3 ae Component s Instance onl v Ap y 2 Specify the name of the component instance whose associated attribute s you want to edit in the Component Instance field You can specify a reference Assembly Instance name for a read only copy of the attribute editor 3 Click the Component button to edit the entire component class to which the component instance belongs 4 Click the Instance Only button to edit only the component instance you specified 5 Click Apply The Attribute Editor window interface appears Attribute Editor Window Assign values to attributes using the attribute editor window interface The top area of the Attribute Editor con
196. h comes after the class name and underscore _ in the component is unique for each instance The system assigns numbers as instance identifiers beginning with 1 and incrementing by 1 for each subsequent instance of the component You can change the instance identifier to be more product specific For example change whl_assy_1 and whl_assy_2 to axle_front and axle_back Use Change Component to change a component s instance name This procedure is described in Chapter 7 Changing the Assembly Structure If you change the class name of a component instance it no longer has a clone type relationship with the remaining component instances of that class You cannot reestablish this relationship after it is removed Making a Change to Only One Instance of a Component Some commands can be chosen to operate on only one instance of a component or all instances Property sheets for these commands contain an All Instances toggle Other commands operate on all instances of the component you name for example ADD COMPONENT Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 3 19 Creating a New Assembly Relations Between Components in the Structure Relations Between Components in the Structure The relationship between two components is represented by a line called a relation Each relation has a self generated name and number The first part of the name represents the graphic orientation between the two components The unders
197. hat you must fill in User selected graphic X dy or P1 Marks a location or entity selection in graphic location examples User input in CADDS text fields and on any command line cvaec hd data param tar xvf dev rsto Enter the text in a CADDS text field or on any command line System output Binary transfer complete Indicates system responses in the CADDS text window or on any command line Variable in user input tar cvf dev rst0O filename Replace the variable with an appropriate substitute for example replace filename with an actual file name Variable in text tagname Indicates a variable that requires an appropriate substitute when used in a real operation for example replace tagname with an actual tag name CADDS commands and INSERT LINE TANTO Shows CADDS commands and modifiers as modifiers they appear in the command line interface Text string SRFGROUPA or SRFGROUPA Shows text strings You must enclose text string with single or double quotation marks Integer n Supply an integer for the n Real number xX Supply a real number for the x mkdir cdrom Indicates the root superuser prompt on command lines rlogin remote_system_name Indicates the C shell prompt on command lines 1 root rlogin remote_system_name 1 Indicates the Bourne shell prompt on command root lines xviii Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Refe
198. he CAMU task set icons See The Assembly Structure on page 1 7 to learn about the logical structure of an assembly and the terms used to describe it See Chapter 3 Creating a New Assembly to learn how to activate a new CAMU assembly Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 1 3 Introduction to Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Local Data Manager Menu Local Data Manager Menu The CAMU LDM lists assemblies in your active directory or active CVPATH You can activate a new or existing assembly from this menu The top bar of the CAMU LDM menu displays LDM MODE ASSEMBLIES indicating you are in the assembly environment From the LDM you can activate a new assembly See Chapter 3 Creating a New Assembly or an existing assembly see Chapter 5 Working in an Existing Assembly Figure 1 1 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Local Data Manager Menu LOM MODE ASSEMELIES ASSY MODE ACTIVATE FILE MANAGEMENT UTILITY CADDS Local Data Manager fictive CVeaih CV PATH o Z SoS U O Active Directory USERS REENGIOY FARTS Show Assemblies in Active Directory lt Show Assemblies in Active Cvpath Mame Type Dener Date LABPARTS 4HEEL Assy ASSEMBLY rhergion 08 24 92 11 30 CRANK ASH CAP ASSEMBLY rherngion 08 27 92 13 45 WHOS0S0 A ASSEMBLY rherigion OF 19 92 16 20 WHOS050 E ASSEMBLY rhergion 10 19 93 12 18 _ 4Ctivates anew assembly here vy Activates ar existing assembly from the list Activate M
199. he Quit Suspended property sheet These options enable you to select all or specific Adrawings and or models you want to quit Edits made to the suspended parts that have not yet been filed are discarded when you quit Figure 4 2 Quit Suspended Property Sheet Quit Suspended Adrawings default drw abxed2d shtioft3 all Adrawings These options allow you to select all or specific Adrawings and or models you want to suspend After selecting click Apply to process the property sheet 2 Choose the All Adrawings option to quit all suspended Adrawings within the assembly You could also quit specific Adrawings by selecting their name from the list 3 Choose the All Models option to quit all suspended models You could also quit specific models by selecting their name from the list 4 Click Apply to process your selections 4 8 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Chapter 5 Working in an Existing Assembly This chapter describes what happens when one or more users work in the same assembly It also explains with examples what happens when you move between Adrawings and models The topics are e Activating the Main Assembly e Viewing Model Geometry e Moving Between Models and Adrawings e Associative Mass Points e Several Users Can Work Concurrently e Locking Components Attribute Groups and Models e Activating a Reference Assembly e Refreshing the Main Assembly Concurrent Assembly Moc
200. hen you activate a different model e The color of the active model or piece part geometry may change the graphics window if the layer assignment at the piece part level is different from the layer assignment on which it is viewed in the active Adrawing e Any parameters that were visible the last time the piece part was filed appear in the graphics window when you activate the model Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 5 21 Working in an Existing Assembly Associative Mass Points Associative Mass Points This section explains how to work with mass points and how to report mass point data in the Explicit environment Mass points provide a way to store physical properties data in the Explicit environment Each time you perform a calculation you can create a mass point The system uses the standard center of mass symbol to identify the location of the object s centroid center of mass You can change this location with the Move icon Mass point symbol You can also store physical properties data outside the part database in a standard text file This allows you to quickly transfer physical property data to and from mass points For more details about storing physical properties data see the Physical Properties User Guide and Menu Reference Mass points can be associative or nonassociative Mass points can optionally be merged to create composite mass points to determine weight center of gravity an
201. hich has two instances of wheel The user changes the component name of wheel_1 to wheelx and does not select All Instances Only one instance of the class wheel is changed This forces a change to its parent component because the original axle_1 is no longer identical to other instances in the axle class x veheel 1 wheel 1 x wheels wheels 1 x veheel 2 wheel 2 x wheel 2 wheel 2 Ea _ x wheel S x wheel S arle axle_3 veheel_ 6 veheel 6 BEFORE AFTER t anle axle_1 axle_2 and axle _3 can no longer be three instances of the class axle because their child components are no longer identical Therefore the system creates a new unique class name axle_1_1 and assigns it to the changed component s parent The other instances of axle retain their original class name 7 6 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Changing the Assembly Structure Removing a Component Removing a Component When you remove a component from the assembly structure the associated model in the Graphics window is also removed You can remove one or all instances of a component class If the component you select represents a subassembly the entire subassembly including all child components is removed The component you want to remove must be locked Its parent component must also be locked Remove Component Reference component Component Instance I pistona 7 All Instances
202. hics window shows the changes to the constrained variables Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 9 21 Using Interpart Constraints Forcing a Variable to Remain Constant Forcing a Variable to Remain Constant Any variable for a component can be forced to remain constant even though equations in which it is constrained to another variable have been solved Finca Select the Fix Component icon from the Constraints task set FinfUntix Component You can directly modify the value of a variable for components that have been fixed by setting its value with the Change Variable option For example you have the following equation that uses three variables var1 xcompl e and ycomp1 h varl xcompl__ _e 6 ycomp1___f 2 If you change the value of var1 then solve the equation the value of xcomp1_ _ _e also changes If you fix the variable xcomp1_ _ _e then change the value of var1 and solve the equation the value of ycomp1_ _ _hchanges The value of xcomp1_ _ _e does not change because xcomp1_ _ _e is now constant 9 22 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Using Interpart Constraints Deleting a Variable Deleting a Variable Use Delete Variable to delete a variable from the active model Various rules apply when you delete a variable If you delete a variable that is e Used in an equation the equation is also deleted e Used in more than one equation all of t
203. hose equations are deleted e Associated with a parameter it is removed from the parameter You cannot UNDO the delete variable command 1 Activate the model in which the variable is associated with a parameter 2 Select the Delete Variable icon Delete Variable jal Select Graphically lt gt Select All Select by Name a a If you attempt to delete an imported variable you receive an error message Variable variable name is protected from deletion To delete a variable that is imported use Import Component OFF to unimport the model associated with the variable Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 9 23 Chapter 10 Adrawings and Alternate Views This chapter describes the functions of Adrawings how to view geometry and how to use the Exploded View feature to show components of the assembly geometry in different locations The topics are e Adrawings e Viewing Models in Adrawings e Using Alternate Views in Your Design e Basic Steps to Create an Alternate View Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 10 1 Adrawings and Alternate Views Adrawings Adrawings When you activate a new assembly you actually activate an Adrawing named DEFAULT While in an assembly you can activate additional Adrawings The Adrawing is a special type of CADDS part which also includes drawing information It allows you to view the model geometry that exists in y
204. ies in an assembly session Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 7 27 Changing the Assembly Structure Changing a Reference Assembly When the limit of active reference assemblies is reached you can use the command QUIT REFERENCE to deactivate active reference assemblies see Deactivating a Reference Assembly on page 4 3 In this example the user changes the external assembly association of the body_1 assembly instance to revision 2 of the same assembly name body 2 _db All instances of body are affected Please note The assembly instance body_1 must be locked WY locka timer body_4 1 y flashi 1mm sm sm battery camera 1 holder_i fxnde rz 1 Tensi Understanding System Messages The first time that you lock a component in a referenced assembly LOCK COMPONENT the system activates the associated external assembly At this time the following message appears Activating reference assembly assembly name please wait Activation process is complete Before the tree activation process occurs if the current version of the reference assembly tree is not up to date the command is aborted with the following error message WARNING Another user has made changes to the active assembly tree In order to perform this command you must issue a REFRESH ASSEMBLY command to get an updated version of the assembly tree 7 28 Concurrent
205. ified the original component instance name is used as the class name of the mirrored component Please note Ifthe generated mirror component name exists in the active assembly the MIRROR COMPONENT command is terminated 5 Specify the suffix to be appended to the original model name at the Model Name Suffix field If no suffix is specified m is appended to the original name to generate mirror model name Please note If the generated model name exists in the directory ies specified under the active CVPATH the MIRROR COMPONENT command does not perform geometric mirroring but only associates the new model name If Create Part Database option is not selected this input is disabled You must lock the component to be mirrored along with its descendants and the parent instance of the newly created mirrored copy Lock the parent component instance of the original component Please note You can use the LOCK COMPONENT command to lock the desired component 6 Click on Create Part Database option if you want to perform part mirroring Default is set to OFF allowing only graphical mirroring Please note In the parametric environment the Create Part Database option can be set ON or OFF but in explicit environment it is always hazed out 7 Click Apply The following menu appears Figure 7 3 Mirror Component menu Mirror Component FP ane Done You can cancel the mirroring by selecting Abort option from this menu
206. ilable from Activate New Assembly property sheet 3 3 moving between 1 24 Equation 9 12 constraint relationship in assembly 9 14 listing 9 14 solving 9 12 status symbol 9 14 Exiting CADDS 4 5 CAMU 4 5 Exploded view 10 6 example 10 10 selecting from within AD 10 9 turning on and off 10 9 Export Variable property sheet 9 5 Exporting a reference assembly 3 35 Exporting an assembly 3 31 active 3 35 referencing with 3 33 referencing without 3 32 Extended variable name 9 10 example 9 11 External Assembly 3 21 closing a reference assembly 4 3 F FILE icon menu selection from 4 4 Filing 4 2 active assembly 4 3 active model in history replay mode 5 9 active model or Adrawing only 4 7 and exiting 4 4 Assembly Structure 4 4 creating anew model 4 6 options 4 4 removing implicit locks 4 3 selected Adrawing or model 4 6 solving positional constraints 4 2 updating associative annotation 4 2 while importing component 9 8 without exiting 4 4 Fix 6 16 Fix Component property sheet 9 22 Flipo option using 6 8 G Global Menu 1 24 Graphical mirroring 7 15 Index 4 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Index H Handlepart 1 37 adding components 3 8 creating 1 37 Hidden Line Removal 12 3 Remove Hidden Lines 12 5 Restore Hidden Lines 12 5 HIDE OBJECT 12 3 12 5 HIDE OBJECT interrupt 12 9 Highlight Component property sheet 8 44 Highlighting geometry 8 44 HLR generating using CADDShade II 12 17 Hybri
207. ility for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this document The software described in this document is provided under written license agreement contains valuable trade secrets and proprietary information and is protected by the copyright laws of the United States and other countries It may not be copied or distributed in any form or medium disclosed to third parties or used in any manner not provided for in the software licenses agreement except with written prior approval from PTC UNAUTHORIZED USE OF SOFTWARE OR ITS DOCUMENTATION CAN RESULT IN CIVIL DAMAGES AND CRIMINAL PROSECUTION For Important Copyright Trademark Patent and Licensing Information For Windchill products select About Windchill at the bottom of the product page For InterComm products on the Help main page click the link for Copyright 2007 For other products select Help gt About on the main menu for the product UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND This document and the software described herein are Commercial Computer Documentation and Software pursuant to FAR 12 212 a b OCT 95 or DFARS 227 7202 1 a and 227 7202 3 a JUN 95 and are provided to the US Government under a limited commercial license only For procurements predating the above clauses use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to the restrictions set forth in subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software Clause at DF
208. in an opened position instead of its closed and locked position or showing an exploded isometric view of a subassembly for illustration purposes are two such examples Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 5 5 Working in an Existing Assembly Viewing Model Geometry Clarifying Terms To better understand the model geometry in CAMU you should be comfortable with the terms used They are e Adrawing a CADDS part subordinate to the CAMU assembly database file that enables you to see the model geometry associated with various components in your assembly structure see About Adrawings on page 5 5 e Model a CADDS part that has been associated with a component class in the assembly structure e DDRAW a CADDS drawing file activated automatically when you activate an Adrawing It is used only by a CAMU Adrawing and only for the purposes of containing and preserving a view state A view state includes the following e Number location scale and orientation of views e Specific layer visibility e Specific model geometry display based on user visibility choices for specific component instances subassemblies and so forth e Specific visible layer ranges for user specified component instances subassemblies and so forth e A user specified alternate view state for example an exploded view e Any annotation geometry that you have added to enhance the display of viewed model geometry in the view
209. ing you see the assembly in its standard orientation because you have not yet specified alternate positions for associated model instances Please note Views on the active Adrawing are not affected when the view state is toggled between standard and alternate exploded The term Exploded View is somewhat misleading In the alternate or exploded view state it is the position of viewed model instances that can be affected not view scale orientation and so forth Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 10 3 Adrawings and Alternate Views Adrawings Options on the Property Sheet If you do not use the defaults on the property sheet for activating a new assembly you can specify the following e The name of the assembly Must be of 20 characters or less between directory delimiters dots and a maximum of 60 total characters including the absolute path name and punctuation When you activate a new assembly an Adrawing named DEFAULT is automatically created activated e Assembly package toggle buttons CAMU is already selected by default if the CV_ASSEMBLY_PACKAGE environment variable has been set to CAMU in your caddsrc local file e The drawing size Click the drawing size you want it appears in the Form box The default is C 1 view e Unit of measure for the Adrawing Click the button next to the type of units you want The default is IN inches e The name of a template Adrawing part which has bee
210. ing DDRAW ACTIVATE ADRAWING This enables visually seamless Node switching Glossary 6 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Index symbols cadasrc file information 1 37 2 3 A Aborting a command 2 23 Accessing ATB 1 40 Accessing CAMU automatic 2 3 from suntools 1 39 Accessing command 1 24 1 31 from Assembly Structure window 1 31 from icon 1 24 Activate Model 8 3 on global menu 1 24 Activate New Assembly property sheet 3 3 Activating a reference assembly 5 34 Activating an assembly 3 2 existing 5 2 new assembly 3 2 view in graphics window 5 5 AD_LIST_CONSTRAINTS 2 5 Add component property sheet 3 9 Add Equation property sheet 9 14 Adding a component 3 9 multiple instances 3 17 component name 3 19 example 3 18 of a component class 3 15 of a parent component 3 17 of the same component 3 18 to the assembly structure 3 7 Adding an assembly 3 21 difference between adding and referencing 3 21 existing 3 21 prefix with 3 30 reference 3 23 referencing 3 24 to the assembly structure 3 7 Adrawing 1 9 5 5 activating a model from 5 8 Alternate and Exploded 5 5 changing 10 11 default Adrawing 3 2 deleting 10 12 menu selection 10 9 moving from active to new 5 8 significance 10 2 standard view 10 7 template 5 4 view state 10 5 viewing model in 10 5 Align 6 15 All Instances button 3 19 Alternate view 10 6 Ambiguous selection 6 8 Annotating 12 21 an assembly 12 22 asso
211. ing example the user has activated the model associated with the component whee1_1 Its parameters are visible te gt aS 2 Select the Export Variable icon The Export Variable property sheet displays a list of variables associated with the model ExportiUnexport Variable gt Select Graphically lt gt Select by Name In this example the user selects the variable mrad1 3 Select the variables to be used in the assembly Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 9 5 Using Interpart Constraints Selecting Variables from a Model to Include in Your Assembly 4 Click Apply If two variables are already constrained together such that one variable determines the value of the other variable export only one of these variables from the model If you use both of these variables in another equation in the assembly and the two constraint relationships contradict each other the equation is not solved 5 Use Export Variable to flag the variables to be used in your assembly The Export Variable property sheet displays a list of variables associated with the model 6 Activate the other model that contains the variable s you want to relate to the variable s in the first model In the example the user activates axle_1 a r 7 Export the variable s you want to relate to the variable s you exported from the other model Use the procedure outlined in Steps 2 through 4 In this example
212. ing the mod file instead of specifying them on the Plot History Tree property sheet Please note The plot attributes that you specify in the mod file override the options you select on the Plot History Tree property sheet A copy of the mod file is available at cadds scripts templates xmlhisttree cfg Modify this file as per your requirement and use it to generate the plot output e Device Specifies the output plotter device The plotting device name appears in the Device field To use another plotter select the required plotter from the available list 3 Click Apply on the Plot History Tree property sheet to generate the plot output Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 12 33 Glossary Adrawing A special CADDS part used by a CAMU assembly database to optionally view some or all of the models that comprise an assembly It is essentially both a CADDS part and drawing The Adrawing can contain representation of viewed model geometry VIEW COMPONENT views at any scale orientation and location specific layer offset information detail geometry such as dimensions balloon callouts crosshatch parts list text etc It can also house HLR representation Each assembly has a minimum of one Adrawing the DEFAULT Adrawing and can have multiple Adrawings Entities that physically reside in an Adrawing are only visible when that Adrawing is active Each Adrawing can optionally contain two view states
213. ins to limbs and surrogates generated by the HIDE OBJECT command To accommodate this enhancement use the UPDATE HLRIMAGE command This regenerates the HLR and updates dimensions accordingly Be sure to activate an Adrawing to contain the dimension and annotation entities These items are visible only when this particular Adrawing is active Please note Entities that are physically resident in the Adrawing such as annotation and HLR are only visible when that Adrawing 1s active Establishing Associativity Default Establish dimensions as associative before their insertion Perform the following steps to establish associative dimensioning defaults in the active Adrawing 1 Select Setup from the top bar 2 Select Detailing from the pulldown menu 12 22 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Documenting the Assembly Dimensioning and Annotating The Detailing Setup command palette appears 3 Select the Dimension Setup top left icon The Dimension Setup property sheet appears Jimensicr Setup obcsia Paraveters fron Zikity creaticr Mode Update se row ne se Mutorcti lt Yodel gt Manus Ej AssJ iale Cinens uns 46tain linens ons E i w m r binesasion walte Fron F azarty 4 Ensure that the Associated Dimensions option is enabled appears red 5 Click Apply Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 12 23 Documenting the Assembly
214. invoke CADDS The LDM lists either CADDS parts assemblies or features databases You can select and activate an existing database or create a new one Local disk The disk attached to your machine Parts on this disk cannot be viewed or modified by other users If another user wants modify access to any parts signed out to another user he must go through the normal procedure of having the part put back to the Vault then get the part to his local disk MSO Acronym for Model Space Origin MSO is the XOYOZO of the seven supplied CPLs MSO location and orientation is identical to the supplied Top CPL Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Glossary 3 Glossary Main assembly Model The active assembly whose root node is the leftmost in the assembly structure This is the assembly activated using the Activate Assembly command A CADDS piece part associated to a leaf node in an assembly structure See Part You can use a model to represent a weldment You can also associate a model to a subassembly node in order to house outline geometry When you activate a model from within CAMU the part is activated as well as a drawing named MDRAW The terms model and part are often synonymous Model space origin The datum XOYOZO of a model This is specifically the location at which the seven supplied CPL s coexist Orientation of MSO is coincident with the Top CPL Nested reference assembly Node A re
215. ion to Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Assembly Environment Task Sets Moving to Other Environment Groups You can move to an application task set within another environment group such as Harness Layout from within CAMU 1 Select MODELING or whatever group is active from the top left corner of the active task set Figure 1 9 Moving to the Other Environment Groups 2 Select the desired application task set from the resultant menu 1 28 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Introduction to Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Accessing Functions Accessing Functions The methods used to select options and fill in property sheets are the same in both the Explicit and Parametric modeling environments with the addition of features particular to CAMU This section provides brief descriptions of how to use icons and windows Using an Icon to Select an Option Move the cursor on the icon Click the left button One of the following occurs e The command is processed In the Explicit environment you can read the status of the command in the Text window When processing is done the CADDS prompt reappears The command is executed in the Parametric environment e A menu of additional commands appears Choose the function you want Click the left mouse button e To give additional information fill in the property sheet that is displayed Property Sheets Property sheets have fields in which you provide informa
216. irectory is also the Create directory The directory containing library parts is also accessible in the user s CVPATH Any parts in the user s local parts directory SHOME parts are accessible as well CVPATH usr2 parts assemblies C usr3 cadds libparts HOME parts Example 2 In the following example the CVPATH is set up so that each user s local parts directory is the Create directory but the common assembly directory and the library parts directory are also accessed The order of the path is important If duplicate part names exist in different directories the part in the directory that appears first in the CVPATH is accessed CVPATH SHOME parts C usr2 parts assemblies usr3 cadds libparts Example 3 If the parts that exist in the usr3 cadds libparts directory are to be accessed before any local parts that exist with the same name and you still want your local directory to be the create directory CVPATH usr3 cadds libparts usr2 parts assemblies S HOME parts C Please note The CVPATHs can vary from user to user as long as the common assembly directory is accessed with the same absolute path Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 2 13 Configuring Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Configuring Multi User CAMU Testing the Multi User Configuration Once you have completed the CAMU multi user configuration test the configuration to ensure that multi user access to assemblies works
217. irst entity type picked but also the constraint type specified For example an align constraint between a line and a cylinder aligns the cylinder axis along the line Tables describing which constraint type allows which entity type are provided below A dashed line in the tables indicates that for this constraint the geometry pair is not valid Table 6 1 Mate Constraint Zero Offset Type Point Plane Line Cylinder Point Coincident Coincident Coincident Coincident Plane Coincident Coincident Coincident Tangent Line Coincident Coincident Tangent Cylinder Coincident Tangent Tangent Tangent Table 6 2 Mate Constraint Non Zero Offset Type Point Plane Line Cylinder Point Distance Distance Distance Distance Plane Distance Distance Distance Distance Line Distance Distance Distance Cylinder Distance Distance Distance Distance Distance offset radius of the cylinder s Table 6 3 Align Constraint Zero Offset Type Point Plane Line Cylinder Point Plane Coincident Line Coincident Concentric Cylinder Concentric Concentric Table 6 4 Align Constraint Non Zero Offset Type Point Plane Line Cylinder Point Plane Distance Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 6 9 Parametric Positioning Creating Positioning Constraints
218. is still active from the first user but specify a new Adrawing name in the Adrawing Name field of the Activate Assembly menu Each user should be able to activate the tree and see the root node and the additional component which was added by the first user Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Configuring Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Configuring Multi User CAMU 6 Add a component from the second user file the assembly and issue REFRESH ASSEMBLY from the first user s session The first user should be able to see the component added by the second user 7 Follow the preceding steps for all additional multi user accounts on the remaining networked systems For each subsequent user account activate the currently active assembly add a component and issue REFRESH ASSEMBLY for all previous users Assembly structure should show the updated versions of the tree with each user s components 8 Verify that graphics display for component model geometry e Issue ACTIVATE MODEL for the component that each user added e Insert model geometry into the active model e Use the Activate Old Adrawing property sheet to activate the suspended Adrawing for each user e Select the root node from the tree and use the View component property sheet with Detail View enabled Each user should see only the geometry he has just added to his model s e Issue FILE ASSEMBLY for each user Because FILE ASSEMBLY automatical
219. iston 1 Viewing Model Graphics in the New Adrawing You can view the component instance piston assy_1 to view the model graphics associated with its leaf components To view the parametric piece parts turn on the display of all layers The piston assy leaf component model instances will now be visible within all four views in the graphics window In the Assembly Structure window all previously activated models are suspended Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 5 19 Working in an Existing Assembly Moving Between Models and Adrawings Figure 5 14 Graphics Window with piston assy_1 Viewed in the New Adrawing TOPyiew sQview FRONT view RIGHT view La 5 20 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Working in an Existing Assembly Moving Between Models and Adrawings Moving from a New Adrawing to an Existing Adrawing When you activate the existing Adrawing named 1 the graphics window shows the view state of the assembly as it was last viewed and saved on this Adrawing Figure 5 15 Graphics Window after Moving from a New Adrawing to an Existing Adrawing Visual Changes When Activating Parametric Models When activating Parametric models or piece parts or both you may see the following changes in the graphics window e The TOP Cplane of the active part may be different for each model or piece part Therefore its position may change in the graphics window w
220. k Up User Guide and Menu Reference 5 1 Working in an Existing Assembly Activating the Main Assembly Activating the Main Assembly You can activate a new or existing assembly from the LDM This section describes how to activate an existing assembly From the LDM select an existing assembly Figure 5 1 Activate Assembly property sheet Activate Old Assembly bir USERS RKADAM PARTS Name WHEEL drawing Name Revision Expand Reference All ye Lavel ff El Hotify E Exploded View On BETACTHACIE se Concurrent Assembly Mock Up gt Parametric Multipart Design Model Units Component Instance Envi ronment arametric Assembly m Apply eset Cancel 5 2 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Working in an Existing Assembly Activating the Main Assembly Please note You can activate an assembly created in a CADDS version older than the current one However you can not activate an assembly created in a CADDS version later that the current one Update the necessary information on the Activate Old Assembly property sheet or use the defaults 1 2 Click Concurrent Assembly Mock Up to access the CAMU environment Enter the name of the Adrawing you wish to activate in the Adrawing Name field If you do not enter a name the system activates the default Adrawing The Expand Reference option allows you to specify the level of reference assemblies that you want to read and display in the
221. king in an Existing Assembly Moving Between Models and Adrawings Moving to a Suspended Model The drawing MDRAW is activated in the suspended model The view zoom and scale settings of the model is inherited by the MDRAW The MDRAW views are oriented to preserve the assembly This action is also called seamless visual movement Moving to a Suspended Adrawing The view state of the suspended Adrawing is restored There can be visual changes when activating a model based on the layer color choices of the active model and so forth Understanding the Suspension Buffer When another part model or Adrawing is activated the previously activated part is suspended The CADDSMAX_PART variable in the caddsrc file specifies the maximum number of parts that can be suspended The default is 6 The active part model or Adrawing counts as one 1 For example if CADDSMAX_PART 9 you can suspend 8 parts models or Adrawings and have one active see caddsrc local File Information on page 2 3 To clear the suspended status on a given part file save it Filing empties the suspension buffer and allows you to activate or suspend or both additional parts For more information see Chapter 4 Filing an Assembly Filing an Active Model That Is in History Replay Mode You can discard or save the results of an edited or incomplete history replay session to the model database for a parametric model associated with a component o
222. l Attribute Groups all Global groups or all Nonglobal groups as required A list of the respective groups is displayed when it is selected Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 11 7 Defining Nongraphic Information for the Assembly Creating Attributes Creating Attributes Define an attribute group Create the attributes that are to be included in the group Perform the following steps to create an attribute 1 Select the Create Attribute icon The property sheet appears 2 Use the pushpin to create several attributes in succession Figure 11 6 Create Attribute property sheet Attribute Group bom attribute partng String m _ Component Instance only 3 Type a name for an attribute in the Attribute field 11 8 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Defining Nongraphic Information for the Assembly Creating Attributes 4 Click the options list button to the right of the Attribute Group field A menu appears showing a list of all attribute groups you have created Attribute Groups 5 Click the name of the attribute group you want It appears in the Attribute Group field 6 Click the list button next to the Type field Choose the required attribute type Integer The choices allow you to enter the following types of data Option Type of Data Integer A number value Real A double precision floating point String Letters integer values or a
223. lank Component Unblank Component Scroll Zoom and Highlight Active The explicit environment has an option for Selection Mode e The Query icon question mark launches a menu with these CAMU selections e Verify Object Shows who has locked a component the model association the view status and orientation of the groups attached to the component e Print Component Shows in the report window an indented listing of the assembly structure hierarchy downward from the component that you select e List Adrawings Shows a list of all Adrawings associated with the assembly and their status Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 1 23 Introduction to Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Assembly Environment Task Sets Assembly Environment Task Sets Both Assemblies in the Parametric and Explicit environments provide similar functions In addition from the Assembly in Parametric environment you can access the CONSTRAINTS task set as well as the Explicit and Parametric Modeling environments From the Assembly in Explicit environment you can access the ATTRIBUTES task set and the Explicit Modeling Parametric Modeling and Manufacture environments The Modeling pulldown menu allows you to access other environments from within CAMU This section shows the tasks you can access from the global menu in both environments It also shows the environments you can access from the Modeling pulldown menu Common Tasks You
224. le status 9 7 Context sensitive menu 1 31 Copied Assembly 3 22 Copy Component property sheet 7 13 Copying a component 7 12 changing the copy 7 12 positioning 7 14 viewing and positioning 7 14 Create Attribute Group property sheet 11 4 Create Attribute property sheet 11 8 Creating an assembly 3 2 handlepart 1 37 position constraint 6 7 6 13 sample procedure 6 22 Creating an assembly exporting by 3 31 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Index 3 Index Cursor moving property sheet on 1 29 CV_ASSEMBLY_HANDLE_PART 2 3 CV_ASSEMBLY_NO_MODEL 2 5 CV_ASSEMBLY_PACKAGE 2 3 CV_MAX_ACTIVE_REF 2 5 CV_POSITION_CONSTRAINT_FEEDBACK 2 5 CV_UILACT_ASSY 2 4 CV_UI_DEFAULT_ENV 2 3 CVMAC program 11 19 creating an executable 11 20 query 11 19 CVPATH usage 2 20 D DB daemon in cadasrc file 1 38 DB_DAEMON_HOST 2 3 DDRAW 5 7 Default assembly package setting 2 3 Delete Adrawing 10 12 Deleting a component 7 7 a constraint 6 20 a reference assembly 7 3 a variable 9 23 Diamond shaped button 1 30 Dimensioning model geometry 12 21 the assembly 12 22 Dimensions regenerating 12 25 Disassociate Attribute Group property sheet 11 6 Display Structure property sheet 7 29 Display Unresolved Subassemblies 6 3 Documentation printing from Portable Document Format PDF file 1 xx Documenting the assembly 6 2 12 2 E Edit Attributes property sheet 11 11 Environments accessing from Assembly Design 1 23 ava
225. lect the endcap face The graphics update as follows Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 6 27 Parametric Positioning Using Constrain Component Please note Itis difficult to constrain already assembled components since undesired entities are highlighted This happens when a line coincides with another To avoid this situation separate the components prior to constraining Please note The two components are now mated at the specified face at a distance of 0 If you move one of the components the other will move to satisfy the constraint The command line now looks like this Constrain Component Ciname piston assy_1 Mate Offset 0 Please note If you are dissatisfied after selecting the first or second component use the backspace key to undo the selections See Using Constrain Component on page 6 13 15 Click Apply on the Constrain Component property sheet to solve the constraint and exit the command Please note You can select another pair of component edges or faces specify a different offset value or specify a new constraint type Example Variant 1 If you had specified an offset value the endcap would have moved the specified value as soon as it was selected For example 1 Specify an offset of 1 2 Select the connecting rod 3 Select the endcap Constrain Component Ciname piston assy_1 Mate Offset 1 6 28 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Refere
226. lements the Assembly Structure Window It has a tree structure with easily expandable and collapsible nodes It is divided into two sections the upper section containing the assembly tree and the lower section acting as the CAMU status window See Assembly Tree Window on page 11 e CAMU Status bar This window shows the name of the active assembly database active part model or Adrawing and active modeling units 1 6 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Introduction to Concurrent Assembly Mock Up The Assembly Structure The Assembly Structure When you activate a new assembly specify a name for the assembly When the CAMU interface appears the assembly name appears in a small box in the Assembly Structure window This is the root component which represents the entire assembly As you build the logical structure of the assembly add components to represent different subassemblies or piece parts and connect them to this root component The Assembly Structure window shows the logical representation of your assembly Terminology The following terms are used to describe the pieces that comprise the assembly structure Root component This is the base of the assembly structure It is the left most component in the Assembly Structure window representing the entire assembly It is the highest component in the structure hierarchy and is system generated Each assembly can have only one root node
227. lly existing assembly in your active assembly With CHANGE ASSEMBLY you can e Change the instance name of a reference assembly e Change the name of the reference assembly s root component e Assign the reference assembly to a different parent With REMOVE ASSEMBLY you can e Remove the association of a reference assembly from your active assembly Changing the Appearance of the Structure You can change the way your assembly structure appears in the assembly structure window by using REORDER COMPONENT and DISPLAY STRUCTURE With REORDER COMPONENT you can e Reorder the placement of a component instance among its siblings in the assembly structure With DISPLAY STRUCTURE you can e Hide blank portions of your assembly e Represent multiple instances of leaf components as a single component with a number indicating how many instances are represented as children of the parent Obtaining Information about the Structure VERIFY OBJECT gives you information about the selected component Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 7 3 Changing the Assembly Structure Changing a Component Changing a Component 5 G There are several ways you can modify a component The component must be locked for all the changes For some changes the parent or children must be locked You can change one or all instances of the component Please note You can use the LOCK COMPONENT command to lock a desir
228. locking any child of a reference assembly instance activates the associated assembly database _db To activate a model in a reference assembly the component associated with the model must be locked The newly activated model will inherit the viewstate from the suspended Adrawing or model Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 3 21 Creating a New Assembly Adding Existing Assemblies to Your Assembly A reference assembly is a reference to another assembly that exists outside of your active main assembly You can see any changes made to that original assembly by refreshing or filing your active main assembly Any time you file or refresh the assembly any changes to the reference assembly are reflected in Assembly structure as well as the Graphic window if any models associated with the referenced assembly components are changed Use CHANGE ASSEMBLY to assign the reference assembly to a new parent or to change the reference assembly s name in the active assembly For more information see Chapter 7 Changing the Assembly Structure The root node of a referenced assembly is called an Assembly Instance An assembly instance is shown in a bold outlined box in the assembly structure This bold representation is only used to indicate an assembly instance You can choose to display the entire reference assembly or only its root component You can display any part of the subassembly using the Display Structure pro
229. ludes either an absolute CADDS path name or a path name below the create directory The input and output of the programs use the create directory unless you give an absolute path name 5 To modify any attribute s used for the BOM change the DATA statement s in the BOM file compinfo 11 20 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Defining Nongraphic Information for the Assembly Generating Output Using Supplied CVMACs Link and Compile CVMAC Procedures To use the supplemental CVMAC procedures they must be linked and compiled Change to the directory cvmac and issue the command make Please note You must be able to issue the command cvmcomp and have write access to the current directory Creating CVMAC Executables This section contains the procedure and examples to convert supplied CVMAC attribute report extraction programs to executable usable files Procedure Follow this procedure 1 Copy the contents of usr apl cadds data am supplements into a subdirectory of your CADDS create directory Name the subdirectory cvmac For example pwd lt cr gt usr2 pam This is the HOME directory mkdir parts cvmac lt cd gt cd parts cvmac lt cd gt cp r usr apl cadds data am supplements lt cd gt ls README ad edm BOM one file progs query tree README_ 1 ad handlepart more caddsrc local lt cr gt setenv CVPATH SHOME parts C In this example parts is the crea
230. ly performs a refresh REFRESH ASSEMBLY each user should now be able to see the geometry for all the components in the assembly However due to the sequence of filing a REFRESH ASSEMBLY may be required after all users file their active main assembly to display the current version of the assembly Troubleshooting Follow the tips given below when you encounter errors configuring multi user CAMU Activating a New or an Existing Assembly These are the common errors you come across while activating a new or an existing assembly e Warehouse Errors or RPC Errors or Error Code 22 No ODB_DAEMON process running on the DB_DAEMON_HOST system Check the system designated using the following command ps ef grep ODB_DAEMON If there is no process manually start it by issuing usr apl cadds scripts db_daemon on the host system Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 2 15 Configuring Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Configuring Multi User CAMU Assembly is already active by another user on a DB_DAEMON_HOST other than what you have specified To resolve this switch your DB_DAEMON_HOST to the system specified by the other user LOCK or TEMP files exist on the assembly database file _db file from an abnormally exited session To correct this inspect the assembly database file and the ownership of any LOCK or TEMP files Ensure that no other user is currently active in the assembly and then remove the LOCK and T
231. matically To activate and work on the model of an existing component the component must be locked Please note You can use the LOCK COMPONENT command to lock a desired component see Determining What to Lock on page 5 32 Activating a Model To create or edit geometry in a model associated with a component class in the assembly do the following 1 Select the component from the assembly structure This highlights the component 2 Place the cursor inside the Assembly structure window and click the right mouse button to display the context sensitive menu Choose the Activate Model option or select the Activate Model icon from the resultant menu The Activate Model property sheet displays the name of the highlighted component in the Component column and Component Instance row Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 8 3 Defining Assembly Geometry Working on Model Geometry If the model exists Munit is ignored If Activate Model is creating a model Munit determines the model units Use the model unit defaults or choose Munit and then select the model units you want Activat2 Model Component Use the Reference option to specify a reference assembly assembly instance When used with Component this specifies the referenced assembly containing the component whose associated model you wish to activate 3 Apply the property sheet to activate the associated model 4 Select the mod
232. mbly Creating Activating a New Assembly The name of the assembly appears in the Assembly Structure window This is the root component of the assembly An underscore _ sign and instance number is appended to the assembly name The asterisk indicates the component is locked by you Structure wagon 1 3 4 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Creating a New Assembly Building the Assembly Structure Building the Assembly Structure You can build the assembly structure by adding components or external assemblies to the active main assembly Components may or may not be associated with piece parts models You can position the component or assembly instance in the active main assembly and view it if it has an associated model While creating a component you must specify e A name for the new component class name only not instance number e The component to which you want the new component attached parent If you do not specify a parent component the new component s are attached to the root component Please note If you have set Select Assemble On see Automatic Assembly on page 6 32 all parametric positioning constraints get solved when you add a component or an assembly Typical Structuring Approaches Typically you design your CAMU assembly structure by functional groupings The three most prevalent scenarios are e Create a master assembly containing the complete product
233. mbly specify input in the Component column 3 Enter the name of the component instance in the Component Instance field using one of the following methods e Select a component from the structure using the left mouse button e Select a model in the Graphics window e Type the component instance name in the field 4 Enter the new class name for the new component in the New Component field The instance number remains the same unless you provide a New Component Instance 5 Enter a new parent component from the assembly structure in the New Parent field Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 7 5 Changing the Assembly Structure Changing a Component 6 Choose the No Model option to remove the association between the component from the model with which it was associated so it has no model associated 7 Choose the No Revision option to remove the revision number assigned to the component s associated model 8 Choose the All Instances option to apply the change to every instance of the component class Otherwise the changes are applied only to the component instance you specified in the Component Instance field 9 When creating a new component class specify the No Retain option to either keep or discard existing parametric positioning constraints 10 Click Apply Changing a Component Name Can Create a New Class The BEFORE side of the example shows three instances of the axle component each of w
234. mbly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Adrawings and Alternate Views Basic Steps to Create an Alternate View Basic Steps to Create an Alternate View You can create a unique exploded view state for each Adrawing in an assembly see Using Alternate Views in Your Design on page 10 6 This procedure assumes that you are working in an existing assembly that contains components with associated model geometry It tells you how to create an alternate view state The sections that follow explain the procedure in more detail 1 2 Activate an assembly Activate a new Adrawing By default you are in the standard view state View the components you want to include in your exploded view state Position the components in the Standard view state before toggling to the Exploded view state see Moving a Component on page 8 24 File the assembly and remain active in the Adrawing Click Adrawing from the top bar From the menu that appears click Toggle Exploded View Use selections from the Move Component icon to move and or orient components to an alternate position Please note You can toggle back and forth between the exploded and standard view states in the active Adrawing Please note Use Delete Exploded View to remove the selected component instance s alternate positioning This returns the component instance to its standard orientation The Standard View In the Standard view orientati
235. mbly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 8 11 Defining Assembly Geometry Locating Model Space Origin for a New Model The next section shows how to specify the MSO at a standard or easily identifiable location before creating a new model so that other users can position the new model in other assemblies specifying Model Space Origin before Creating the Model This procedure allows you to build the geometry of the new model in the context of the assembly layout and locate the MSO of the new model at a standard location for use in other assemblies This standard location is at the bottom of one of the counter bore holes Position the Model Instance Associated with Bracket Instead of activating the bracket component to create its model geometry first locate the model instance using Move Component Activate or create the model Because the model does not exist for the bracket component instance the handlepart is used to position the model instance in the assembly 1 Select the bracket_1 component instance in the Assembly Structure window Choose the Move Component option from the pop up menu to display the Move Component property sheet 2 Select the Translate icon on the Move Component property sheet to move and position the bracket component instance to a specified MSO location Figure 8 9 Specifying Model Space Origin for the New Model associated with bracket_1 frapsiate from X0YOZO g oO the digitized are 8 12 C
236. metry of component instances Using the Layer option You can use the Layer option to view geometry on either the layer s that the geometry resides on in the associated model using a Layer value of 0 or you can specify a Layer value to use in incrementing the layer display For example if you use a Layer value of 2 when viewing the associated model of a particular component instance all geometry in the model is incremented by a value of 2 when it appears in the active Adrawing see Options on the Property Sheet on page 8 19 e Specifying a Layer value e You can use the Layer field to specify the value with which to increment the actual layer value s of geometry in the active part This enables you to view the model graphics on a layer different from the layer s on which the CADDS model graphics reside The geometry in that part itself is not affected e Not specifying a Layer value or specifying a value of 0 e Model graphics view on the same layer s on which they reside in the actual CADDS model regardless of the active layer of the active Adrawing in which you are currently working Using the Layer List option You can use the Layer List option to view only selected layer ranges for the component or assembly instance specified in the active Adrawing see Options on the Property Sheet on page 8 19 8 22 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Defining Assembly Geometry Viewing a Component
237. mount points through NFS the absolute path name is different The result would be that each user would essentially be activating different assemblies even though they have NFS access to the same assembly directory Example User 1 has the server s assembly directory mounted as follows mount server usr2 parts assys users assys User 2 has the same server s directory mounted on another system through a different mount point mount server usr2 parts assys usr2 parts assys When each user changes to the mounted assembly directory their current working directory is different User 1 cd users assys pwd users assys User 2 cd usr2 parts assys pwd usr2 parts assys As aresult each user can list the same assemblies from their respective mount point directory However when they attempt to activate the same assembly from CADDS user 1 activates users assys assembly and user 2 activates usr2 parts assys assembly Both users get a message saying Activating Old Assembly but only one user is active in the correct assembly Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Configuring Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Configuring Multi User CAMU CVPATH Prerequisites Each user s CVPATH entry in the caddsrc local file referencing the common assembly directory must be exactly the same for all users As is the case with NFS mounts the manner in which the common assembly is accessed in each user
238. n Component property sheet Component Apply Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Parametric Positioning Using Constrain Component Reference Specifies the active reference assembly whose node you want to positionally constrain Component Specifies the subassembly component instance name whose child components you want to positionally constrain All the child components are highlighted indicating the subassembly graphically The Constrain Component property sheet processes your inputs real time Only use the Apply option to exit the command For an example of usage see Sample Procedure for Creating Constraints on page 6 22 Component Name Specifies the subassembly component instance name whose child components will be constrained To pass input to this field select the component instance from the assembly structure using the left mouse button or enter the component name in the Component field Mate Use the Mate option to define mating constraints between faces of components being assembled The faces can be planes or surfaces of revolution For planar faces the command enforces the constraint that the planes will be parallel to each other and face each other their normals will be in opposite direction You can specify an offset such that the distance between the faces will be maintained equal to this offset If no offset is specified the faces will be coincident For revolved s
239. n parts in ATB Enabled CADDS 5 ATB Enabled CADDS 5 does not work on CADDS 4X single and double precision parts You can access the ATB option either in the LDM mode or in the Assembly mode The LDM screen lists parts or assemblies either in your active directory or the active CVPATH depending on the mode of selection The LDM also displays a list of CADDS TIM parts and assemblies in your active directory You can perform the following ATB operations e Import a Pro ENGINEER part or assembly as a CADDS 5 TIM part or assembly e Export a CADDS 5 part or assembly as a Pro ENGINEER TIM part or assembly e Verify a CADDS 5 TIM or Pro ENGINEER TIM part or assembly e Update a CADDS 5 TIM or Pro ENGINEER TIM part or assembly You can perform these operations on single or multiple parts and assemblies You can also these operations in the NAV CAMU mode Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 1 41 Introduction to Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Accessing the Associative Topology Bus ATB Option A single user or different users can perform these multiple operations simultaneously Refer to Using Associative Topology Bus Enabled CADDS 5i for more details on using the ATB feature Please note Before starting an ATB session set the CADDS_ATB_ENABLED environment variable in your caddsrc 1local file as follows setenv CADDS_ATB_ ENABLED yes You can also start an ATB session by using
240. n previously created e The design environment The default is Assembly in Parametric Select the ENVIRONMENT box A menu appears for you to select your environment Annotating the Adrawing You can insert CADDS entities into the active Adrawing to annotate or embellish model display Entities that physically reside in an Adrawing are only visible while that Adrawing is active see Dimensioning and Annotating on page 12 21 Obtaining Information About Adrawings You can list information about Adrawings in the current assembly 1 Select Adrawing in the top bar 2 Select List Adrawings from the resultant pulldown menu Sample output is shown below List adrawings for Assembly tree Camera Adrawing Name USERS SPATIL PARTS CAMERA DEFAULT Viewing state defined Orientation Normal Status active by prevelas 10 4 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Adrawings and Alternate Views Viewing Models in Adrawings Viewing Models in Adrawings When working on an assembly you work in either an active Adrawing or an active model In an active model you can see and make changes to the model s geometry In an Adrawing you must use View Component to view the associated model geometry The Adrawing contains information about the scale model units template and so forth that define how you view the active assembly and its component model information This is called the view state of
241. n use the Lock Component function to lock a desired component see Determining What to Lock on page 5 32 Please note If you have issued Select Assemble On see Automatic Assembly on page 6 32 all parametric positioning constraints are solved when you use any of the Move Component property sheet options Select a component instance from the assembly structure or from the viewed model geometry 8 24 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Defining Assembly Geometry Moving a Component Figure 8 18 Move Component property sheet Hove COBponent Reference Component Coaponent Instance li ko Cancel Please note The Move Component property sheet differs somewhat between parametric and explicit environments However the functionality is essentially the same Using Translate Rotate and Orient Component In this procedure the term component refers to the associated model geometry in the Graphics window To move a component from one location to another perform the following steps 1 Activate the assembly In the example the user activates the assembly wheel assy in the Explicit environment 2 Activate an Adrawing Define one or more views In the example the user selected ISO view orientation view scale 5 set view 3 View the components axle_1 and wheel_1 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 8 25 Defining Assembly Geometry Moving a Compon
242. name 116 References FRAME Origin OX 0 000000 OY 0 000000 OZ 0 000000 Orientation AX 0 000000 AY 0 000000 AZ 0 000000 Graphically Mirrored No Blanked No Hilited Yes Part Mirrored Yes Source Part Name disk Part Out of Sync Yes 7 38 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Changing the Assembly Structure Listing Reference Assemblies Listing Reference Assemblies LIST ASSEMBLY lists all active and nonactive reference assemblies sourced in the active main assembly The command gives the following information e Active main assembly name e All reference assembly names e Active or non active flag for all reference assemblies Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 7 39 Chapter 8 Defining Assembly Geometry This chapter describes how to view and position the models associated with assembly structure components in the context of the assembly The topics are Guidelines for Creating Model Geometry Working on Model Geometry Component Instances and Their Locations Locating Model Space Origin for a New Model Viewing a Component s Associated Model Geometry Moving a Component Highlighting the Appearance of Geometry Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 8 1 Defining Assembly Geometry Guidelines for Creating Model Geometry Guidelines for Creating Model Geometry e Use solid or surfaced double precision or C5
243. name field These viewstate files are independent of the Adrawing You can also restore the viewstate of one Adrawing to another Adrawing Please note Incase a part has viewstate files from multiple assemblies you must select the relevant viewstate file Chapter 11 Defining Nongraphic Information for the Assembly This chapter describes how to define attributes which are data you define and associate to components of the assembly structure You can extract this information with CVMAC programs The topics are e About Attributes e Creating Attribute Groups e Associating an Attribute Group with a Component e Disassociating an Attribute Group from a Component e Listing Attribute Groups e Creating Attributes e Editing Attributes e Locking Attributes and Attribute Groups e Changing Attribute Properties e Removing an Attribute e Removing an Attribute Group e Generating Output Using Supplied CVMACs Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 11 1 Defining Nongraphic Information for the Assembly About Attributes About Attributes Attributes are user defined data you assign to one or several components of the assembly structure For example you can assign bill of materials information physical properties drawing notes or labor tracking data To produce reports with this data use a CVMAC program you have written or use one of the programs supplied with CAMU see Supplied CVMAC Programs on page 11
244. nce Parametric Positioning Using Constrain Component The second component moves immediately to satisfy the constraint When you move either the endcap or the connecting rod the mating component updates Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 6 29 Parametric Positioning Using Constrain Component Example Variant 2 If the endcap and conrod had not been properly positioned prior to creating the constraint you could have properly positioned and constrained them at the same time For example the components are originally positioned as follows 6 30 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Parametric Positioning Using Constrain Component Repeat the steps in Sample Procedure for Creating Constraints on page 6 22 The endcap moves as follows Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 6 31 Parametric Positioning Solving Parametric Positioning Constraints solving Parametric Positioning Constraints You can solve parametric positioning constraints automatically or manually See Understanding Solving Process Order on page 6 4 for more information about how the system solves parametric positioning constraints Automatic Assembly executed The Select Assemble On command enables you to specify that all parametric positions be recalculated and solved assembled whenever the following are Command Icon or Property She
245. nd Menu Reference 7 25 Changing the Assembly Structure Changing a Reference Assembly The Change Assembly property sheet appears with following options Figure 7 12 Change Assembly property sheet Change Assembly Reference Instance pyy_i Refaranc Component Hew Parent Haw Asseably Class Hew Asseebly Instance AA External Assembly s Hevision Four _J All Instances Cancel Specify the name of active reference assembly in the Reference Instance field Specify the component name or reference assembly which is to be the new parent of the active reference assembly into the New Parent field Specify the new class name in the New Assembly Class field in case you want to change the class name of the selected assembly Specify the new instance in the New Assembly Instance field in case you want to change the instance of only the selected assembly You can specify a different external assembly name than the one with which the current active reference assembly is associated in the External Assembly fields You can select the one from the available runtime list Here you can choose the active CVpath from the run time list Specify the revision of the associated external assembly in the Revision field You can choose the revision name from the available runtime list You can choose either the external assembly or the revision at a time The All Instances option is automatically selected if choos
246. nd Task Sets 1 24 Moving to Other Environment Groups 1 27 Accessing Functions 1 28 Using an Icon to Select an Option 1 28 Property Sheets 1 28 Filling In Fields on a Property Sheet 1 29 Using Pushbuttons on Property Sheets 1 30 Processing the Property Sheet 1 31 Pushpin Icon 1 3 Using the Context Sensitive Menu Within the Assembly Structure Window 1 31 Using Online Documentation 1 32 Commands and Command Help 1 33 Assist Lines 1 33 Using Online Command Help 1 33 Reversing a Command 1 36 Commands You Cannot Undo 1 36 Preparing to Work 1 37 Viewing Parts 1 37 Entering CAMU 1 37 Manipulating a Component That Has No Geometry 1 37 Contents iv Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 1 38 Establishing the DB Daemon Suspending a Specified Number of Models 1 38 Accessing CAMU 1 39 Accessing the Associative Topology Bus ATB Option 1 40 Updating TIM Parts with Pending Regeneration State __ _ lt 1 4 Querying the ATB Transactions 1 42 Configuring Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Implementing CAMU and EPD 2 2 caddsrc local File Information 2 3 Configuring Multi User CAMU 2 7 Choosing a Host System for DBB_LDAEMON_HOST 2 7 Performance Considerations 2 7 Network Considerations 2 8 NFS Network File System Prerequisites 2 8 CVPATH Prerequisites 2 10 Software Prerequisites 2 10 Other System Considerations
247. nd does not display them in the final result e Show Topological Edges When you use the HIDE OBJECT command CADDS blanks the Topological Edges by default Choose this option to display the omitted Topological Edges f Select the Dashed Hidden Lines to display the hidden lines as dashed lines and select Dash Length and specify it in absolute drawing units The default value is 0 0001 Select Soace Length and specify the space between dashes in absolute drawing units The default value is 0 0001 5 Click Apply Please note HIDE OBJECT inserts new wireframe entities into the active Adrawing These new entities display the HLR representations of the viewed solid models which are blanked The blanked state of the underlying model graphics is temporary Use the Unview option to permanently turn off the display of the blanked models 6 At the view prompt select the view or views on which you want to perform the HLR operation Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 12 13 Documenting the Assembly Generating HLR Using HIDE OBJECT 7 Select Objects to Hide to obtain the CADDS model entity prompt Remove Hidden Lines Abort Objects To Hide Done 8 Select the viewed models for HLR generation 9 Select Done CADDS generates HLR for the selected models in the selected view or views You can associatively dimension to HLR See Inserting Dimensions and Annotation on page 12 22 for details
248. ng a new component class See Adding a Family Member of a Master Model on page 3 15 for more information Viewing and Positioning the Component When you create a component you can position it in the assembly with or without orienting it The View and Position options are also available on the Copy Component and Add Assembly property sheets shown in Chapter 7 Changing the Assembly Structure See Position and Orient on page 3 14 for more information about positioning component instances Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Creating a New Assembly Adding a New Component to the Structure After filling in the Add Component property sheet choose one of the procedures given below View and Position without Orienting 1 Choose the View and Position option The default orientation of the model graphics being viewed is determined by the Model Space Origin MSO or TOP Cplane of the model associated with the component The Cplane of the model is planar or parallel to the TOP Cplane of the parent component The default location may cause the model graphics to appear out of position in the assembly Using View and Position override the default orientation so that MSO is based on the Active Cplane of the Active Adrawing instead of the default TOP Cplane 2 Type a value in the Layer field to view the model graphics on a layer other than the layer on which the model graphics reside in the
249. ngs You can and usually do have multiple Adrawings in an assembly Use a descriptive method for naming Adrawings for example Exploded All Design Section AA Sheetlof2 or Sheet2o0 2 You can activate additional drawings in an Adrawing Again establish a naming convention and adhere to it For example 1of2 20f2 Assembly structure components A general guideline is to use descriptors as component class names and actual part numbers for the associated model names Ways You Can Add Components or Assemblies There are three ways you can add components or assemblies to the active main assembly Add a component or assembly that may or may not have an associated part or model The component appears in the assembly structure If the component has an associated model and you do not position the component it defaults to Layer 0 and TOP Cplane Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 3 7 Creating a New Assembly Building the Assembly Structure e Add a component or assembly that has no associated part model and specify the position s where the component and its multiple instances appears in the assembly Later when you activate the model to build its geometry it appears appropriately placed in the assembly e Add a component or assembly which already has an associated model view the model geometry and position it in the assembly Please note You can add a standard model or a member of a mast
250. nstance numbers to the new child or leaf components Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 3 17 Creating a New Assembly Multiple Occurrences of the Same Item Adding Multiple Instances of the Same Component You can add one or more instances of a component class at a time Choose the Add Component option or choose Add Component from the popup menu in the Assembly Structure window Indicate how many instances of that component you want on the property sheet that appears The default is one 1 instance If the parent you specify has more than one instance multiple instances of the new component are attached to every instance of the parent In the example below the user adds two instances of the wheel component to the parent whl_assy_1 Because Add Component operates on all instances of the parent component two instances of wheel are added to each instance of whl_assy_1 Add Component Property Sheet Options Specified e Specify whl_assy_1 in the Parent field e Specify wheel in the Component field e Specify a value of 2 in the n number of instances field e Select the Apply option to process the command Figure 3 6 Two Instances added to the parent whl_assy_1 whlassy 1 whi_assy_i whl_assy 2 whl_assy 2 BEFORE Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Creating a New Assembly Multiple Occurrences of the Same Item Instance Names The instance identifier whic
251. nt and one of them is a hole Using the Align option see Align on page 6 15 the constraint maps concentrically If you have another mating constraint between planar surfaces and the system is over constrained try flipping while defining an align constraint between cylindrical surfaces Use the on screen arrows to determine correct direction Ambiguous Selection When you attempt to select geometry the ambiguous selection mechanism cycles through all possible entities by highlighting them at the point of selection It highlights the component in a different color in addition to highlighting the selected entity Using the Flip Option Whenever an edge is selected for the purpose of parametric positioning an arrow appears to indicate the axial direction An option to flip direction is provided This eliminates any ambiguity while positioning the selected components 6 8 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Parametric Positioning Creating Positioning Constraints Entity Selection You must select the correct type of entity for each option For example when you choose the Plane option you can only select planar faces When you choose the Edge option you can only select straight line edges When you choose the RevSurface option you can only select cylindrical surfaces When you choose the Point option you can only select points from the model instance Entity selection not only depends on the f
252. nts are viewed in a particular Adrawing While creating a new assembly you can specify an Adrawing other than the DEFAULT Adrawing The assembly with the DEFAULT Adrawing is first activated and then the specified Adrawing for the active main assembly steps to Activate a New Assembly To activate an assembly do the following 1 From the LDM menu select Activate New Assembly and Adrawing The Activate New Assembly and Adrawing property sheet appears 2 Choose the CAMU toggle switch if it is not already selected 3 Enter the name of the new assembly in the Assembly Name field for example wagon 4 Enter the name of the Adrawing you wish to activate If you do not specify a name the system activates the default Adrawing 5 Use the default Environment or select the environment from the menu 6 Click Apply to process the property sheet 3 2 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Creating a New Assembly Creating Activating a New Assembly Figure 3 1 Property Sheet to Activate a New Assembly Activate Old Assembly Dir USERS RKADAM PARTS Name WHEEL Adrawing Name Revision Expand Reference All lt Level H El Hotify gt Exploded View On Hodeleroptions E Concurrent Assembly Mock Up gt Parametric Multipart Design Envi ronment Parametric Assenbly m Apply eset Cancel Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 3 3 Creating a New Asse
253. ny valid character If you use a space to separate a string value the characters must be in quotes Array 2 An array of two real numbers Array 3 An array of three real numbers Use standard decimal notation format for arrays separated by either a comma or a space 7 Specify the default attribute value in the Default Value field If no other value is assigned to the attribute this default value is used 8 Choose Component if you want all instances of the class of components to have the same value for the attribute Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 11 9 Defining Nongraphic Information for the Assembly Creating Attributes 9 Choose Instance Only if you want different instances of a component class to have different values for this attribute 10 Choose Default if the value in the Default Value field is to be used The attribute has the same value for all component classes that have this attribute associated with them Floating Point Numbers The input format for arrays can also be a string of floating point numbers separated by either a comma or a space For example for Array 2 you could have 3 5 5 6e 01 or 3 5 5 6E 01 See the example below The floating point number format may contain the following e An optional sign e A string of digits optionally containing a decimal point e An optional e or E e An optional sign and an integer 5 6e 01 LiL L optional sign optional si
254. o enables you to create engineering drawings that describe whatever model instances are presently visible in the active Adrawing You have no write access to viewed but inactive models You can however perform associative hidden line removal You can associatively dimension to viewed model instances as well as to HLR You can also shade the display of model instances currently viewed in the active Adrawing Please note Associative HLR and associative dimensioning are optional You can specify nonassociativity using property sheet options You can create assembly engineering drawing using associative HLR Hidden Line Representation and associative dimensions Do this in the Explicit assembly environment You can insert annotation geometry such as labels balloon callouts text notes and symbols into the active Adrawing to detail the viewed assembly You can output the display to plotters and printers Please note Do not detail the assembly in the DEFAULT Adrawing Rather use DEFAULT simply as a springboard into the assembly Detail the assembly from in an appropriately named Adrawing significance of the Active Adrawing The Adrawing provides e A way to view selected model instances at a particular orientation and scale properly located with respect to other models in the assembly e A placeholder for newly inserted assembly items such as dimensions text notes callouts and so on resident in the active Adrawing e A display
255. o a subassembly e You can select the base component from the main assembly as well as from a reference assembly e You can select the base component by either choosing the component graphically or from the assembly tree structure e A base component is specified as the CINAME of any of the child nodes of the subassembly on which constraints are defined e Internally the base component is mapped to the parent relation of the child subassembly This makes the base component instance independent e If you do not specify a base component while creating constraints the instance from which the first geometry is selected becomes the base component e Even if there is a model associated with the owner component it will not be taken as the base component for that subassembly e You can change a base component designation e If all the constraints specified do not map to the base component a warning is issued On selecting the Base Component icon from the Constrain Component property sheet the options specific to the base component appear on the property sheet Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 6 33 Parametric Positioning Solving Parametric Positioning Constraints Figure 6 5 Constrain Component property sheet with Base Component details Component e Reference Specifies the active reference assembly whose node you want to positionally constrain e Component Specifies the subassembly component
256. olid or surface You can use these from within CAMU 8 2 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Defining Assembly Geometry Working on Model Geometry Working on Model Geometry To work on the model geometry associated with a particular component class name select the component and activate the model Any changes you make to the model are reflected in all instances of that component class When you work in an assembly you work in either an active Adrawing or an active model In the Adrawing you can change the position of component instances in the context of the entire assembly In the Adrawing however you cannot work on the actual model geometry associated with different components in the assembly You must activate the model you wish to work on This enables you to create or edit its geometry A New Component and Its Associated Model When you create a component in the Assembly Structure window a model name identical to the component class is automatically associated with it The associated model may or may not exist You can also associate the component to either a new or an existing model when you create a new component You can optionally associate the model with a family member of a master model see Adding a New Component to the Structure on page 3 9 You can change the model association with Change Component see Changing a Component on page 7 4 A newly created component is locked auto
257. ometry at Ss The original assembly changes to reflect the mirroring and copying of the component fork assy_1 This mirror copied component is attached to the parent component handle fork_1 with suffix lhs as fork assy lhs_1 The child components fork_2 and fork shaft_1 of the original component are also mirror copied with the suffix lhs as fork shaft lhs_1 and fork lhs_1 7 22 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Changing the Assembly Structure Mirroring a Component Figure 7 10 Final Assembly structure after mirror copying eee a fork_t shafts fork prisa fork ass t __ a v fork shaft_ 11 ea i handle s T Fhandie fork 1 hand le assy_1 hand le ass _4 ee ARET support shaft 1 _ support shaft 1 I ee re V fork shaft Ths_4 ef gs eS Tara K on T To execute the above steps you can give following command on the command line Mirror Component Ciname fork assy_1 PARENTCiname handle fork_1 Newcnamesuffix lhs Modelnamesuffix lhs Copy Yes Plane Axis Free loc 10 0 0 loc 3 10 0 Go Specifying Orientation for Mirror Copied Component Once the component is mirrored you can use the Move Component command to position and orient the mirrored component You can also orient the mirror copied component by executing the Mirror Component command from the command line and specifying the position and the modeleroption details Fo
258. omponents You can use the Vault and CAMU together from within EPD Connect Assembly Database Items The assembly directory which equates to the name entered on the Activate New Assembly or Activate Old Assembly property sheet must be tracked by the database management system The assembly consists of the following components e The assembly file itself _db e All Adrawings CADDS parts subordinate to the _db and used to view position and document the assembly geometry in the assembly directory such as default e The root model if there is one in the assembly directory e Links to models associated with components in the assembly structure _db Model Items Each model associated with components within the assembly structure must be addressed by the database management system The model directory which equates to the name entered in the Activate Model property sheet or outside CAMU on the Activate Part property sheets contains some or all of the following items that must be managed e The part database itself _pd and _ fd e The explicit graphics file _gr containing the drawing and model graphics data along with the tessellation data e The vp_links directory This directory must exist to house the files generated by the VIEW COMPONENT command These files are removed when you unview or exit the assembly In case of abnormal shutdown you should manually delete these files 2 22 Concurrent Assembly Mock
259. on of the active Adrawing locate the components in their assembled positions You can do this in several ways View and position each component instance as you add new components to the assembly Move components using selections from the Move Component property sheet Some of the selections automatically view the component as it is put in its new location Other options require that you view the component then locate it Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 10 7 Adrawings and Alternate Views Basic Steps to Create an Alternate View The example below shows the crank assy in the Standard view state Components are properly located To create an exploded view state you can choose to activate a new Adrawing 1 Click Adrawing from the top bar From the menu that appears choose Activate New 2 Use View Component to view the desired components See Viewing a Component s Associated Model Geometry on page 8 18 3 Toggle to the Exploded view state See Selecting Exploded View on page 10 9 Figure 10 1 The crank_assy Assembly in Standard Orientation po en 10 8 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Adrawings and Alternate Views Basic Steps to Create an Alternate View selecting Exploded View You can toggle from the standard view state to the exploded view state from in the active Adrawing or as you activate an Adrawing In an Active Adrawing In an ac
260. on of the assembly itself Figure 8 4 Graphics Window Showing Model Space Origin of the New Model for base_1 sa Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 8 9 Defining Assembly Geometry Locating Model Space Origin for a New Model Building the Model Geometry Create the basic geometry for the model associated with base relative to the Right Cplane All system supplied Cplanes share the same XOYOZO or MSO location Figure 8 5 Graphics Window Showing Basic Geometry of the New Model Figure 8 6 Graphics Window Showing Finished Geometry of the New Model for base_1 8 10 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Defining Assembly Geometry Locating Model Space Origin for a New Model If you activate create the model associated with bracket and build its geometry relative to the assembly layout the origin location of the new model is at the same Model Space Origin location of the assembly itself Creating model geometry at the origin location of this particular assembly might be confusing to other users who use this model in their assembly This is because the origin of the bracket is not at a location that other users can easily reference Figure 8 7 Assembly Structure after Activating a New Model for bracket_1 pulley assy_ 1 amp bracket_1 SV hase_ Figure 8 8 Undesirable MSO Location for the New Model Associated with bracket_1 of the new model Concurrent Asse
261. oncurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Defining Assembly Geometry Locating Model Space Origin for a New Model As the model itself does not exist after the Translate command is processed there is no visual indication that you ve moved the component instance or that the MSO of the model resides at the location you just specified Figure 8 10 Model Space Origin Properly Located for the Model associated with bracket _1 MSO location of bracket 3 Use the handlepart graphics to check the placement of the model instance The following is the completed model geometry created in the context of the pulley assembly Figure 8 11 Geometry Completed for the Model associated with bracket_1 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 8 13 Defining Assembly Geometry Locating Model Space Origin for a New Model 4 After specifying the MSO of the new model activate the model associated with the component instance and create its geometry in the context of the assembly layout The second bracket instance is properly located and oriented in the assembly The following example shows how to locate MSO for the new model associated with wheel Figure 8 12 Second Bracket Model Instance Properly Positioned in the Pulley Assembly 8 14 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Defining Assembly Geometry Locating Model Space Origin for a New Model Locating MSO for New Model A
262. oncurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Introduction to Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Accessing Functions Some property sheets display a three dot options button For example in the Add Component property sheet clicking the three dot options button by the side of Model field displays a run time list of existing parts in your CVPATH Select Model CVpath OVPATH Directory USERS ABENGIOW PARTS ea PISTON pia REF CRANKASSY DEF AULT SHAFT w apy Peset Canel Choose the model from the list It gets highlighted The highlighted model name appears in the field on the property sheet If you do not want to generate the list type in your entry e Select a component from the graphics display of your assembly structure The component name that is linked to this model instance appears in the field on the property sheet Each property sheet has one field that can be filled in this way This is similar to selecting from the structure e Use the calculator to provide a number Click the calculator to enter numbers in a field Use numbers and functions as on a regular calculator After selecting the numbers click the answer The number appears in the appropriate field on the property sheet Using Pushbuttons on Property Sheets Pushbuttons on property sheets are for selecting an option When you select one it is red Pushbuttons are of two types e Square button 2 way toggle Toggles a selection on
263. onent class If you remove one instance of the class the remaining components keep their original instance numbers 1 Start with this 2 Add another instance of Structure component c to parent b_1 a Remove component ods In Panel 1 the structure contains two instances of the component class c In Panel 2 the user uses ADD COMPONENT to create another instance of component c In Panel 3 the user removes component instance c_3 In Panel 4 the user adds another instance of component c This instance has the suffix _4 not c_3 7 8 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Changing the Assembly Structure Removing a Component The system does not reuse the instance numbers that it has already assigned it simply increments to the next number You can rename a component instance with a different number or alphanumeric name providing the instance number name is not already in use Removing a Component by Removing the Relation You may want to remove a component from just a specific parent class not the entire assembly You can do so by removing the relation instance line between the component and its parent component You can remove component instances by their relation in one of the two ways All Instances or Instance Only All Instances This option removes the child component associated with the relation from both the selected parent instance as well as all other instances of the parent
264. onent of a reference assembly instance you automatically activate the assembly database associated with the assembly instance An asterisk symbol in the component box indicates that you have locked the component No indicator appears in your Assembly Structure window if another user has locked a component To obtain information on a component use Verify Object to see who has locked the component If you lock one instance of a component all other instances of that component class are also locked This is because all instances of a class are associated with the same model For example locking the wheel_1 component instance also locks wheel_2 wheel_3 and wheel_4 All instances of a class are clones of that class If you lock a portion of the assembly then add change or remove components you cannot remove the locks until you file the assembly Anything new that you add to the structure is automatically locked You cannot remove the lock until you save or quit Locking is not required for viewing a component s associated model It is also not required for positioning MOVE COMPONENT items in an exploded Adrawing see Using Alternate Views in Your Design on page 10 6 Determining What to Lock CAMU can automatically lock components for you based on the task you wish to perform For example if you want to add a new component to a selected parent that parent must be locked You can either lock the parent yourself using Lock
265. oning a component with no associated model 1 37 Positioning constraint color scheme 6 21 creating 6 7 entity selection 6 9 multiple instances 6 10 solving 6 32 unique positioning 6 11 Positioning tools 8 42 for rotating a component 8 34 from Move Component property sheet 8 42 Print Component 7 36 Printing documentation from Portable Document Format PDF file 1 xx Property sheet using 1 28 Pushbutton 1 30 Pushpin icon 1 31 Q Query Adrawing 10 4 CAMU Status window 7 35 Component 7 36 Parametric Positioning Constraints 6 17 Reference Assembly 7 36 Querying ATB transactions 1 42 Quitting 4 8 selected Adrawings or models 4 5 suspended Adrawing 4 8 suspended model 4 8 the assembly 4 5 R Read write permission 5 31 Reference Assembly 3 21 controlling level 3 26 deactivating 4 3 exporting 3 35 listing 7 39 Index 6 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Index nested 3 24 Refreshing an assembly 5 36 behavior 5 36 structure and graphics 5 36 with multiple users 5 29 Refreshing an assembly on global menu 1 24 Regenerate Component property sheet 9 20 Regenerating dimensions 12 25 Relation instance 1 8 in assembly structure 3 20 removing Component using 7 9 Remove Attribute Group property sheet 11 18 Remove Attribute property sheet 11 17 Remove Component property sheet 7 7 Removing a component 7 7 all instances 7 7 component instance number 7 8 from the Graphics window 7 7 removing the
266. onstrained Assembly The current version of the assembly is displayed This includes the newly computed positions of all components See Modify Position Constraints on page 6 17 for options and more information 5 36 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Working in an Existing Assembly Refreshing the Main Assembly Underconstrained Assembly The current version of the assembly is displayed This includes an optimal solution for the positional constraints Feedback is provided See Modify Position Constraints on page 6 17 for more information Overconstrained Assembly The current version of the assembly is displayed This includes the newly computed positions of all components by eliminating the redundant constraints If they are inconsistent the system provides feedback See Modify Position Constraints on page 6 17 for options and more information Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 5 37 Chapter 6 Parametric Positioning This chapter describes how to parametrically position components in the Parametric Assembly environment The topics are Understanding Parametric Positioning Creating Positioning Constraints Using Constrain Component Solving Parametric Positioning Constraints Changing Positioning Constraints Updating Positions After Modeling Change Using Pre Revision 8 0 CADDS Models Parametric Positioning and Adrawings Concurrent Assembl
267. option 8 29 Rotate Component option 8 27 six points orientation method 8 30 Translate Component option 8 26 Move Component on global menu 1 24 Moving a component 8 24 Moving between Adrawing and model 5 7 example 5 10 Moving between environments 1 27 Multiuser CAMU 5 27 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Index 5 Index determining status 5 27 example of 5 28 path locking 6 6 positioning constraints 6 6 updating session 5 27 updating the assembly 5 27 N Naming convention variable 9 10 Node switching 5 7 O ODB database server name 2 3 ODB_am_wh 2 3 ODB_SERVER 2 16 Crash recovery 2 16 multi user environment 2 16 ODB administration tool 2 18 ODB_SERVER crash recovery 2 24 Old assembly activating 5 7 Online command help 1 33 1 34 Open reference 3 26 example 3 27 Orient 6 16 Orientation procedure 8 32 Orienting a component 8 32 example 8 35 Outline geometry 8 20 P Parametric model in Explicit environment 1 37 Parametric positioning 6 2 assembly constraint status 6 35 environment variable 2 4 5 30 6 18 6 37 process order 6 4 tools 6 4 updating after modeling change 5 30 6 37 updating automatically 6 4 Parent component 1 8 assigning a new parent 7 4 changing parent of reference assembly 7 25 Part mirroring 7 15 Permission read write 5 31 Plotting Assembly structure 12 29 part history tree 12 32 Popup menu in Assembly Structure window 1 31 Position constraint 6 7 Positi
268. option enables you to file the specified model as a new name of your choosing Filing with Options Choose FILE gt FILE ASSEMBLY W OPTIONS to select all or specific Adrawings and or models to file 4 6 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Filing an Assembly Filing or Quitting Selected Adrawings or Models Figure 4 1 File Assembly with Options Property Sheet File Assembly With Options m Assembly Structure Adrawings default drw abx8020 shtiaf3 exoloded 1 All Adrawings Models 1 Choose the Assembly Structure option to file the Assembly Structure _db itself the default Adrawing and the root node model 2 Choose the All Adrawings option to file all Adrawings within the assembly that are either active or suspended You could also file specific Adrawings by selecting their name from the list 3 Choose the All Models option to file all models that are either active or suspended You could also file specific models by selecting their name from the list 4 Click Apply to process your selections Filing the Active Model Only CAMU does not have a FILE PART command equivalent To file the active model only simply select File Assembly with Options and select only the name of the active model Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 4 7 Filing an Assembly Filing or Quitting Selected Adrawings or Models Quitting with Options 1 Choose QUIT SUSPENDED to obtain t
269. opy a new class name You can associate the copy with a different model you must give the copy a new component name This allows you to use the existing attribute groups and attributes from the original component instance You do not have to create them again or reassociate them Lock the component you want to copy its descendants and all instances of the parent of the newly created copy Please note You can use the LOCK COMPONENT command to lock a desired component see Determining What to Lock on page 5 32 Please note If you have issued Select Assemble On see Automatic Assembly on page 6 32 all parametric positioning constraints are solved when you copy a component Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Changing the Assembly Structure Copying a Component To copy a component do the following 1 Choose the COPY COMPONENT option from the COMP ASSY task set Or select the component instance you want to copy from the assembly structure and choose COPY COMPONENT from the pop up menu enabled by the right mouse button The COPY COMPONENT property sheet appears Reference Component Component Instance Wheel_t reel tyra Parent j New Mame Model j Ae 7 View and Position If you are copying a component in a reference assembly specify input in the Reference column If you are copying a component in the main assembly specify input in the Component column 2 Ente
270. opy all Adrawings to the exported assembly e Name To copy only selected Adrawings to the exported assembly You can specify the name of the Adrawing in the Name field or select the Adrawings from the runtime list of Adrawings associated with the selected assembly 6 Choose Convert Reference option if you want to convert the selected subassembly to a reference assembly You can export the view states from the active and the filed Adrawings but not from a suspended Adrawing You cannot export the Adrawing of an assembly if you do not have necessary permissions to read the Adrawing parts of the main assembly Example Exporting without Referencing In this example create a new assembly using a portion of the active main assembly Do not specify the selected subassembly as a reference assembly 1 Activate the assembly that contains the subassembly you want to export In this example the active main assembly is camera 3 32 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Creating a New Assembly Creating a New Assembly by Exporting 2 Select the subassembly component body_1 to export 3 Open the Export Assembly property sheet The selected component instance name appears in the Component field 4 Specify a new assembly name camera body in the Export Name field 5 Do not enable the Convert Reference option 6 Apply the property sheet The following new assembly is created The active main assembl
271. or off e Diamond shaped button Allows you to select only one of several choices listed When one button is selected from a group other buttons in the group are automatically deselected Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 1 31 Introduction to Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Accessing Functions Processing the Property Sheet After providing the necessary information on the property sheet process it by selecting one of these options from its bottom bar e Apply Processes the command or function e Reset Returns all information on the property sheet to its default state e Cancel Closes the property sheet and does not process the command Pushpin Icon Select the pushpin at the top right of the property sheet to keep the property sheet on the screen even after you choose Apply or Reset option Click Cancel to cancel the pushpin Using the Context Sensitive Menu Within the Assembly structure Window You can access CAMU commands from the Assembly Structure window With the cursor inside the window click and hold the right mouse button You get a context sensitive menu It shows all the commands that are immediately available to you When you select a component its box is shaded If a property sheet appears you can see the component name in one of the fields on the property sheet The figure below shows two examples of this context sensitive menu A star in the small box indicates the
272. or option in Parametric Modeling environment or this MIRROR COMPONENT command in Parametric Assembly environment otherwise the positioning constraints do not get transferred to the mirrored part though the mirroring does take place This happens if you use legacy mirrored parts for the Mirroring command e Graphical mirroring Here the orientations of the mirrored component are changed so that it appears mirrored though the associated part is same as that of source component Please note 1 In Parametric environment both part mirroring and graphical mirroring is available whereas in Explicit environment only graphical mirroring is available 2 Orientation discrepancies may occur when you mirror the viewed components if they contain quarter circular or rectangular cut off duct lines with quarter circular or rectangular cut off fittings The mirrored copy of the component includes all the characteristics of the original component including associated viewing attributes and values For example the mirrored component uses the same layer for viewing as that of original component as an inherited attribute unless a different layer is specified while mirroring Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 7 15 Changing the Assembly Structure Mirroring a Component To mirror a component do the following 1 Choose the MIRROR COMPONENT option from the COMP ASSY task set The Mirror Component property sheet appears
273. osition components in the exploded view state To move parts in the exploded view do the following 1 Select the component to be moved from the Assembly Structure window In the example the user selects piston assy_1 2 Open the Move Component property sheet Select an option from it In this example the user selects the Translate icon 3 Relocate the instance In the example the user moves the piston assy_1 component 15 inches along the x axis Figure 10 2 Piston assy_1 Component of the crank_assy Assembly ST IEJ lao ro peed EE a 4 Repeat steps 1 3 for any other desired instances 10 10 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Adrawings and Alternate Views Basic Steps to Create an Alternate View The figure below shows the completed exploded view Figure 10 3 The crank_assy Assembly in Completed Exploded View Changing an Adrawing You can change the definition of an Adrawing using the Change Adrawing option Select the Change Adrawing option from the Adrawing menu of the top bar The Change Adrawing property sheet appears Change Adrawing Adrawing Revision No Revision Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 10 11 Adrawings and Alternate Views Basic Steps to Create an Alternate View Specify the following e Adrawing Specify the Adrawing name from the runtime list of existing Adrawings that you want to change e Revision
274. ot History Tree property sheet appears Plot History Tree Index H j Scale fH 0000 Scale To Drawing Size E 7 char Height E E Node offset i 1 Rotate E Mod Fite 7 Device Specify the options on the Plot History Tree property sheet as e Index Specifies to plot the history tree for the selected history tree node along with its dependent nodes If you do not specify any Index value the complete history tree is plotted e Scale Specifies the scaling factor for the output The default scaling factor is 1 Documenting the Assembly Plotting e Scale To Drawing Size Specifies to scale the output to a standard drawing size You can choose the required standard drawing size The default size is A4 e Char Height Specifies the character height of the text of the history tree node e Node Offset Specifies the offset value to use during plotting e Rotate Specifies to rotate the drawing by 90 degrees before plotting e CGMEFile Specifies the file name of the output CGM file Do not specify the CGM extension for the output file e Mod File Specifies the file that contains the print and plot attributes Use this file to print the additional attributes of the history tree nodes The additional attributes for the node are e command tolerance e command version e command Cplane e suppress state of the command e save state of the command You can also specify the plot attributes us
275. ou did for the first Please note If you define an align constraint on a pair of directed entities lines planes cylinders and want to flip the direction of one of the entities use the flip option on the utilities pop up There is no flip option on the Constrain Component property sheet Base Component Use the Base Component option to name a base component The base component is the one with respect to which all other components are positioned For details see Base Component on page 6 33 Modify Position Constraints The Modify Position Constraints option allows you to view all the positional constraints in the selected subassembly It displays a runtime list of previously defined positional constraints for the specified component instance You must lock the parent subassembly node whose children components are positionally constrained You can use this option to e Get a List the existing constraints e See the status of the constraints e Change Offset value of a selected constraint e Delete selected constraint s Please note The runtime list on this menu updates in real time as you create constraints Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 6 17 Parametric Positioning Using Constrain Component Figure 6 4 Modify Position Constraints Menu Component Instance p joint_1 Type Geometry Geometry Status offset Instance Instancez Angle Align supporti handle Satiztied oO
276. our assembly The Adrawing keeps information about the view you select to look at the model of your assembly Each new Adrawing you activate gives you a clean sheet to define view information such as scale orientation and layer assignments of the viewed assembly components significance of the Active Adrawing Each Adrawing provides e A way to view selected models at a particular orientation and scale properly positioned in the assembly e A placeholder for newly added assembly items such as text notes callouts and reference dimensions e A unique alternate exploded view state to illustrate models at locations and or orientations other than their assembled positions standard view state In the alternate exploded view state you can place the models associated with component instances at any location and any orientation for the purpose of illustration and test only You can easily toggle between the alternate view state and the standard view state Please note The standard view state illustrates model instances in their actual locations and is constant for all Adrawings in the assembly The exploded view state enables you to alter the location and orientation of each visible model instance in order to represent alternative positions such as open and shut or an exploded assembly representation The exploded view state is unique for each Adrawing in the assembly 10 2 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and
277. oved Only the person who has locked an item can unlock it You cannot lock an item that another user has locked Lock Component data is passed to an auxiliary process called ODB_SERVER which is attached to your assembly upon activation It keeps track of who has locked what in the active assembly In the single user environment simply lock the entire assembly from the root node down In the multiuser environment you must be selective about what components you lock Only lock what you need to work on Locking a component gives you edit rights to it and prevents anyone else from locking it Please note You can activate and edit a reference assembly from the active main assembly by locking a child component of the associated assembly instance Locking any child of an assembly instance activates the associated assembly database _db see Editing an External Assembly on page 7 27 The asterisk symbol indicates that the component or assembly instance is now locked by you Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 5 31 Working in an Existing Assembly Locking Components Attribute Groups and Models Locking Areas of the Structure When you lock a component or subassembly other users have read only access to it They cannot activate and file changes to the model associated with the components you have locked They cannot manipulate your locked component in any way Please note When you lock a child comp
278. ox lists all the components that have variables that are affected by the variable value change Solve Component H lt gt Select All lt gt Select by Name Apply Cancel Please note Ifthe equations are in manual mode solve them before you select Solve Component 3 Click Apply The new values from the assembly are applied to all the associated models If parameters are visible the modified parameters are highlighted in red Regenerate the component to see the changes in the representation of the model geometry in the Graphics window 9 18 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Using Interpart Constraints Changing Variable Values and Applying the Changes You see the following when you list variables Name Type Status Value mod value Exportable variables for model WHEEL mrad Length Free 0 279000 MULL Exportable variables for model 4 LE d1 Length Free 0 437500 MULL xe x HE RE XN EX HE RE MN EX ER RH EX HE RR EM HE MX HEM EM HE KX EM HE MX ER ER Current assembly imported variables axle di Length Free 0 437500 NULL Wheel omrad Length Free 0 279000 NULL HS x ER RN EM HE ER EX ER RN EX HE RE RN EM HE MX HEM EM HE KX EM HE RX ER ER axle di Length Free 0 437500 0 500000 wheel omradd Length Free 0 219000 0 250000 In Manual Mode The status User changed indicates the variable value has been changed Solve the equations before you solve the components Mame Type Status Value
279. p so that several users can concurrently access the assembly database It also provides information about setting up environment variables within your caddsrc local file The topics are Implementing CAMU and EPD caddsrc local File Information Configuring Multi User CAMU Arranging Projects Using CVPATH Data Management Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 2 1 Configuring Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Implementing CAMU and EPD Implementing CAMU and EPD CAMU is an integral part of Electronic Product Definition EPD Deciding to implement CAMU and EPD is a strategic decision that may have a profound and far reaching effect on the way your enterprise operates Although EPD focuses on the product development process it s impact is much wider Successfully implementing CAMU and EPD involves more than technology It also involves processes people and their interaction You can engage our industry consultants to perform a Product Development Diagnostic PDD to provide a business context and framework for implementing EPD within your organization or enterprise 2 2 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Configuring Concurrent Assembly Mock Up caddsrc local File Information caddsrc local File Information To run CAMU set the following variables in the default caddsrc file usr apl cadds scripts templates caddsrc The default caddsrc file contains all the required variables
280. page 6 32 Exploded View State The parametric positioning capability is not available in the exploded view state All parametric positioning functionality is hazed in the menus when you are working in the exploded view state Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 6 39 Chapter 7 Changing the Assembly structure This chapter describes how to add components and or assemblies to your active assembly how to change component names and how to change their placement in the assembly structure The topics are e Ways to Change the Assembly Structure e Changing a Component e Removing a Component e Copying a Component e Mirroring a Component e Changing a Reference Assembly e Changing Structure Appearance e Reordering a Component e Obtaining Information about Components e Listing Reference Assemblies Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 7 1 Changing the Assembly Structure Ways to Change the Assembly Structure Ways to Change the Assembly Structure To change the assembly structure you can change the properties of components and reference assemblies You can also add or remove components and assemblies in your active assembly You can change the appearance of your assembly structure by hiding portions of the structure or changing the order in which component instances appear Select these tasks from the COMP ASSY global task set or from the menu in the Assembly Structure window
281. perty sheet Please note You cannot move piece parts that belong to reference assemblies except to change the appearance within exploded views See The Exploded View on page 10 10 Copied Assemblies You can add a copy of an external assembly to your active assembly The copied assembly becomes an integral part of your active assembly When you add a copy of an external assembly to your active assembly it is no longer associated with the original assembly database from which it was copied This means that you do not see any changes made to the original assembly You can manipulate and orient the root component change the assembly structure attach non graphic information attributes to it manipulate and change the model geometry associated with leaf components providing the appropriate components are locked Use CHANGE COMPONENT to change a component name assign a new parent or change an instance name for components of assemblies you have added copied For more information see Chapter 7 Changing the Assembly Structure 3 22 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Creating a New Assembly Adding Existing Assemblies to Your Assembly Adding a Reference Assembly Use Add Assembly to add a reference to an existing external assembly to your active assembly Perform the following steps 1 Choose the Add Assembly option from the COMP ASSY task set The Add Assembly property sheet appears
282. ppears 3 Specify desired options and click Apply GM File Device Rotate Copies i Save File i Moffset aes Xsize Bo ngagai I Voffset size fe gaged Include Ree x YS gies ef 4 Exclude Hardware Arc Hardware Text M Layer Width Mapping ait Default width Abstract Scaling Centerline Intact No Scale Def Width Layer Pen C gt Layer Index Color Layer Index Color Width __ Monochrome Apply TE Cancel Please note For more information see PLOT DRAWING in the online command help and the PTC Plotter Drivers Administration Guide 12 28 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Documenting the Assembly Plotting Plotting the CADDShade Image To send the display of shaded or hidden line removed graphics to a printer or plotter issue the following command in the CADDS Text window PLOT DOT HIDE PLOT DOT SHADE Please note You can only plot images that have been rendered using the CHANGE RENDERVIEW command and not the RENDER VIEW command For more information see PLOT DOT in online command help Plotting the Assembly Structure You can plot the assembly structure of an active assembly using the Plot Assembly Tree option You can plot the assembly structure directly to the plotter device or save the vector output to a standard CGM file You can choose to plot a component node sub assembly of the assembly struct
283. pplied CVMACs 11 19 Supplied CVMAC Programs 11 19 Query 11 19 Bill of Material 11 19 Generate Assembly Structure Entities 11 19 Output All Attribute Information 11 20 Creating a CVMAC Executable 11 20 11 21 Link and Compile CVMAC Procedures Creating CVMAC Executables 11 21 Procedure 11 21 Documenting the Assembly Creating an Assembly Drawing Document 12 2 Significance of the Active Adrawing 12 2 Generating Hidden Line Representation HLR 12 3 Creating an Adrawing Document 12 3 Example 12 4 12 5 Generating HLR Using HIDE OBJECT HLR Commands 12 5 Removing Hidden Lines 12 6 To Access HLR 12 6 Assembly Structure Display Results 12 14 12 15 Restoring Hidden Lines Updating the HLR Image 12 16 Generating HLR Using CADDShade Il 12 17 File Structure and the Shade Hide Picture File Preparing to Use CADDShade II 12 17 12 17 Generating CADDShade II HLR 12 18 12 21 Dimensioning and Annotating Inserting Dimensions and Annotation 12 22 12 22 Establishing Associativity Default Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Contents xv Inserting Dimensions Regenerating Dimensions Detailing Models in CAMU Plotting Plotting the CADDS Graphics Window Plotting the CADDShade Image Plotting the
284. ptions nR oy _ look n feel_1 205 unlock hilite_1 a unlock blank_1 a Unlock Vview_1 unlock_unviewed_ 1 Component Instance look n feel_1 Locked By you ganga Model ROOT Revision Status Mot Active Please note The CAMU Status Window is hidden when the Assembly Tree is displayed A horizontal divider divides the Assembly Tree Window into two portions The upper portion contains the Assembly Structure and the lower portion the status window The status window displays information about the selected node in the assembly structure 1 12 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Introduction to Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Assembly Tree Window By clicking and dragging the button near the right end of the divider you can move the divider vertically to adjust the sizes of the upper and lower portions of the window Please note By moving the divider vertically you cannot reduce the height of the assembly structure display below a minimum value The Assembly Structure consists of a root node of an active assembly along with its first level child nodes You can expand any node by right clicking the node and choosing the Expand All option on the shortcut menu The types and states of the component instance nodes of the Assembly Structure are represented by different icons as shown in the following table Table 1 1 Node Representation in the Assembly Tree Icon Node Type and State Lo
285. ptions a file named tree cgmis created automatically in your CADDS create directory If you specify the Device option without the CGMFile option the tree cgm file is created in the directory specified by the environment variable CV_AW_TMP_DIR In both cases any existing tree cgm file is overwritten 3 Click Apply on the Plot History Tree property sheet to generate the plot output You can also use the supplied CVMAC tree routine to generate entities in the CADDS Graphics window that reflect the contents of the assembly structure see Generate Assembly Structure Entities on page 11 19 Once generated plot using the technique described in Plotting the CADDS Graphics Window on page 12 27 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 12 31 Plotting the Part History Tree You can plot the history tree of an active part using the Plot History Tree option You can plot the history tree directly to the plotter device or save the vector output to a standard CGM file You can choose to plot a node of the history tree along with its dependent nodes Set the value of the CVUPS_TEXT_OUT environment variable to yes in caddsrc or caddsrc_local file to enable plotting of hardtext Please note The Plot History Tree option is available only in the Parametric Assembly environment To plot the history tree 1 Choose the Drawing option on the top bar 2 Choose the Plot History Tree option on the Drawing menu The Pl
286. r Files for the attribute definitions program are in the subdirectory BOM Generate Assembly Structure Entities The tree CVMAC creates a graphical assembly structure in the active CADDS part to mimic the assembly structure It creates CADDS model mode wireframe entities in the active part normally an Adrawing To run this program you must be in a part Using the program choose the layers on which to place the relation lines component text and component boxes You may choose a rectangular or a chamfered box This program is specifically designed to enable you to plot the assembly structure Files for the program to plot the assembly structure program are in the subdirectory tree Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 11 19 Defining Nongraphic Information for the Assembly Generating Output Using Supplied CVMACs Output All Attribute Information The amattrs CVMAC outputs all attribute information associated with a selected object The object can be a component component instance relation or relation instance Identify the object using its ID or its name and object type In the output attributes beginning with a pound sign are internal attributes Creating a CVMAC Executable Use this procedure to create a CVMAC executable Examples for each step are shown When an absolute path name is not specified CVMAC assumes the path of the create directory For further information about any CVMAC commands s
287. r details refer the online command help for the command MIRROR COMPONENT With the same example suppose the mirror copy is to be positioned at location 10 10 0 and rotated about Z axis through the location 10 10 0 by an angle of 45 00 degrees To do so give the following command at the command line Mirror Component Ciname fork assy_1 PARENTCiname handle fork_ 1 Newcnamesuffix lhs Modelnamesuffix lhs Copy Yes Plane Axis Free loc 10 0 0 loc 3 10 0 Modeleroptions yes loc 10 10 0 Rotate Angle 45 0000 Axis Z loc 10 10 0 Go Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 7 23 Changing the Assembly Structure Mirroring a Component The resultant geometry after the mirror copy has been viewed is shown in the figure below Figure 7 11 Mirror copied geometry with specified orientation 7 24 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Changing the Assembly Structure Changing a Reference Assembly Changing a Reference Assembly Choose the Change Assembly option from the COMP ASSY task set to make changes to areference assembly that appears within your active assembly With the Change Assembly option you can do the following e Detach the reference assembly from its old parent and attach it to a new parent e Change the name of the reference assembly as it appears in your active assembly The name of the external assembly does not change e Change the instance name of the
288. r moving to the Explicit and Parametric modeling environments as well as other environments Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 1 25 Introduction to Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Assembly Environment Task Sets When you move to different environments for example from Explicit to Parametric modeling the view state within the Graphics window is maintained The ASSEMBLY PAR ASSEMBLY EXP and COMP ASSY menus and task sets are illustrated on the following pages Please note Ifa menu option is hazed you cannot select it You can move to another environment task set such as Parametric Modeling from CAMU 1 Select ASSEMBLY PAR or whatever environment is active from the top left corner of the active task set Figure 1 5 Moving to the Other Environment Groups MODELING ASSEMBLY PAR 2 Select the desired environment task set from the resultant menu Figure 1 6 Moving to Other Environments and Task Sets MODE LIN G ASSEMBLY IPAP ASSEMBLY IESP seal a Caray G g CONSTRAINTS CUSTOM 1 26 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Introduction to Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Assembly Environment Task Sets Figure 1 7 Accessing the Constraints Task Set from Assembly in Parametric MODE LIH C MODE LIH G eovsteamrs eonstRaINTs CONSTRAINTS PH CONSTRAINTS Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 1 27 Introduct
289. r the name of the component instance you want to copy in the Component Instance field in one of the following ways e Select the component from the structure or select the model instance from the graphics window e Type in the component instance name 3 Enter the parent component to which you want the copies to be attached in the Parent field in one of the following ways e Select the component from the structure using middle mouse button e Type the name of the parent component in the parent field 4 To give the copy a class name different from the original component instance enter the new class name in the New Name field 5 Specify the Prefix to be used while copying the component across assemblies to resolve naming conflicts Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 7 13 Changing the Assembly Structure Copying a Component 6 To make multiple copies of the component instance select the n field Use the calculator to enter the number of instances of the copy you want to make 7 To associate the newly created component instance s with a different model you must first change the component class name in Step 4 8 To supply the different model name type it in the Model field Or to generate a list of models in your CVPATH click the List button and then select the model name from the list that appears Please note The View and Position options enables you to see and locate the associated model
290. raints Figure 6 2 Select Assemble property sheet SELECT SSEMELE Apply For more information see Solving Parametric Positioning Constraints on page 6 32 Parametric Positioning Tools The parametric positioning capability allows you to position components by inference using positioning constraints such as mate align and orient Thus when a component moves in an assembly the new positions of affected components can be recalculated such that the positioning constraints are satisfied When Does Solving Occur Parametric positions can be updated automatically or manually To update automatically first issue the Select Assemble On command See Automatic Assembly on page 6 32 for detail on which commands initiate solving Use the Assemble Component command to update parametric positions manually see Manual Request to Assemble on page 6 32 Understanding Solving Process Order The order of solution is from right to left or lowest level to highest level Thus the positioning constraints are solved from the leaf components rightmost components to the root component leftmost component 6 4 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Parametric Positioning Understanding Parametric Positioning In this section a truck assembly illustrates parametric positioning The subassembly frame assy_1 consists of several subassemblies such as 3 48 studassy_1 5 40 studassy_1 and so forth an
291. reference assembly as it appears in your active assembly e Activate and change any aspect of the reference assembly within an active main assembly e Change the revision of the reference assembly e Completely change the external assembly Please note You can activate and edit a reference assembly from the active main assembly by locking a child component of the associated assembly instance The act of locking any child of a reference assembly instance activates the associated assembly database _db see Editing an External Assembly on page 7 27 The root node of a reference assembly is called an assembly instance It is seen in a bold line font It is an assembly instance not a component instance see Adding Existing Assemblies to Your Assembly on page 3 21 You can change the structure orientations attributes and model geometry associated with components in a reference assembly provided you can lock the impacted components or attributes Please note The CHANGE ASSEMBLY command is valid for reference assembly instances and not to the assemblies added with the Copy option of Add Assembly When you add an assembly as a copy it becomes a subassembly of the active assembly all though you had created it using Add Component There is no association back to the original assembly on disk Use Change Component option to make changes to a subassembly added with the Copy option Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide a
292. rence Preface Window Managers and the User Interface According to the window manager that you use the look and feel of the user interface in CADDS can change Refer to the following table Look and Feel of User Interface Elements User Interface Common Desktop Environment CDE Window Manager Other Than CDE on Element on Solaris and HP Solaris HP and Windows Option button ON Round filled in the center ON Diamond filled OFF Round empty OFF Diamond empty Toggle key ON Square with a check mark ON Square filled OFF Square empty OFF Square empty Online User Documentation Online documentation for each book is provided in HTML if the documentation CD ROM is installed You can view the online documentation in the following ways e From an HTML browser e From the Information Access button on the CADDS desktop or the Local Data Manager LDM Please note The LDM is valid only for standalone CADDS You can also view the online documentation directly from the CD ROM without installing it From an HTML Browser 1 Navigate to the directory where the documents are installed For example usr apl cadds data html htmldoc UNIX Drive usr apl cadds data html htmldoc Windows 2 Click mainmenu html A list of available CADDS documentation appears 3 Click the book title you want to view From the Information Access Button on the CADDS Desktop or LDM 1 Start
293. rts for mirroring but the names of the mirrored part should follow the lt source partname gt lt suffix gt format You can do this by renaming the old CADDS parts to the desired format Here the system searches for the specified part name in the directories specified under the active CVPATH You may not get expected result with the old mirrored parts Example Mirroring a Component in the Parametric Environment by Creating a Part Database Shown below is a assembly structure of component fork assy_1 containing instances of fork_2 and fork shaft_1 Suppose you want to mirror copy fork ass_1 with handle fork_1 as parent component by specifying a mirroring plane using 2 points Figure 7 6 Assembly Structure before mirror copying BE o o o e fork i shafts _ pcfixa ef Torkel Fork asse_ eat V fork shaft_i hand le fork_4 ane aan Ni handle_4 I hand le 4ssy_1 K e E support shafe_ 1 The top view of the actual geometry related to component fork assy_1 is shown below Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 7 19 Changing the Assembly Structure Mirroring a Component Figure 7 7 Geometrical representation of component fork assy_1 This Given below is the procedure to mirror and copy the component fork assy_1 1 Choose the MIRROR COMPONENT option from the COMP ASSY task set The Mirror Component property sheet appears see Figure 7
294. ry is selected it s possible that User B may attempt to delete one of the components that User A is using as a positional constraint Only after User A files User B can delete components If one user deletes a component that participates in a constraint the Modify Position Constraints menu indicates that the constraint is no longer valid For example if User B s actions make User A s constraints invalid the feedback menu see Modify Position Constraints on page 6 17 shows the invalid constraint No other user can create a constraint using geometry from the deleted component even if the first user has not yet filed the assembly 6 6 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Parametric Positioning Creating Positioning Constraints Creating Positioning Constraints You can create positioning constraints using options such as Mate Align Orient and Fix in the Constrain Component command see Using Constrain Component on page 6 13 An example is provided in Sample Procedure for Creating Constraints on page 6 22 Locking You must lock the nearest common parent For example in the assembly shown below the parent component piston assy_1 is locked in order to specify positioning constraints between piston_1 conrod_1 and endcap_1 To specify positioning constraints between piston assy_2 and piston assy_3 lock the root component too Assembly Structure pistoni niston
295. s See Viewing and Positioning the Component on page 3 12 for more information Positioning the Copied Component When you copy a parent component and its children the parametric positioning constraints between its child components are also copied However the constraints defined between the subassembly or component being copied and other subassemblies or components are not copied For parametric positioning you must specify a location to initially view the copied component You can then specify multiple parametric positioning options For example you can specify the Mate option once followed by the Align option twice before executing the command The applicable positional constraints are solved and the component is copied parametrically Your input methods syntactically are COPY COMPONENT Parametric lt loc gt Mate Offset lt real gt Plane lt face gt lt face gt COPY COMPONI COPY COMPONI lt face gt COPY COMPONI COPY COMPONI COPY COMPON COPY COMPONI lt face gt COPY COMPONENT Parametric lt loc gt Insert lt face gt Hole lt face gt COPY COMPONENT Parametric lt loc gt Fix Ciname lt node gt lt cplane gt Ciname lt node gt lt cplane gt NT Parametric lt loc gt Mate RevSurface lt face gt lt face gt NT Parametric lt loc gt Align Offset lt real gt Plane lt face gt Z T Parametric lt loc gt Align RevSurface lt face gt lt face gt T Parametric lt loc gt Align Edge lt edge g
296. s performed further should affect only the selected component node performed further should affect the selected component node and all its g Specifies that the lock unlock blank unblank and highlight operations sub nodes Refresh a Click this option to refresh the Assembly Tree Window whenever required Please note The Refresh option refreshes only the display of the assembly tree in the Assembly Tree Window This option is different from the REFRESH ASSEMBLY command 1 22 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Introduction to Concurrent Assembly Mock Up CAMU Top Bar Options CAMU Top Bar Options The options available from the CAMU Top Bar are the same as those in the Explicit and Parametric modeling environments For information about these options see Introduction to CADDS 5 The following options of the top menu bar are specific to CAMU e FILE Provides options for filing exiting and quitting the assembly structure Adrawing s and or model s and for exiting CADDS e ADRAWING Provides commands specific to Adrawings including Activate New Activate Old Change Delete Toggle Exploded View and Delete Exploded View Selections are available for plotting and for changing the background color You have choices for Copy and Enlarge in the Explicit environment e COMP ASSY Provides graphics display options for components including Change Layer Highlight Component View Component B
297. s to the database This means that if A files or refreshes he cannot see B s changes If instead of refreshing the assembly B had filed the changes they would be saved in the database A refresh would have been done automatically for him showing A s changes The figure above would look the same but B s changes would be saved A cannot see B s changes until B files and A files or refreshes the assembly Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 5 29 Working in an Existing Assembly Several Users Can Work Concurrently e B files then A refreshes the assembly B selects File Assembly committing changes to the database When A refreshes then only sees B s changes Updating Parametric Positions After Modeling Changes If the assembly contains parametric positioning constraints see Updating Positions After Modeling Change on page 6 37 the users must file the model and the assembly before their effects can be seen by other users For example A and B are working concurrently in an assembly A parametrically positions several parts A activates one of the parts changes some of its parameters regenerates the model and files the model A then files the assembly in order to see the positional effects of the modeling change B sees the changes when he either files or refreshes the assembly To facilitate this scenario set the following in your caddsrc or caddsrc local before invoking a CA
298. sassociation with the unviewed component After using the UNVIEW COMPONENT command if you view the same unviewed component using the VIEW COMPONENT command the dimension retains its original color The red color of the dimension changes to the original color and the encircled slash symbol of the dimension is removed e If you change a component using the CHANGE COMPONENT command and if the topology of the new component differs from the topology of the original component the dimensions associated with the changed component are disassociated and are marked If there is no difference between the topology of the new component and the original component the dimensions associated with the changed component remain the same If you remove a component using the REMOVE COMPONENT command the dimensions associated with the removed component are disassociated Detailing Models in CAMU When you activate a model CAMU automatically activates a drawing in the model database named MDRAW Do not detail models in their MDRAW drawing You should never use a model s MDRAW drawing as an engineering drawing Views that you manually define on the MDRAW are never saved The purpose of the MDRAW is only to facilitate visually seamless movement as you move between active models It acts like a mimic of what was visible in the last active part Detail a model in any drawing other then MDRAW To activate another drawing in the active model perform the following m
299. se a search through the CVPATH for the associated model to that component will be performed even though one may not exist Special guidelines are listed below If the subassembly branch contains models from two or more component areas ownership of the branch must be decided and agreed upon For model geometry of a current design and or another possible design the new proposal must also be shown in the assembly structure 3 6 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Creating a New Assembly Building the Assembly Structure Where subassembly branches contain derivative models important derivatives based on worst case conditions must be shown in the assembly structure Naming Conventions You should establish and adhere to a standardized naming convention Each of the following requires such a convention Models e The model name should match the actual part number it represents e Derivative parts created using Insert Ppart should be named to indicate the source model s name Drawings Drawing names should adhere to either your existing drawing name conventions for example sheet 10 3 or some other agreed upon convention Assembly database A sample naming convention could consist of three or four distinct items an assembly type abbreviation a project name or code a four digit functional group code and optionally a brief descriptor Your convention could be simpler or more complex Adrawi
300. sing the middle mouse button select either endcap_1 or conrod_1 as the base component In this example we will select the connecting rod se Component Jeonrod_t The system immediately processes your request and recognizes conrod_1 as the base component for the piston assy_1 subassembly 9 Select the Mate option from the Constrain Component property sheet The property sheet updates as follows Constrain Component Apply Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 6 25 Parametric Positioning Using Constrain Component The following two lines appear in the Command window Select two geometries and apply Constrain Component Ciname piston assy_1 Mate 10 Specify an Offset distance of 0 Use the calculator to specify the offset distance value The default value is 0 Please note You cannot specify a negative value for the offset distance 11 The command line immediately updates as follows Constrain Component Ciname piston assy_1 Mate Offset 0 You can now select pairs of geometry to mate and align In this example specify a mating alignment using a single pair of viewed entities 12 Select the shared face between the connecting rod and endcap 6 26 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Parametric Positioning Using Constrain Component In this example the connecting rod is specified first 14 Select the second component Use the Ambiguous menu to se
301. ssembly Structure Reordering a Component Reordering a Component You can change the order in which sibling components appear in the assembly structure For example you can reposition components in the structure such that their instance numbering is consecutive or they are closer to mating components or subassemblies You can reorder components in the active main assembly as well as components in an active reference assembly Reordering does not change the position of the associated model s It only affects the appearance of the assembly structure The components you are reordering need not be instances of the same class If the component is also the parent component of a subassembly the entire subassembly remains attached to its parent with the parent in its new position in the structure All affected components must be locked Placing a Component above Another in the Main Assembly To place a component above a sibling component in the main assembly follow these steps 1 Open the REORDER COMPONENT property sheet 2 Select the Above icon on the property sheet 3 Using the left mouse button select the component instance you want to reposition Its name appears in the Component field in the Component Instance row 4 Using the middle mouse button select the component instance you want to place it above Its name appears in the Component field in the Above row 7 32 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu R
302. ssociated with Wheel Follow this procedure to locate the MSO for the new model associated with wheel 1 With both bracket model instances properly positioned in the assembly insert a construction wireframe line between the two bracket instances Use the construction line to specify the MSO for the model associated with wheel The resulting figure is shown on the following page Figure 8 13 Pulley Assembly after Inserting the Construction Line Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 8 15 Defining Assembly Geometry Locating Model Space Origin for a New Model 2 Select either the Translate icon or the Orient icon to position the wheel component instance At the prompt specify the midpoint or origin of the construction line as the MSO for the wheel component Use either the Translate icon or the Orient icon to position the wheel Since the model geometry does not yet exist for the wheel component use the handlepart graphics to visually check the placement of the component Figure 8 14 Move Component Property Sheet Hove Component Reference Coaponent Instance li k Cancel 8 16 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Defining Assembly Geometry Locating Model Space Origin for a New Model Figure 8 15 Locating Model Space Origin for the New Model Associated with Wheel 3 After the MSO is specified for the wheel component you can activate the model associated with the
303. ssy subassembly while User B works on the journal assy subassembly and User C works on the side assy subassembly To specify parametric positioning constraints between the components making up journal assy User B must lock journal assy This allows him to work on the subassembly and prevents other users such as User A from doing so To constrain two leaf components you must lock their nearest common parent You do not need to lock the components themselves Please note For more information on locking see Locking Components Attribute Groups and Models on page 5 31 For more information on multiuser CAMU see Several Users Can Work Concurrently on page 5 27 Path Locking Path locking facilitates creating and revising positional constraints in multiuser CAMU If one user User A is defining constraints on a particular sub assembly then other users cannot are prevented from change the structure of that sub assembly until User A files saves Path locking is implicit behavior in the parametric positioning function Consider the following Two users are working on the same assembly User A is creating constraints on a particular sub assembly User B is deleting components from the assembly tree User A creates constraints using geometry from two components He has not yet filed these constraints Since parametric positioning requires you to only lock the sub assembly being constrained and not the components from which geomet
304. stance field 3 Click Apply The Apply field changes to Abort and the following menu appears Orient ation Done 4 Click Orientation An icon menu appears which provides options for orienting a component Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 8 31 Defining Assembly Geometry Moving a Component Orientation Procedure The following figure shows the Orientation menu with a brief description of each option Information on the use of each option follows Figure 8 21 Orientation Menu Orientation 45 0000 Rotating a Component around an Axis passing through the Origin of the Part Use the following options to rotate a component around x y and z axes or an axis defined using two locations Rotates the component around the x axis passing through the origin of the component Rotates the component around the y axis passing through the origin of the component 8 32 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Defining Assembly Geometry Moving a Component Rotates the component around the z axis passing through the origin of the component Rotates the component around an axis passing through the origin of the component and parallel to an axis defined by any two locations you specify Rotating a Component around an Axis passing through a Selected Location Use the following options to rotate a component around the x y and z axes passing through a selec
305. state for example balloon callouts text and reference dimensions for an exploded subassembly see DDRAW on page 5 7 e MDRAW a CADDS drawing file activated automatically when you activate a model It is used only by CAMU to enable seamless view display when moving from being active in an Adrawing to a model or from one model to another An MDRAW view state is always inherited and never preserved see MDRAW on page 5 7 5 6 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Working in an Existing Assembly Moving Between Models and Adrawings Moving Between Models and Adrawings Moving between active and suspended Adrawings or models or both is called node switching This enables seamless movement between Adrawings and models such that what you see in the graphics window before the switch the number of views scale orientation of views viewed model instances view render mode setting spaceball and mouse based dynamic view manipulation settings and clip model settings is identical to what you see after you activate the model Please note You activate a model using the ACTIVATE MODEL command or property sheet You activate an Adrawing using the ACTIVATE ADRAWING command or property sheet When you move from an active Adrawing or model the currently active Adrawing or model is suspended You can then move to e Anew Adrawing or a new model e A suspended model e A suspended Adrawing What You
306. suspends the model associated with conrod_4 which was previously active An Ei icon appears next to all instances of conrod indicating that their associated model is suspended Activating another model does not change the view settings such as the view orientation scale number of views viewed model instances view render mode setting spaceball and mouse based dynamic view manipulation settings or clip model settings in the graphics window Please note Activate a suspended model by selecting the component instance to which it is associated Suspending previously activated models lets you experiment with changes in the context of the assembly and decide later which changes you want to save or discard when you file the assembly Figure 5 5 Graphics Window after Activating the Model Instance Piston_4 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 5 13 Working in an Existing Assembly Moving Between Models and Adrawings Figure 5 6 Assembly Structure after Activating the Model Instance Piston_4 embly Tree File Edit View Options new crankassy_1 a Crankshaft piston assy a Conrod_1 a endcap_1 a piston_1 piston as conrod_2 endcap_2 piston_2 piston assy_ conrod_3 endcap_3 a piston_3 piston 4 a conrod_4 a endcap_4 Changing the View Orientation to Front The view orientation is changed to Front to further demonstrate how the MDRAW preserves the view state of the assembly in th
307. systems explode assemblies or display parts in different locations and orientations See Chapter 10 Adrawings and Alternate Views e Manage the overall development of your product by accessing multiple parts simultaneously You can work on one part while viewing other parts in the assembly You can switch readily between different parts This allows you to design each part or subassembly in the context of the assembly See Chapter 8 Defining Assembly Geometry e Define and associate non graphic information about each piece of the structure such as bill of materials information physical properties or labor tracking data You can extract such information using CVMAC programs See Chapter 11 Defining Nongraphic Information for the Assembly e Create Assembly Drawing documents containing representations of geometry with HLR dimensions text labels and other annotations See Chapter 12 Documenting the Assembly e Create a new assembly database from any subassembly within the active main assembly including a new reference assembly You can optionally import the selected subassembly as a reference assembly within the active main assembly See Creating a New Assembly by Exporting on page 3 31 A Look at CAMU The following sections show you the CAMU interface including e The Local Data Manager LDM menu It appears when you first access CAMU e The CAMU interface showing a sample assembly e T
308. t Flip lt edge gt Flip T Parametric lt loc gt Align Point lt point gt lt point gt T Parametric lt loc gt Orient Angle lt angle gt Plane lt face gt Z Hof Zz N 7 14 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Changing the Assembly Structure Mirroring a Component Mirroring a Component You can mirror a component or a subassembly about a plane using the MIRROR COMPONENT command You can perform the mirroring in two different ways e Part mirroring Here the left handed parts are created and associated with mirrored component You can create a mirror copy of the source component The left handed mirrored parts associated with the created mirror copy of the component do have associative relationship with the parts of original component You can disassociate these mirrored parts optionally For details please see Update Ppart and Disassociate Ppart sections from Parametric Modeling User Guide and Menu Reference During mirroring both the structure as well as the graphics are mirrored When you mirror a subassembly containing position constraints these constraints get transferred to the mirrored subassembly Please note The component instance to be mirrored should not contain any reference instance In addition if the assembly to be mirrored has parametric positioning constraints the mirrored parts should be created using either INSERT PPART command with mirr
309. t See online command help for more information about these commands EXIT CADDS 5 You receive a warning message that you will be returned to system level and if you want to save your changes Select Yes to save changes and exit the assembly and return to operating system level Select NO to not file and thereby lose your changes exit the assembly and return to the operating system level Select Cancel to stay in the assembly and not file Please note Do not use the EXIT CADDS 5 option while active in an assembly The session may not terminate completely Instead use the File and Exit option Exit CADDS from the LDM Please note When issuing File or File amp Exit Assembly the system immediately returns a prompt and allows input of commands even though the application is still under the process of filing and the commands are ignored This can lead you into believing that the session is hung Therefore when filing or exiting an assembly wait for the message that the assembly and the model parts have been filed before attempting to execute further commands Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 4 5 Filing an Assembly Filing or Quitting Selected Adrawings or Models Filing or Quitting Selected Adrawings or Models You can specify which items to file see Filing with Options on page 4 6 or quit see Quitting with Options on page 4 8 using options on the FILE menu The New Model
310. t appears For example if you select a component named wagon_1 press and hold the right mouse button then choose Add Component from the pull down menu the following property sheet appears with the parent name wagon_1 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 3 9 Creating a New Assembly Adding a New Component to the Structure Figure 3 2 Add Component property sheet Add Component Reference Component Parent gt i wagon_i Component Frame Hodel cancel Please note Ifa parentis not specified the component you add is attached to the root component 5 Select in the Component field 6 Type a component name for example frame When you apply the property sheet a component instance named frame_1 is added to the wagon_1 component 7 To add more than one instance of the component place the cursor in the n field and click the left mouse button The calculator appears for you to specify the number of component instances you want to create 8 If the model associated with the component has a different name than the component name type the model name in the Model field See page 3 11 to learn more about using the Model option when associating a component with a standard or master model Please note If no model name is specified the component is automatically associated with a model of the same name You can if desired add a component without any model associated with it by settin
311. t the ckCAD executable and its license information does exists at the path specified by DB_CHECKING environment variable setenv DB CHECKING usr local bin 2 6 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Configuring Concurrent Assembly Mock Up caddsrc local File Information e The variable anon in the dfstab file enables multiuser access to the ODB_DAEMON process The dfstab file contains list of share commands to be executed while booting The share commands allows multi user sharing of remote mount disks Set the variable annon to 0 in the dfstab file in order to have multi user access to the ODB_DAEMON process If it is not set to 0 CADDS can abort anon 0 e Setting the USE_CAMU_STATUS_WINDOW variable to yes enables you to use the CAMU status window For better performance during locking and unlocking of components set this variable to no The default value is yes setenv USE_CAMU_STATUS_WINDOW no Please note The CAMU status window is displayed along with the Assembly Structure Window only So to display the CAMU status window you must set environmental variable AD_C_SERVER_ENABLED to no in addition to setting the variable USE_CAMU_STATUS_WINDOW Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 2 7 Configuring Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Configuring Multi User CAMU Configuring Multi User CAMU CAMU can be configured so that multiple users can concurrently access
312. tains four pushbuttons e Apply Applies changes made with the Attribute Editor during the current session Changes are saved in the active assembly structure e Cancel Cancels all changes made with the Attribute Editor during the current session Changes are not saved in the active assembly structure e Verify Displays the edited object s attribute information in the Text window e Help Displays a help file for using the Attribute Editor Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 11 11 Defining Nongraphic Information for the Assembly Editing Attributes The second strip from the top of the editor contains the selections Create Set and Define Value These selections appear hazed when the editor first appears Below the second strip the editor displays four columns of information for the component instance or assembly instance you specified on the Edit Attributes property sheet The bottom strip of the Attribute Editor displays prompts for you to follow as you edit attributes Group Set Attribute Definition Attribute Value Information Infomnalion Information Information Attribate Editor UUO Create get Define Value batt SELECT group 11 12 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Defining Nongraphic Information for the Assembly Editing Attributes 1 Select an attribute group name from the group column The selected attribute group appears highlighted The Creat
313. te C directory 2 Before you run the cvmcomp compiler command be aware that all of the output compiled files are placed in the CADDS create directory If you want to maintain the CVMAC files in a directory other than your parts directory temporarily change the CADDS create directory to the cvmac subdirectory Edit the CVPATH in your local caddsrc file as shown in the following example For example setenv CVPATH SHOME parts cvmac C Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 11 21 Defining Nongraphic Information for the Assembly Generating Output Using Supplied CVMACs 3 Change to the cvmac directory list the directory contents and issue the cvmcomp command for every file contained in the query subdirectory as shown in the following example cd usr2 pam parts cvmac query ls addvalue convert findcomp gettree has attr prntpage askuser compare display getattr cvmcomp addvalue cvmcomp askuser 4 Issue the cvmcomp command for every file in both the BOM subdirectory and the tree subdirectory of the cvmac directory in the same way you did for the files in the query subdirectory 5 Make a link file for the query routine Create a text file as shown in the following example vi linkquery lt cr gt IMAGE usr2 pam parts cvmac doquery MAIN usr2 pam parts cvmac addvalue M usr2 pam parts cvmac askuser usr2 pam parts cvmac compare usr2 pam parts cvmac display usr2 pam parts cvmac g
314. ted location or around an axis defined using two locations Rotates the component around the x axis passing through the selected location Rotates the component around the y axis passing through the selected location Rotates the component around the z axis passing through the selected location Rotates the component around an axis defined by any two locations The rotation vector is taken to be along the axis directed from first location to the second On specifying a rotation for a component the rotation is done immediately You can see the component rotate When you specify a location for the part you can see the result of the rotation You need not specify a location as the component is already located In case the component is not located the component rotates and remains unviewed You can also rotate incrementally Each rotation specified is added to the component s current rotation about that axis Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 8 33 Defining Assembly Geometry Moving a Component Translating Aligning and Adjusting Components Translates the component by a displacement defined by specifying two locations Aligns the components vector by vector Also rotates or translates the component Adjusts the components using two planes each defined by three locations Also translates and or rotates the components along x y and z axes The RESET option resets the component s orientation
315. th any of the shade or HLR rendering options and file the part Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Configuring Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Configuring Multi User CAMU Refer to the multi user diagram shown below Figure 2 1 The Multi User Process DB_DAEMON_HOST ODB_ DAEMON When user files his changes get written to assembly db db When user refreshes assembly db is read into his active version 4CTate 45Sembly ACTHate ASSembly S4CT ate 45Senbhly USER 1 LISER 2 USER 3 ODB Object Data Base Administration Tool The Unix level command odb_admin apl cadds scripts deletes users from the ODB_SERVER list who have crashed out of their assembly In the event of an abnormal termination of a multi user CAMU session the tool can detach specified users and release any associated locked components This avoids having to restart the ODB_SERVER for everyone The command simply prompts Enter the full path assembly name and then clears the non active users The odb_admin tool also allows users to connect to the assembly s ODB_SERVER process To run the tool execute the usr ap1 cadds scripts odb_admin script on any supported UNIX workstation The required server host is determined through the caddsrc or caddsrc 1local file Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 2 19 Configuring Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Configuring Multi User CAMU The
316. th the Master Model 3 16 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Creating a New Assembly Multiple Occurrences of the Same Item Multiple Occurrences of the Same Item The same subassembly or piece part can appear in your assembly any number of times The assembly structure shows all instances of the piece part or subassembly The components representing these instances have the same class name followed by an underscore and number representing the instance For example the figure below shows an assembly named wagon_1 that has two wheel subassemblies attached to the frame each of which have a component axle_1 and component axle_2 Figure 3 5 Assembly wagon_1 with two wheel subassemblies Assembly Stucture If a model is associated with the component you can look at the graphic representation of the model in the CADDS Graphics Window Just as the structure window shows two instances of the class axle the CADDS Graphics window shows two graphic representations of axle Each instance of the wheel subassembly can have its own unique location and orientation in the assembly and its own associated attributes user defined non graphic information Initially all instances of the model are viewed at the same place A Parent Component Having Multiple Instances If more than one instance of the specified parent component exists the component you create is attached to every instance of the parent The system assigns i
317. that the dimension system is overconstrained or is in a configuration that the solver cannot handle It implies that one or more constraints need to be removed Cannot Solve This generally indicates that the data is inconsistent To resolve you should delete some constraints and recreate them with different values You may also see this message if the data is underconstrained and the solver has chosen defaults which do not lead to a solution In this case adding a few more constrains may help resolve the problem Not Changed This indicates that component positions have not been moved due to conflicts with other components or constraints that may be overconstrained or that the solver could not solve Satisfied This indicates that the constraint is solved completely Changing Offset Value You can change the offset value of a selected constraint available from the runtime list To do so proceed as follows 1 Click on a constraint from the available runtime list of which you want to change the offset value 2 Specify the new offset value in the Offset field using calculator e If the selected constraint is of type Mate or Align the value will be in drawing units e If the selected constraint is of type Orient the value will be angle in degrees 3 Select Apply option to change the offset value of the selected constraint The model geometry associated with selected constraint is highlighted according to the condition of the
318. the assembly structure node Node Offset Specifies the offset value to use during plotting Rotate Specifies to rotate the assembly structure by 90 degrees before plotting 12 30 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Documenting the Assembly Plotting e CGMEFile Specifies the file name of the output CGM file Do not specify the CGM extension for the output file e Mod File Specifies the file that contains the print and plot attributes Use this file to print the additional attributes of the assembly structure nodes The additional attributes for the assembly structure node are e full part name of model associated with the component e active status of the component instance e db_id of the component instance e name of the component You can also specify the plot attributes using the mod file instead of specifying them on the Plot Assembly Tree property sheet Please note The plot attributes that you specify in the mod file override the options you select on the Plot Assembly Tree property sheet A copy of the mod file is available at cadds scripts templates xmlcamutree cfg Modify this file as per your requirement and use it to generate the plot output e Device Specifies the output plotter device The plotting device name appears in the Device field To use another plotter select the required plotter from the available list Please note If you do not specify the CGMFile and the Device o
319. the command modifier AINAME Rigid assembly An assembly in which the relative position of components with respect to one another does not change A rigid subassembly behaves like a group Root node The highest level component in the assembly structure It is the leftmost component in the Assembly Structure window representing the entire assembly It is the highest component in the structure hierarchy Each assembly can have only one root node If you attempt to activate ACTIVATE MODEL the root node for the sole purpose of performing parametric interpart constraint operations CAMU activates a model named root Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Glossary 5 Glossary Subassembly node See Parent component Tree See Assembly structure View A window into 3D model space at any scale orientation and location on a drawing Views can be layer specific A CADDS drawing can contain many views Viewstate A viewstate contains the information about the layer offset layermask and the view on or off state each Adrawing contains it s own unique viewstate For example one Adrawing may display VIEW COMPONENT all associated models in an exploded or alternate location state Another may display VIEW COMPONENT one subassembly only in the standard or actual location state Note CAMU is designed such that viewstate is never saved within a model MDRAW ACTIVATE MODEL but is always saved within an Adraw
320. the parent node you specify in the active assembly e Add a copy of the external assembly The copied assembly becomes an integral part of your active assembly It is no longer associated with the original assembly database from which it was copied Each method adds a component representing the root node of the external assembly to a parent node you specify in the active assembly The differences between adding an assembly as a reference and adding an assembly as a copy are explained in Reference Assemblies and Copied Assemblies on page 3 22 Reference Assemblies Adding the external assembly as a reference assembly traditionally gives you read only access to it You can view it within your active main assembly change its orientation and location as a unit in model space and change its parent relation However you can lock any component within it change its structure and even activate and change any model associated with its leaf components You can make changes to the reference assembly provided that you can obtain a lock on the desired components For example you can activate the model associated with a component class resident in a reference assembly provided that you can first perform a Lock Component operation on the component instance Please note You can activate and edit a reference assembly from in the active main assembly by locking a child component of the associated assembly instance The act of
321. the same assembly Each user can simultaneously modify different areas of the assembly They can also see the filed modifications of other users in their active version of the assembly after issuing the REFRESH ASSEMBLY command To configure CAMU for a multi user environment do the following Determine which system in the network to designate as the DB_DAEMON_HOST The DB_DAEMON_HOST is set as an environment variable in the CAMU user s caddsrc local file It designates a system on the network that is the server for CAMU multi user assembly access By default this is set to the local system When a common system is designated by more than one user on the network to be the DBB_DAEMON_HOST CAMU allows multiple users to concurrently access and modify assemblies by connecting them to the active main assembly s warehouse process called ODB_SERVER The ODB_SERVER process is started by another process called ODB_DAEMON when an assembly is activated The ODB_DAEMON process is started either when the system is rebooted or manually started by issuing the usr apl cadds scripts db_daemon command at system level By setting the DB_LDAEMON_HOST in the caddsrc local file you are determining on which system the ODB_DAEMON process creates the ODB_SERVER process for the assembly you are activating This happens whether or not you intend to run multi user CAMU For example in caddsrc local setenv DB_DAEMON_HOST systemname
322. the selection of the component and or its associated model graphics 8 44 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Chapter 9 Using Interpart Constraints This chapter describes how to establish constraint relationships between different models in the same assembly The topics are About Interpart Constraints Selecting Variables from a Model to Include in Your Assembly Placing Component Variables in the Active Assembly Constraint Variable Names of Imported Components Preparing to Add Equations Between Variables Establishing Relationships Between Variables Changing Variable Values and Applying the Changes Regenerating the Component Forcing a Variable to Remain Constant Deleting a Variable Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 9 1 Using Interpart Constraints About Interpart Constraints About Interpart Constraints Constraints are a capability of the Parametric modeling environment They allow you to define variables and write equations that define the relationships between variables in models When you design model geometry in the parametric environment of CADDS the system creates parameters that define characteristics of your model With constraints you can define mathematical relationships between parameters When one parameter is changed the other is made to change based on the relationship you established This is described fully in the Parametric Modeling User Guide and M
323. the source and target models is automatic Changes to the source can be seen in the target as follows 1 Activate the source model 2 Make modeling changes and file the model 3 Activate the target model 4 Issue the Update Ppart command For a complete description of this functionality see the Parametric Modeling User Guide and Menu Reference Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 8 5 Defining Assembly Geometry Component Instances and Their Locations Component Instances and Their Locations When you create component instances you have the option of viewing and positioning them in the active Adrawing If you do not position the instances when you create them you can use the Move Component icon Using Move Component option you can Translate Rotate Orient and Position You can view components before positioning them They are viewed at their default locations and you are prompted for additional information to locate them The ways you can change the location of component model instances depend on whether you are in the Parametric or Explicit environment When you change the location of a component instance in the graphics display of the assembly the component you want to position and its parent component must be locked Translate Rotate Orient and Position Component are all available in both the Assembly in Explicit and Assembly in Parametric environments None of these positioning tools can
324. the third column and assign a value to it Press Return after entering a value 6 Click Apply to file the assigned value information Please note Apply the Attribute Editor property sheet when you have finished assigning attribute values for the selected component and before you select another component If you attempt to select another component before you apply the property sheet you may be unable to continue your CADDS session 11 14 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Defining Nongraphic Information for the Assembly Locking Attributes and Attribute Groups Locking Attributes and Attribute Groups To change attribute properties or to edit attributes you must first lock the attribute Select the Lock Attribute icon Figure 11 8 Lock Unlock Agroup property sheet Lock Unlock Agroup il Attribute Group hom Apply Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 11 15 Defining Nongraphic Information for the Assembly Changing Attribute Properties Changing Attribute Properties You can change the properties of an attribute you have created You must lock the attribute To change attribute properties do the following 1 Select the Modify Attribute icon The property sheet appears Figure 11 9 Modify Attribute property sheet Modify Attribute Attribute Group bom Attribute Jpartno Component Instance Only default Apply 2 In the Attribut
325. the user exports the variable d1 9 6 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Using Interpart Constraints Placing Component Variables in the Active Assembly Placing Component Variables in the Active Assembly In this section activate the root component model of your active assembly and import the components representing the models whose variables you want to constrain in the assembly In the example the user is still in the wheel assy assembly 1 Select the root component in the Assembly Structure window 2 Choose Activate Model from the pop up menu In the example the user selects the component wheel_assy_1 and activates the model 3 Select the List Exported and Imported Variable icon to verify the variables marked as exportable in the models Choose Exported from the menu 4 The property sheet appears Type in the name of the model containing the variables you want to verify or click on the List box and select the model from the list 5 A Report Window appears listing variables you exported from each model of your assembly You can export variables from one model at a time The Report window in this example shows the Exportable variables for wheel and axle The output from each List Variable request is appended to the previous output in the Report window until you click Clear Report Window Name Type Status Value mod value Exportahle variables for model WHEEL mrad Length Free 0 219000 M
326. they were imported The following pages discuss the rules by which these names are assigned Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 9 9 Using Interpart Constraints Constraint Variable Names of Imported Components Constraint Variable Names of Imported Components The system assigns extended names to the specified variable s in the imported components according to the following rules Do not use numbers in variable names e The variable name in the assembly is made up of the name of the component three 3 underscores and the name of the variable from the model For example for a variable whose name in the model associated with the top_1 component is LENGTH the corresponding variable in the assembly is named top___LENGTH Assembly Structure indor e Component names can contain periods and dollar signs These characters are not allowed by the constraint system The system substitutes an underscore _ for any of these characters when it creates the extended variable name with one exception Please note Underscores are not allowed in the first position of a constraint variable name If a metacharacter exists in the first position of a component name it is mapped to the letter X in the extended variable name e A numeric character in the first position of a component name causes errors Do not use a numeric as the first character of a component The constraint system interprets the name as a
327. tilities for positioning Move Component property sheet 8 42 Utility construction planes Move Component property sheet 8 42 V Variable 9 4 applying change 9 18 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Index 7 Index changes to model geometry 9 20 changing value of 9 17 deleting 9 23 establishing relationship between 9 14 exporting from active model 9 4 forcing to remain constant 9 22 importing to assembly model 9 7 listing exportable 9 7 name 9 10 placing in the active assembly 9 7 preparing to write equation with 9 12 selecting to export 9 4 types 9 8 Variable anon 2 6 Verify object 7 36 Verify Object property sheet 7 37 Verifying an object 7 36 View component 8 18 property sheet 8 19 View Component property sheet 8 18 View state 10 5 DDRAW 5 7 MDRAW 5 7 Viewing a model in the Explicit environment 1 37 outline geometry 8 20 with View Component 8 18 Viewing and positioning components when component is created 3 12 Viewstates restore 10 14 save 10 13 save restore 10 12 vp_links directory 2 23 crash recovery 2 24 W Window 1 5 accessing functions from 1 28 Assembly Structure 1 5 Attribute Editor 11 11 CADDShade picture window 1 6 CAMU status bar 1 6 CAMU status window 1 6 command buffer 1 5 text window 1 5 Index 8 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference
328. ting Invalid Constraints In this scenario the piston assy has been created by placing a mate and an align constrain between the endcap and the conrod 1 2 You delete some or all of the underlying geometry used to define a constrain or constraints This makes the affected constraints invalid You file or refresh the assembly or attempt to solve the invalid constraints This opens the Unsolved Sub Assemblies menu 6 20 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Parametric Positioning Using Constrain Component 3 You select the piston assy from the list The Modify Position Constraints menu appears 4 You can delete the invalid constraints now Color Scheme CAMU uses colors to indicate the status of positional constraints You can modify the color scheme using an environment variable in your caddsrc local file see caddsrc local File Information on page 2 3 Example Isolate Constraint Problems In this scenario a set of constraints inconsistently overconstrain the assembly You must delete several constraints to solve this problem Consider the crankshaft assembly shown below al You have created three align constraints as follows e Between geometries P1 and P4 belonging to piston assy_1 and piston assy_4 respectively Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 6 21 Parametric Positioning Using Constrain Component e Between geometries P2 and P3 b
329. tion A red vertical line indicates a field in which you enter information The methods used to fill in property sheets are similar to those used in the Explicit and Parametric modeling environments With CAMU you can select a component from the Assembly Structure CAMU property sheets provide input options Rectangular fields on property sheets provide a place for you to fill in other information Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 1 29 Introduction to Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Accessing Functions Filling In Fields on a Property Sheet To move the cursor to a different field on the property sheet either press RETURN key or select the desired box with the help of left mouse button Fill information in a field on a property sheet by typing it in You can also do one of the following depending on the type of information appropriate for the field Figure 1 10 Example of a Property Sheet Add Component Reference Component Parent beel Component I Fall Model H E Revision T View and Position O Family Meaber e Choose a component from the structure Some property sheets require two component entries To fill in the Component field select the component from the assembly structure To fill in the Parent field use the middle mouse button to select the parent component from the assembly structure e Choose an item from a property sheet that appears 1 30 C
330. tions for activating locking or moving the component and opening the reference assembly Assembly Tree Window Toolbar Options You can perform some operations on the selected tree node in the assembly tree using the toolbar options The Assembly Tree Window toolbar contains the following options These options may be classified into two types Unlock Lock pe Locks the selected component node Unblank Unlocks the selected component node Unblanks the seleced component node 1 20 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Introduction to Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Assembly Tree Window Blank e Blanks the selected component node Highlight Ea Highlights the selected component node Display Model Names or Component Names This is a two state toggle button which has two different forms as follows Displays the Component names of all the component nodes Displays the Model names for all the component nodes This option modifies only the display of the node text in the Assembly Tree Window It does not perform any action on the actual assembly Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 1 21 Introduction to Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Assembly Tree Window Issue Commands for Node or the Entire Sub assembly This is a two state toggle button which has two different forms as follows a Specifies that the lock unlock blank unblank and highlight operation
331. tive Adrawing you can select a standard or an exploded view You can use the Adrawing in which you are currently working or you can activate a new Adrawing 1 In the standard view position the components in their assembled locations in the assembly see Moving a Component on page 8 24 2 File the assembly and remain active in the Adrawing 3 Click Adrawing from the top bar From the menu choose Toggle Exploded The following message appears indicating that the toggle has just occurred The current Adrawing is in Exploded orientation See The Exploded View on page 10 10 As You Activate an Adrawing You can activate an existing Adrawing in the Exploded view state using an option on the property sheet 1 Open the Activate Old Adrawing or Activate Old Assembly property sheet 2 Select the Exploded View On button When the assembly is activated you are in the exploded view Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 10 9 Adrawings and Alternate Views Basic Steps to Create an Alternate View The Exploded View When you are in the Exploded view state you do not change the actual positions of components in the assembly geometry You change only the appearance of their locations in the exploded view You need not lock the component and its associated model while working in an Exploded view Use options from the Move Component property sheet see Moving a Component on page 8 24 to rep
332. tool for HLR and shading of viewed model instances 12 2 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Documenting the Assembly Creating an Assembly Drawing Document Generating Hidden Line Representation HLR You can generate associative or nonassociative HLR in the CADDS Graphics window using the HIDE OBJECT and UPDATE HLRIMAGE commands This is the suggested method for engineering drawings You can optionally generate nonassociative HLR using the HLREDGE and HLRNOEDGE rendering options in the CHANGE RENDERVIEW commands available with CADDShade II functionality Please note The HIDE OBJECT HIDE HLRIMAGE commands and CADDShade II are only available in the Explicit assembly environment but valid for parametric and or explicit viewed model geometry You can use one of the following methods to produce an assembly drawing document HIDE OBJECT is the preferred technique for producing an assembly drawing document Although it performs more slowly than CADDShade II the graphic entities generated are associative optionally and in vector format resulting in clear graphics for the assembly drawing document HIDE OBJECT is performed in the Graphics window e Perform graphical hidden line removal using the HLREDGE and HLRNOEDGE rendering options in the CHANGE RENDERVIEW or RENDERVIEW commands The hidden line removal performed in this method is faster but limited in quality and accuracy as compared to the analytical
333. train a variable in one model to a variable in another model of the assembly activate the assembly s root node model 9 2 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Using Interpart Constraints About Interpart Constraints 7 Import the components representing the models that contain the variables you exported 8 Write an equation to relate a variable from one model to a variable from another model 9 If you change the value of one variable solve the imported components representing the models that contain variables affected by the variable value change 10 Regenerate the components whose associated models contain variables affected by the change The assembly can contain any number of constraint relationships among its associated models You can export and import more than one variable at a time You can also solve regenerate as many components as you want at the same time by selecting several components on the property sheets To increase the number of models that can be suspended set the following variable in your caddsrc local file where nn is the number of models you want to suspend plus 1 for the active model The default value is 6 setenv CADDS_MAX PART nn Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 9 3 Using Interpart Constraints Selecting Variables from a Model to Include in Your Assembly selecting Variables from a Model to Include in Your Assembly
334. tructure Build one master assembly in which all users shall work concurrently Each functional group requires its own subassembly branch in the master assembly Structure the assembly based on functional groupings For example a chassis subassembly would include the brake system subassemblies Assign an owner to each major subassembly branch in the master assembly The owner shall generate input and maintain the subassembly branch If one branch contains components from several designers a single owner is still required Include all high priority parts in the assembly structure High priority is determined by the group or project team as either package critical weight sensitive and so forth Have at least read access to all associated models in your assemblies Associate CADDS models to leaf nodes only not to subassembly nodes Use a standardized naming convention for both component names in the assembly structure as well as your CADDS models Should you change a component class or a model name communicate that information to the group The master assembly root node as well as the top level node of each subassembly must also conform to the naming conventions Ensure that all models associated with components in a branch belong to the same function group For each component class that does not have a model associated with it such as subassembly components use the No Model option on the Change Component property sheet Otherwi
335. tside CAMU Using CAMU you can e Design a product structure A logical diagram showing the relationships between different pieces of the structure See Building the Assembly Structure on page 3 5 e Have several users working concurrently on the same assembly See Several Users Can Work Concurrently on page 5 27 Locking prevents simultaneous editing of the same portion of the assembly See Locking Components Attribute Groups and Models on page 5 31 Filing adds your changes to the database See Filing Your Changes on page 4 2 Refreshing allows all users to see the most recently filed version of the assembly structure and geometry filed by you or another user See Refreshing the Main Assembly on page 5 36 1 2 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Introduction to Concurrent Assembly Mock Up What You Can Do With CAMU e Include other assemblies as subassemblies in the active main assembly See Adding Existing Assemblies to Your Assembly on page 3 21 e Optionally activate and edit a reference assembly within the active main assembly See Changing a Reference Assembly on page 7 25 e Relate geometry of one part model to geometry of another through the use of constraints As one part is modified other part models constrained to it can be updated See Chapter 9 Using Interpart Constraints e Use alternate orientations to isolate parts separate sub
336. u Reference 11 5 Defining Nongraphic Information for the Assembly Disassociating an Attribute Group from a Component Disassociating an Attribute Group from a Component To remove an established association between an attribute group and a specific component use Disassociate Attribute Group 1 Select the Disassociate Attribute icon The property sheet appears Figure 11 4 Dissociate Attribute Group property sheet Dissociate Attribute Group Reference Component Component Instance J ferankshaft_1 Attribute Group hrn ore Cancel 2 Specify the Attribute Group name and the Component Instance from which you are removing the association in the respective fields Please note If attribute values have been assigned to a component s you cannot remove the association between the component and the attribute group You must first remove the attribute value Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Defining Nongraphic Information for the Assembly Listing Attribute Groups Listing Attribute Groups To list the attribute groups associated with your assembly do the following 1 Select the List Attribute Group icon from the task set The property sheet appears Figure 11 5 List Attribute Groups property sheet List Attribute Groups wv fll Attribute Groups Global 4 Nonglobal Apply 2 Enter the name of the active assembly in the Assembly Name field 3 Click Al
337. u can then select the project and its accompanying assemblies and parts by clicking on the CVPATH menu bar on the Assembly LDM Example of setting multiple CVPATHs Your company makes automobiles Within the production environment you have projects setup for engine design frame design and body design However the users on each team need to work on all aspects of the automobile design You can set multiple CVPATH environments in your caddsrc local file to automatically access the correct set of file systems containing the assemblies and parts for each project setenv CVPATHPROJ1 users parts engine SHOME parts C setenv CVPATHPROJ2 users parts frame HOME parts C setenv CVPATHPROJ3 users parts body S HOME parts C With these CVPATHS set after you enter the LDM environment click on the CVPATH menu bar This displays a runtime list of all the available CVPATHs Active C path CYVPATH VPA THPRO 1 VPA THPROI2 VPA THPROIG If you are working on several different assembly projects and you do not need access to every part for a particular project organizing projects with CVPATH reduces the time taken to generate the LDM listing Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 2 21 Configuring Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Data Management Data Management You can use a data management tool such as Vault to perform checkin checkout and revision control on the assembly and all its constituent c
338. ues and Applying the Changes Changing Variable Values and Applying the Changes Use Change Variable to change the value of a variable of an imported component Use Solve Component to apply the change to other variables that are constrained to the variable whose value you changed Changing Variable Values Follow this procedure to change the variable values A 1 Select the Change Variable icon from the task set on the left side of the a 00 screen A property sheet appears Change Variable fi ee Mame Select Graphically The property sheet contains the variable name and its current value in this example the variable name is axle_ _ di and the value of the variable is 438 2 Change the value of the axle___d1 variable to 5 3 Choose the option Select Graphically to pick the parametric dimensions to perform the changes on the screen Select Graphically works for parametric dimensions in the root node It does not work on viewed in parametric dimensions in the same root node Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 9 17 Using Interpart Constraints Changing Variable Values and Applying the Changes Applying the Changes Automatic Mode Only After you change the value of an imported variable use Solve Component to apply the change to other variables that are constrained to it l ae 1 Select the Solve Component icon from the task set The property sheet appears 2 The b
339. uide and Menu Reference 1 15 Introduction to Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Assembly Tree Window Table 1 4 Options on the Assembly Tree Window Shortcut Menus Node Selected Option Suboption Component node Activate Add Assembly Component Blank Blank Component Blank Subassembly Unblank Subassembly Advanced Change Copy Component Mirror Delete Component All Instance Expand All or Collapse All Export Highlight Highlight Component Highlight Subassembly Unhighlight Subassembly Advanced Lock Lock Component Lock Subassembly Unlock Subassembly Advanced Move Quit View View Component View Subassembly Advanced Render ShadeNoWire WireFrame Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Introduction to Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Assembly Tree Window Options on the Assembly Tree Window Shortcut Menus Table 1 4 Node Selected Option Suboption Component node Reorder Report Brief Detailed Translucent Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Introduction to Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Assembly Tree Window Table 1 4 Options on the Assembly Tree Window Shortcut Menus Node Selected Option Suboption Reference Assembly node Activate Add Component Assembly Blank Blank Component Blank Subassembly Unblank Subassembly Advanced Chan
340. ull CADDS style path name setenv CV_ASSEMBLY_ HANDLE PART adhandlepart CV_UI_DEFAULT_ENV sets default environment when entering CADDS setenv CV_UI_DEFAULT_ENV assembly Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 2 3 Configuring Concurrent Assembly Mock Up caddsrc local File Information This eliminates the need to enter cadds5 with the assembly command line argument Additional environment variable options are as follows Table 2 1 Additional Environment Variable Options Environment Options explicit Explicit modeling menu environment with assembly pulldown assyexplicit Explicit assembly menu environment parametric Parametric modeling menu environment with assembly pulldown assyparametric Parametric assembly menu environment e CADDS_MAX_PART sets the maximum number of parts and Adrawings that can be suspended during a single CAMU session It also controls the number of components that can be imported during a single CAMU session If not set the default value of 6 is used The limit on the maximum number of suspended parts is determined by system resources like memory and swap space The example below sets the maximum number of suspended parts to 50 setenv CADDS_MAX PART 50 CV_UI_ACT_ASSY sets the default environment when you activate an assembly The default setting is assyparametric The setting appears in the Environment field on the LDM along with th
341. ure along with its dependent nodes Set the value of the CVUPS_TEXT_OUT environment variable to yes in the caddsrc or caddsrc_local file to enable plotting of hardtext The Plot Assembly Tree option is available in both the Parametric and Explicit Assembly environment Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 12 29 Documenting the Assembly Plotting To plot the assembly structure 1 2 Choose the Adrawing option on the top bar Choose the Plot Assembly Tree option on the Adrawing menu The Plot Assembly Tree property sheet appears Plot Assenbly Tree Reference Component Component Instance DEEE 0000 7 Node offset 7 Rotate You can specify the options on the Plot History Tree property sheet as Reference Specifies the name of the reference assembly assembly instance Once specified you can plot the assembly structure of a Component within the reference assembly Leave this field blank if you want to plot a component in the active main assembly Component Specifies the component instance to plot within either the active main assembly or the reference assembly that you specify Scale Specifies the scaling factor for the output The default scaling factor is 1 Scale To Drawing Size Specifies to scale the output to a standard drawing size Choose the required standard drawing size The default size is A4 Char Height Specifies the character height of the text of
342. urfaces the Mate option ensures that the two faces touch each other at a point or along a line The mating surfaces face each other the normals are in the opposite direction The two faces that mate are identified by selecting the edges of the face For the plane option the faces must be planar You can specify an offset value between the mating faces Align Use the Align option to align points the normal of planar faces edges of solids and or axes of revolved surfaces When you align points two points on the mating components are made to coincide Specify the two points by selecting them from the associated model of the applicable components Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 6 15 Parametric Positioning Using Constrain Component You can also use this option to align two planes such that the planes remain parallel at a given offset and face the same direction the normal to the face is in the same direction If the offset value is zero the planes coincide Similarly you can specify that the edges of two solids be aligned or made parallel to one another You can use this option to make faces coaxial if the selected faces are revolved surfaces of cylinders Acceptable methods and inputs are e Plane Plane Two planar faces from mating components along with an offset value default offset value is zero e Edge Edge Straight line edges of solids e RevSurface A cylindrical face e
343. user is prompted for the full path of the assembly name The assembly name is entered either in UNIX style or CADDS style without the _db extension For example either users jdoe parts engine or USERS UDOE PARTS ENGINE are acceptable Upon successful connection to the ODB_SERVER the tool lists all users attached to the assembly in the following format USER ID USER NAME SYSTEM NAME PROCESS_ID USER TYPE 1 jdoe reggae 8539 CAMU User 2 bgates windfall 3456 API User 3 abc system1 1550 CAMU User 4 def system2 2545 CAMU User 5 ijk system3 3232 CAMU User 6 pqr system4 4342 CAMU User 7 xyz system5 5478 CAMU User The tool prompts for the user ID of the non active session After checking that the selected session is not in use it releases the appropriate locks and detaches the user process from the server Following this action the other users have access to the components that were locked 2 20 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Configuring Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Arranging Projects Using CVPATH Arranging Projects Using CVPATH In a large production environment it may be desirable to separate various aspects of assembly design into separate projects or zones You can organize various directories or remote file systems that contain parts and assemblies for individual projects by setting the CVPATH variable in the caddsrc local file After organizing projects with CVPATH after you enter CADDS yo
344. ve been edited at the piece part level are updated positionally when you activate the adrawing and file the suspended part In multiuser CAMU parametrically positioned parts are positionally updated when the other user files the changed part and you refresh the assembly For example User A and User B are working concurrently in an assembly User A 1 Activates a model that has been positionally constrained 2 Makes a modeling change to the parametrically positioned model 3 Activates the adrawing thus suspending the part 4 Files the suspended part User A sees the positional effects of that change when he files the model User B 1 Refreshes the assembly User B sees the positional effect of User A s actions Please note To facilitate this scenario you must set the following in your caddsrc or caddsrc local before invoking a CAMU session setenv CADDSASSOC_UID yes For more details see CADDSASSOC_UID on page 6 38 See Several Users Can Work Concurrently on page 5 27 to learn more about working in a multiuser assembly environment Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 6 37 Parametric Positioning Using Pre Revision 8 0 CADDS Models Using Pre Revision 8 0 CADDS Models To use parametric positioning functionality on pre revision 8 0 parts you must do the following 1 Set the following in your caddsrc or caddsrc local setenv CADDSASSOC_UID yes
345. ver named server It contains the assembly directory usr2 parts assemblies and the assembly part library directory usr3 cadds libparts The local systems accessing the DB_DAEMON_HOST are called system1 system2 etc 2 Establish the mount points from the local systems to the file server and test them on the local systems e Are the assemblies and parts directories mountable on the file server e When the mount point directories are created on the local systems and mounted on the file server you can list the files contained in the mounted directories when you cd to them 2 12 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Configuring Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Configuring Multi User CAMU Example On local systems mkdir p usr2 parts assemblies usr3 cadds libparts mount server usr2 parts assemblies usr2 parts assemblies mount server usr3 cadds libparts usr3 cadds libparts cd usr2 parts assemblies pwd should output usr2 parts assemblies on all local systems 1s are the files in the directory listed out Follow the same procedure to check usr3 cadds libparts 3 Configure user caddsrc local files for multi user CAMU e Set the DB_DAEMON_HOST variable to the system server For example setenv DB DAEMON _HOST server e Set the CVPATH variable to access desired assembly and parts directories Example 1 In this example the caddsrc local files of the users are set up so that the assembly d
346. y Closed and Locked Reference Assembly Open Locked and Active e Double click the lock icon to toggle the lock status of the component e Double click the eye icon to toggle between the view and unview states of the component e Double click the highlight icon to unhighlight the component e Double click the blank icon to unblank the component e Double click the folder icon to toggle between the closed and open states of the assembly node Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Introduction to Concurrent Assembly Mock Up Assembly Tree Window Shortcut Menus within the Assembly Tree Window You can access CAMU options from the Assembly Tree Window To access these options right click within the Assembly Tree Window A dynamic shortcut menu appears For example if you select a component node and right click the shortcut menu lists the options for use on the selected component node The following table lists the options on the shortcut menu which depend upon the type of node you select in the Assembly Tree Window Table 1 4 Options on the Assembly Tree Window Shortcut Menus Node Selected Option Suboption None New Adrawing Old Adrawing Save Viewstates File Adraws Models List Adrawings List Assemblies Refresh Assembly Scroll Structure Delete Adrawing Undo Acommand Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User G
347. y Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 6 1 Parametric Positioning Understanding Parametric Positioning Understanding Parametric Positioning Both the Parametric Assembly and Explicit Assembly environments enable you to explicitly position components specifically their associated model geometry in 3D space using tools such as Move Component and the View and Position option of View Component However the Parametric Assembly environment enables you to parametrically constrain components using the following e Assemble Component e Constrain Component e Select Assemble This provides more powerful design possibilities and controls than simple explicit positioning of the components Please note Interpart constraints described in Chapter 9 Using Interpart Constraints and parametric positioning described in this chapter are two separate and distinct means of using parametrization in an assembly They are two different systems Task Set Options The parametric positioning icons are shown below Care tain Comparer Cs play UU neers wed Assembies Component Subass emblies Selec Assemble 6 2 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Parametric Positioning Understanding Parametric Positioning Constrain Component Enables you to create parametric positioning constraints in the active main assembly as well as in the active reference assembly See Using Constrain Component on page
348. y Structure er disk wheel_ 4 ve tyre_i l f diska wheel_2 4 tyre_i 2 f diska wheel_i 2 T tyre disk wheel_z z Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 3 27 Creating a New Assembly Adding Existing Assemblies to Your Assembly Select the reference instance hub_1 and choose the Close Reference option on the Open Close Reference property sheet The gt gt symbol appears on the hub_1 reference assembly node curtailing the rest of the reference assemblies as shown in the given figure Assembly Structure hubi gt a bode wheel_4 2K Hub_2 SSeS _ m ae whee _2 2K 3 28 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Creating a New Assembly Adding Existing Assemblies to Your Assembly Select the reference instance whee1_2 2 and choose the Close reference option on the Open Close Reference property sheet The gt gt symbol appears on the wheel_2 2 reference assembly node curtailing the rest of the reference assemblies as shown in the given figure Assembly Structure hubi gt C disk wheeli 2 Se TE KO E f wWheel_2 2 gt gt 1 F Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 3 29 Creating a New Assembly Adding Existing Assemblies to Your Assembly Select the reference instance hub_1 and choose the Open Reference option on the Open
349. y remains unchanged Example Exporting with Referencing In this example create a new assembly using a portion of the active main assembly Automatically delete and then import the selected subassembly as a reference assembly All components in the source subassembly body_1 and its children and the parent subassembly node camera_1 must be locked Please note You cannot select and export a subassembly whose top level component is associated to a model For example if you select body_1 in the structure below and body is associated to a model the EXPORT ASSEMBLY command would fail The root node is the only exception to this rule You can select the root node camera_1 and use the EXPORT ASSEMBLY command to create a duplicate assembly structure with a new name See Exporting the Active Assembly on page 3 35 Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 3 33 Creating a New Assembly Creating a New Assembly by Exporting Repeat the procedure in Example Exporting without Referencing on page 3 32 but enable the Convert Reference option on the Export Assembly property sheet The resulting assembly structure will be The following assembly is created Please note All associations in the original assembly are maintained in the converted reference except parametric positional constraints If you had used a command such as DISPLAY STRUCTURE COMPRESS the structure display is duplicated in the r
350. your assembly When you view components of the assembly the Adrawing uses the information you have previously defined Each new Adrawing you activate gives you a clean sheet on which to define view information You then view the components you want to have appear in the Adrawing When you activate a different Adrawing or model the Adrawing or model in which you are just active is suspended Later when you activate the suspended Adrawing it retains the view state Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 10 5 Adrawings and Alternate Views Using Alternate Views in Your Design Using Alternate Views in Your Design There are two view states possible on any Adrawing One is the standard view state The other is the alternate or exploded view state The standard view state allows you to view components in their actual positions wherever you have positioned them The exploded or alternate view state lets you fudge or fake the position of a viewed model instance You can toggle between these two states The standard view state is global across all Adrawings in the assembly The toggled view state is unique to each Adrawing in the assembly see Adrawings and the Alternative View State on page 10 3 The scale model units location of the origin and so forth are the same for both the view states in the same Adrawing Views on the active Adrawing are not affected when you toggle to the alternate

Concurrent Assembly Mock-Up User Guide and Menu Reference

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents